Script Case Manual and Documentation

Introduction
Introduction
What is ScriptCase
ScriptCase is a complete development tool. Through a friendly web interface, ScriptCase creates PHP
applications extremely fast with quality, saving time , lowering costs, increasing productivity and team integration.
How does ScriptCase work?

The developer can connect ScriptCase to the databases available in the market, such as SQL Server, Oracle,
DB2, MYSQL, Postgres, and also create applications using multiple databases.
You will be able to develop easily and really fast:

Grid
Reports
Charts
Filters
Forms
Menus
Tabs
PDF documents
Blank applications
Container
Calendars
Always looking for new technology, ScriptCase has a variety of components:

Ajax Support
Auto-complete
Master-Details
Editable Grid
HTML Editor
Database Dictionary
Documentation creator
Installed in a web server, Scriptcase can be simultaneously used by many developers through a browser,
allowing remote and collaborative development. The source code is PHP and works independently of the tool,
allowing its publishing on any PHP enabled Web server.
Source code
ScriptCase generates the source-code (PHP, JavaScript, HTML and AJAX). The generated source is totally
independent of the tool, and can be published on any PHP enabled Web server. The PHP language is free (GNU)
and can be used in Windows or Linux (every PHP processing is made in the server).
Extra Tools
ScriptCase brings some extra tools:
SQL Builder
A Tool to assist the SQL creation in wizard form to grid applications. It allows the choice of the database, tables,
fields, order by and where clauses, as well as, the built command simulations saved for posterior use.
Database Builder
A Tool to manage your database. A complete database manager tool that allows to build or edit databases, tables
and fields.
Data Dictionary
Allows to mantain a data dictionary. It creates data repository, synchronize tables and much more.
Express Edit
System tool to bulk edit applications for faster developement.
Helpcase
Used to create webhelps, standardizing your documentation and helping the end user to understand the system
and/or applications.
Buttons Management
Allows systems buttons standardization and centralized features management
Themes Editor
User friendly themes editor to manage CSS settings.
Databases
ScriptCase doesn't execute commands directly in databases. It uses a layer of access - ADODB. This layer
makes an abstraction of the database, allowing the use of SQL statements to different databases (ODBC or
OLEDB standard).
Compatible databases:
Scriptcase Installation
Overview
The ScriptCase installation process is described according to the environment type.
ScriptCase Linux Installer
ScriptCase MacOSX Installer
ScripCase Windows Installer
Scriptcase Installer - Linux
ScriptCase Linux - Installer

Using the scriptcase installer
ScriptCase's installer is a executable file for linux. An application for self-extracting and configuring APACHE,
PHP and SCRIPTCASE on your Operating System.
In order to execute the installer correctly, we need to give it "execute permissions". Scriptcase installer will install
automatically in your computer:
1 - Apache Web Server 2.2.15.
2 - PHP 5.3 with the mbstring, zip and gd extensions enabled.
3 - Zend Guard Loader 3.3.
4 - Scriptcase Version 7.
* Before we proceed with the installation is recomended to do not have any other web environment (such as
XAMP, Zend Server, etc...) installed on the machine.
* Is aways recomended to have some basic knowledgment of environment in order to use the terminal.
* We recomend the use of the SQLite database.
This mannual will teach us to install ScriptCase in 3 simple steps:

1. Step 1:Execute ScriptCase's installer.
2. Step 2:Pick the installer's settings.
3. Step 3:Execute ScriptCase.
Step 1: Execute ScriptCase's installer.

1 - Find the installer accessing the folder and subfolders using the CD command.
Ex:
user@computer:~$ cd /your/download/folder
HINT
Scriptcase Installer requires to be executed with administrative permissions to make changes on your computer.
We need to require admin permissions (aka "root permissions") in order to execute the installer.
2 - Require root access by using SUDO SU and typing your password (if needed).
Ex:
user@computer:~/your/download/folder$ sudo su
3 - Grant execute permissions to the file.
Ex:
user@computer:~/your/download/folder$ chmod -x scriptcasev7_installer.run
4 - Run the installer.

Ex:
user@computer:~/your/download/folder$ ./scriptcasev7_installer.run
Step 2: Pick the installer's settings.

In the images bellow we are able to see all the installation's properties.
1 - Select installer language.
1. Language: Select the language that will be shown on the installation process. This will not select
ScriptCase's Language.
Click "Forward" to continue...
2 - Welcome message.
This screen shows the installer's welcome message

3 - License agreement.
1. Do you accept this license?: You must read and accept the terms before continuing.
4 - Installation directory.
HINT
The default installation path is "/opt/NetMake/v7/". Don't change this path unless you know what you are doing.
1. Installation Directory: Put here the path for the installation.
2. Browse: This button allows you to choose from your folders for the installation path or create a new one.
5 - Apache Configuration.
1. Port: This will define what port will Apache service run on. We recommend to use the default value.
2. Email Administrator: This is the Apache's administrator e-mail. This is the configuration for Apache only,
not ScriptCase.
3. Apache Domain: Apache domain must be defined here. More info about Apache domains here.

6 - Install.
The installer will now start the installation process.
1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress.

7 - Completing Setup.
1. View Readme File: When you finish the installer, it will show the README file.
2. Open Scriptcase 7: When you finish the installer, it will open ScriptCase.
Click "Finish" to complete.
Step 3: Start Using ScriptCase.

Now to access your scriptcase, you must access on the browser the IP adress and the port you choose for
Apache.
Ex:
http://localhost:97.
Scriptcase Installer - Macos
ScriptCase MacOS - Installer

ScriptCase's installer is a executable file for MacOS. An application for self-extracting and configuring APACHE,
In order to execute the installer correctly, we need to give it "execute permissions". Scriptcase installer will install
automatically in your computer:

* Is aways recomended to have some basic knowledgment of environment in order to use the terminal.



HINT
The default installation path is "/Applications/NetMake/v7/". Don't change this path unless you know what you
are doing.
not ScriptCase.
6 - Install.


Apache.
Ex:
Scriptcase Installer - Windows

???
ScriptCase Windows - Installer

ScriptCase's installer is a executable file for Windows. An application for self-extracting and configuring APACHE,
Scriptcase installer will install automatically in your computer:



Click "Ok" to continue...

Click "Next" to continue...
HINT
The default installation path is "C:\Program Files (x86)\NetMake\v7". Don't change this path unless you know
what you are doing.
not ScriptCase.
6 - Install.


Apache.
Ex:
Scriptcase Manual Installation

Requirements:
Web server with PHP support, such as Apache, IIS, Abyss and more.
PHP 5.3 or higher, with modules enabled mbstring, GD2 and zip enabled.
Zend Guard Loader 3.3.0 or higher.
Standard SQL database (SQLite, MySQL, MSSQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle and DB2) available to PHP. *
*We recommend using the SQLite database

Related links:
PHP (Official Site).
Zend (Site).
Apache (Official Site).
With the environment already installed, you must download the Scriptcase .zip in the downloads section of the
site http://www.scriptcase.net.
After configuring your environment, extract the file to a temporary folder, using the "extract here" your file
decompressor.
It will create a folder with the name: scriptcase.xxx.
Rename it to scriptcase and move to the root of your web server.
Finally, open the browser and access the ScriptCase to start the installation process.
Example: http://server:port/scriptcase
The screen below shows the choice of language (English) to use during the installation.
Check enabled extensions. If you check the not installed extensions, so ScriptCase tries to configure the php.ini
file to recognize these extensions.
Now, you'll choose whether you prefer the Typical Installation or a Customized installation.
Typical Installation
Scriptcase will install everything automatically. After choosing a typical installation, you will be automatically
directed to your Scriptcase development environment Scriptcase. By default the user is: admin and password:
admin.
Customized Installation
You could choose on which database you wish to install ScriptCase and the default username and password to
access it.
ScriptCase needs some permissions to work properly. Check the permissions.

NOTE: In case of IIS Web Server, requires permission
IUSR_NOMEDOSERVIDOR to the user, in the following directories:
of
Writing,
Reading
and
Execution
1 - PHP installation directory.

2 - ScriptCase Directory.
3 - File cmd.exe on Windows.
This step consists in defining the database in which the ScriptCase is installed, the default option is SQLite
(Recommended), requires only that your PHP module is enabled, but you can do the installation in other
databases.
The tables used by ScriptCase were created successfully.
Here you create a login and password for the ScriptCase's administrator.
If the installation has been successful this screen appears. Click continue to boot ScriptCase.
Login screen to access the ScriptCase the username and password entered earlier.
Accessing Scriptcase
User Authentication
Enter the user login and password at the login page as in the image below. Use the following information to login
after a default installation:
user : admin
password : admin
Image1: Login interface.
After user/password validation and according to user profile, ScriptCase displays the options and projects
available to that user.
Note:The ScriptCase user administrator has access to all ScriptCase functionally , including functions to add new
users.
Start Page
When accessing Scriptcase, if you don't have any project, you will see a start page with the first steps you should
take to create your project.
If you already have a project, you will see a screen to select or create a project.
After select/create a project, the Scriptcase Workspace is displayed.
Scriptcase Workspace
Layout Overview
Workspace layout Overview

The Scriptcase workspace lets you view applications, object properties and operations available. Using a
integrated workspace, all options are into a single larger application window.
Once authenticated / logged in the ScriptCase, the user is redirected to a Home page similar to the "Windows
Explorer". From there the user can select actions such as: create folders to organize applications, display
applications previously created, copy, rename, etc.
Image1: Workspace Layout Interface.
1 Main Menu 2 Toolbar 3 Taskbar 4 Project Explorer 5 Application List
Main Menu
At the top of the page is available a hierarchical menu containing all ScriptCase functionallity options.
Image1: Main menu interface.
Hierarchic Menu options:
Toolbar
Use the Toolbar icons to access ScriptCase features
ScriptCase functionality icons:
Toolbar - Main menu

Home
Return to the Project Home
New Project
Create a new project
Open Project
Open an existent project
Close Project
Close existent project
New
Connecion
Edit
Connecion
SQL Builder
Create new Connection
New
Express
Creation
Save
Generate
Source
Run
Deploy
Web Help
Logout
Edit existing connection

Run the tool for building the SQL
commands.
Create applications through the wizard
resource
Create applications in batches (express
mode).
Save the edited application. ( * )
Generate the application source program .
(*)
Save the application, generate the source
program and run it. ( * )
Deploy the application to a sever. ( * )
ScriptCase On-line documentation. All
functionality.
Exit from ScriptCase.
(*) The options Save, Generate, Run and Deploy are

available when an application is being edited.
Other toolbar attributes :

User: Display active user name.
Project and version: Display selected project / version.
Taskbar
The Taskbar displays the applications opened for editing, allowing to edit more than one application at the same
time.
Image1: TaskBar Interface.
Project Explorer
In the Main Menu page are listed the folders and the applications developed with ScriptCase.
Image1: Project Explorer.
1 - Folder functions
It allows to manage folders in the project:

Create Create a new folder to organize the
project applications.
Rename Rename the selected folder.
Delete Delete the selected folder.
2 - Filters
It is used to filter applications in the current folder of the project.
All applications It lists all applications of the folder and subfolders.

My applications It lists all applications of the folder and subfolders developed by the current user.
Recents
It lists all applications generated recently.
3 - Folders Structure
List of folders and subfolders existing into the project.
4 - Search
Search for applications names or descriptions in the project. The search is done within the selected folder, and
the search results are highlighted with yellow.
Applications List
Displays folders and applications. Each line offers action icons at application level.
1 - LABELS
Application
Description
Creator
Generation
Status
Application Name.
Application Description.
Application Developer.
Date Generation.
Application Status (updated e outdated).
2 - OPTIONS
Run
Edit
Copy
Run the application. If it is outdated the

source code will be generated before the
execution
Open the application for editing.
Creates an application copy. Enter a name to
the copy.
Rename Changes the application name.
3 - Footer
It allows to run a function for multiple applications at the same time:
The checkbox allows to select all applications listed in the application list.
Other options are:

Generate
Deploy
Delete
Copy
Move
Export
Generate the source code.

Deploy the applications.
Delete the selected applications.
Copy the applications to another project.
Move the applications to a different folder.
Export the applications.
Project
Project
Scriptcase uses projects to manage the applications development. A practical and intuitive way of organizing the
development environment.
The project elements are: the applications (forms, grids, menus, tabs, etc.) and connections to the database.
The user can create and maintain a Project Version History, he can link users to projects, themes, languages,
and generate source codes, deploy or export part of or all the project, using the Project mangement resources.
Within a project you can define patterns to create applications,
This topic includes the available resources to project management, which are:
New Project
Created Projects using Scriptcase
Properties
Default Values
Open Project
Delete
Versions History
Increment Version
Generate Source-Code
Deploy
Export Applications
Import Applications
Report
Show Diagram
Application Search
Export Projects
Import Projects
Security
Log
New Project
This option is used to create one more project in your ScriptCase framework.
Image1 : New Project.
Image2:Creating a new project.
Attributes:
Project Name - Define a name to your project. Blank spaces can't be used there.
Project Description -Project short description.
Version - Initial Project version.
- Select an image to represent your project .
- Upload a new image to scripcase.
ScriptCase provides examples of projects demostrating what can be done with the tool. These projects can be
downloaded and imported to your Scriptcase.
Locales - Select the languages available in the project from the list and set the project default language. Use the
interface below to add or remove languages to the project. Click in Set default to change the project default
language. When a default language is not selected ScriptCase will select a default value based on the user
browser values or the system settings.
Image3: Selecting project locales
Locales - It is the combination of language and regional settings. So a country with more than one language
may have a regional setting and more than one language, ex.: English (Canada) and French (Canada).
These relationships (locales) are available when creating or editing a project.
Themes - Define themes available to the applications.
Image 4: Selecting themes for the project.
Systems
It is possible to download eight different systems made using Scriptcase, they are:
Security System
Training/Course Organizer System
Online Shop
Helpdesk System
Project Management System
Samples
News System
Album System
These systems are available for download on the project creating process.
Image 01: Create new project screen.
When importing the systems we have to choose which database Scriptcase will export the system tables.
MySQL
SQLite
MS SQL Server
PostgreSQL
Oracle
MS Access
Interbase/Firebird
Properties
This option changes the projects attributes.
Image1: Project Properties Interface.
Image2: Edit Project Interface.
Attributes:
Project Short Description - Update project short description.
It is possible also to update the project complete description. Use the textarea with editor features provided by
ScriptCase.
Select the languages available in the project from ScripCase language list and set the project default language.
Use the interface below to add or remove languages to the project. Click in Set default to update the project
default language. When a default language is not selected ScriptCase will select a default value based on the
user browser values or the system settings.
Image3: Selecting project locales
Locales - It is the combination of language and regional settings. So a country with more than one language may
have a regional setting and more than one language, ex.: English (Canada) and French (Canada). These
relationships (locales) are available at project creation or editing.
Image4: Selecting themes for the project.
Themes - Define schemes available to the applications.
Default Values
Using the Default Values is possible to customize a series of Project attributes, avoiding repetitive tasks and
increasing productivity.
Image1: Default Values Access
Image2: Default Settings Interface.
1 - Common Settings:
Logo - Standard logo image used in applications.
Records Per Page- Record quantity per page, used in grids and forms applications.
Display Line number- .
Display Title- .
ShowSummary- Display Summary in Grid Applications. It is implemented via an SQL count and as such can
add performance overhead .
2 - Application Settings:
There we can set some default values to each type of application, such as:
To Set the table width.
Select a template to the header and footer.
To set the field aligments.
Select which buttons in the toolbar will be available by default when creating an application.
etc.
3 - HTML Editor
Configure the toolbar attributes used in 'editor html fields' in form or control application.
Attributes:
Localization- Define the toolbar position in the editor box.
Buttons Alignment - Define the toolbar buttons alignment (right, left or center).
Statusbar - Define the toolbar display status.
Toolbar Count - Define the toolbar quantity (see image below).
Buttons's Organization - Select buttons to display in Toolbar.
Preview - Display the selected buttons.
4 - Libraries
Select and enable the libraries to use in applications events.
Open Project
You can open or go from one project to another one anytime acessing the menu File -> Open Project.
Image1: Open Project Menu.
Select to open an existent project.
Image1: Selecting a Project.
Delete
Delete a Project, all applications and connections. Project users are not excluded.
Note: Confirm project deletion (Image2) since it is final and not reversible. A project without back-up cannot be
restored.
Image1: Delete Project Menu.
Image2: Delete confirmation.
Version History
Maintain project history using Version History. Delete, open/close or edit a project version.
Image 1: Version History Menu.
Image 2: Version Description Interface.
Attributes:
Delete - Delete all applications of the Project for selected version.
Status - Open/Close a version of the Project.
Edit - Edit the version of the Project. Only available if the versions status is "Open"
After clicked to 'Edit' a release, Scriptcase opens that project release.
Image2: Versions Description of Scriptcase interface.
Increment Version
Increment version allows to manager the Project development, by separating the versions that has been
developed.
Image 1: Increment Version Menu.
When a new project version is generated, it will keep a copy of the previous version, allowing the development of
the new version.
Image 2: Increment Version Interface.
Attributes:
Current version - Current Version of the Project.
New Version - Id number of the New Version.
Description - Project Description.
Generate Source-code
Generate the project applications source code.
Image1: Select application Menu.
It allows to generate the entire project source code or selected applications.

If the option Selected applications is used, so the application are listed in accordance with its type or folder.
Deploy
The deployment process involves publishing the ScriptCase developed applications (and libraries) in a PHP
supported WEB server.
For more information, Click here.
Export Applications
Image 1: Export Project Menu
It allows to export all applications of the project or just selected applications.

If the option Select applications is used, so the application are listed in accordance with its type or folder.
Then ScriptCase generates a link to the backup file (.ZIP). Click on the link to download it.
Image 2: Routine backup Interface .
Import Applications
Use it to upload and import an exported zip file to your project.
Image 1: Import Applications Menu.
Select the zip file that were exported by ScriptCase.
Image 2: Import Applications Interface.
Check the list of applications contained in the zip. Click on Restore, then click OK after finish the process.
Report
Provide two types of project report: Applications List and Developers summary.
Image1: Project Reports Menu
Applications List
The Applications List displays historical and analytical information about the project applications.
Image2: Applications List.
The Applications List allows to display all the table inserts (SQL) existing in the project.
Clicking in SHOW INSERTS, the following screen is displayed.
Image4: Applications insert Interface.
Image5: Table Insert Interface.
Developers summary
The Developers summary report display a developer application distribution in a detail or chart format.
Image6: Report (Summary by Developers) Interface.
Show Diagram
Image1: Show Diagram.
Image2: Diagram.
Application Search
Search for an attribute in all applications:
Image1: Application Search Menu.
Image2: Application Search Interface.
Export Project
Use this option to save the project and all project applications in a zip file that you can import in another
ScriptCase.
Image 1: Export Project Application Menu.
Select the project to export.
Image 2: Export Application Interface.
Then ScriptCase generates a link to the backup file (.ZIP). Click on the link to download it.
Image 3: Routine backup Interface .
Import Project
Use it to upload and import a zip exported file to your open project.
Image: Import Applications Interface.
Step 1 - Select the zip with Project that were exported by ScriptCase.
Image1: Import Applications Interface.
Security
Making use of ScriptCase security resources you can implement access rules for the system being developed,
further decreasing development time of a project, considering that the ScriptCase will generate access
applications and all validations automatically.
Image 1: Security Module Menu.
1. Type - The First step is used to select the level of security. There are three security levels and each level is
based on a data model for storing information such as user accounts, passwords, access profiles, groups, etc.
Image2: Security Module - Type.
Types:
User - It creates an application based on security for user level. Where the application is linked to user login.
Application - It creates an application based on the application level security. Where the application is
related to the user.
Group - It creates an application based on security for the Group level. Where is defined the access of each
group to certain applications.
2. Select Connection - The Second step is common for any Type and it is used to select what database
connection will be used to create the Security module.
Image 3: Security Module - Select Connection.
Select Connection:
Connection - Select a database connection from the project.
Existing or Create Tables - You can choose if Scriptcase will create the tables in your database or it it will
use existent tables.
Table prefix - Prefix used to create the table names.
Delete tables if they exist. - Delete the tables to create new ones.
3. Associate - The Third step is different to each Type of security level and it is used to associate the fields from
the security module with the fields from database. So it is just needed if you have selected the option to use
"Existing Tables" in the last step.
User
Based on user level security. Where the application is linked to user login.
Image 4: User Interface.
User:
Table - Define the table "Users" used by the system.
Login - Set the field to stores the User login.
Password - Set the field to stores the User Password.
Name - Set the field to stores the User Name.
E-mail - Set the field to stores the E-mail.
Active - Set the field to stores if the user is active or not.

Activation code - Set the field to stores the Activation code.
Administrator privilege - Set the field to stores if the user has administrator privileges.
User / App
Based on application level security. Where the applications is related to the user.
Image 5: User / App Interface.
1 - User:
2 - Application:
Table - Set the table to store all project applications.
Code - Define the field to store the code or the application name.
Description - Set the field to store the application description.
Type of application - Set the field to store the application type.
5 - User / Application:
Table - Set the table to store the relationship between groups and project applications.
Login - Define the field to store the User Login.
Application Name - Define the field to store the application name.
Access Privilege - Define the field to store if the user has privilege to access the application.
Insert Prvilege- Define the field to store if the user has privilege to insert new records in the application.
Delete Privilege - Define the field to store if the user has privilege to delete records in the application.
Update Prvilege- Define the field to store if the user has privilege to update records in the application.
Export Privilege - Define the field to store if the user has privilege to export records in the application.
Print Prvilege- Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to print records in the application.
User / Group / App

Based on security for the Group level. Where is defined the access of each group to certain applications.
<IMG
SRC="http://192.168.254.248/tools/nm/sc_helpv7/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0056_seg_user_grp.png"">
Image 6: User / Group / App Interface.
1 - User:
2 - Group:
Table - Set the table to stores the groups created in the system.
ID - Define the field that will store the group code.
Description - Set the field that will store the group description.
3 - Application:
Table - Set the table to store all project applications.
Code - Define the field to store the code or the application name.
Description - Set the field to store the application description.
Type of application - Set the field to store the application type.
4 - User / Group:
Table - Set the table to store the relationship between users and groups in the project.
Login - Set the field to store your login.
Group Code - Define the field to store the group code.
5 - Group / Application:
Table - Set the table to store the relationship between groups and project applications.
Group Code - Define the field to store the group code.
Application Name - Define the field to store the application name.
Access Privilege - Define the field to store if the group has privilege to access the application.
Insert Prvilege- Define the field to store if the group has privilege to insert new records in the
application.
Delete Privilege - Define the field to store if the group has privilege to delete records in the application.
Update Prvilege- Define the field to store if the group has privilege to update records in the application.
Export Privilege - Define the field to store if the group has privilege to export records in the application.
Print Prvilege- Define the field to store if the group has privilege to print records in the application.
4. Configuration - The fourth step is used to inform the settings used on the security module.
Image 7: Settings Interface
1 - General:
Prefix applications - Create the security applications with a prefix in the name.
Encryption - Define if the password will use encryption.
Enable Security - Enable the option "use security" in each application.
Use Captcha - Enable the option to use CAPTCHA in the login screen.
Folder - It creates a folder in the project to security applications.
Theme - Define the theme to the applications.
Log - Define the Log Scheme used in the security applications.
Menu - It allows to create or select a Menu application to include the security module.
Menu Type - Define the Menu type, if the option to create a new menu applications was set in the item
above.
2 - Login:
Minimum size - Minimum size of characters typed by the user.
Maximum size - Maximum size of characters typed by the user.
Send e-mail link for new password - Define wich characters the end-user can type.
3 - Retrieve Password:
Send email with password - Define if the user can retrieve the password receiving it by e-mail.
Reset password and send new email - Define if the user can retrieve the password reseting the old
and receiving a new one by e-mail.
Send e-mail link for new password - Define if the user can retrieve the password receiving a link by email to register a new password.
4 - New Users:
Allows the registration of new users - A link is created on the login screen allowing the new users
registration.
Requires activation by email - New users receive an activation link by email.
Send email to administrator - When a new user is registered, the administrator receives an email to
allows or not that user to access the system.
5 - E-mail Settings:
SMTP Server - Define the SMTP server.
SMTP Port - Define the SMTP port.
SMTP User - Define the SMTP user.
SMTP Password - Define the SMTP password.
SMTP E-mail - Define the SMTP e-mail.
5. Insert data - The fifth step is used to populate the tables Users and Groups.
Image 8: Insert Data Interface
Insert data:
Login - User Login.
Password - User password.
Name - User name
E-mail - User e-mail.
Active - Activate the user.
Administrator privileges - Define if the user has administrator privileges ( all features enabled ).
Group - Name of the administrator group.
6. Add applications - The sixth step is used to populate the table Applications.
Note: This step is not needed if you are using the "User" security type.
Image 9: Add Applications Interface
Checking the option, Scriptcase will insert in the Applications Table, the name of each application existing in the
project.
7. Profile - The last step is used to save in a profile all settings used on the steps to be used in other projects.
Image 10: Profile Interface
You can save a profile to any Scriptcase user, just to that user or just to be used in that project.
Log
Making use of ScriptCase Log resources you can implement a complete Log system to your projects. Storing all
data that was updated or deleted by the end-user and which applications they are accessing.
Image 1: Log Module Menu
Create / Edit
This option is used to create or modify a new scheme of Log module to your project.
Image 2: Creating a Log Scheme.
Once you already have a Log Scheme created, they will be listed to be edited or erased.
Image 3: Log Scheme List.
Applications
Here we can define which applications and events will be tracked.
At the top we can apply actions to all lines or we can though the list and select an action to each line individually.
Image 4: Applications Interface.
At the bottom of the page we have options to filter the applications that are being listed.
Image 5: Toolbar on the bottom.
Connecting Your Database

Connecting Scriptcase To Your Database
CONNECTING YOUR DATABASE
Access
DB2
DBF
Firebird
Informix
Interbase
MySQL
Oracle
PostgresSQL
MS SQL Server - Windows
MS SQL Server - Linux
SQLite
SQLite PDO
SyBase
Foxpro
Access
Ms Access
Home >> Connections >> MS-Access
Requirements:
* The database Access (File .MDB) should be in the same web server where PHP is installed on;
* Windows must have installed MDAC28SDK or newer (Windows 2000 already exceed the standard in the
installation);
* Access databases using security (user and password) can only connect using ODBC.
The Connection with Access Database in ScriptCase can be done in two ways: ADO or ODBC.
Connecting Access via ADO.

Connecting Access via ODBC.
Connecting Access Via Ado

Home >> Connections >> MS-Access >> Connecting Access via ADO
To connect your Access Database using ADO, check the phpinfo () if the COM option is enabled. If not install
the package MDAC28SDK and restart your machine.
When the option is enabled in the COM Diagnosis proceed with the establishment of the connection
Use the following ADO driver:
Accdb
Extension
MicroSoft
Access
Driver
(*mdb,
*accdb)
CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (MSACCESS)

Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection.
Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Connection", click on the sub
item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right screen to create connection, click on the image of
the MS Access database.
Step 3: In the picture below, fill in the required specifications:
Connection name - Set the name of your new connection.

DBMS type - Set the type of the DBMS is ADO or ODBC.
Test Connection - Displays if the connection was successful or not.
PATH - PATH Newsletter Archive. MDB (This file is on server where is installed ScriptCase).
Username - Enter the user to gain access to your MS Access.
Password - Enter the password to get access to your MS Access.
For more details on configuring the database connection to the data, click
Decimal separator - Select the type of separator between comma and point.
Persistent connection - Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of
your script ends.
Use the schema name before the table - Allows the use of schemas before the names of the
tables.
Filter - Clicking this option, the following screen appears:
View - Allows viewing of filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures.
Filters - Allows you to define which tables and owners will be displayed.
Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected
successfully", then complete the establishment of the connection. If there is any connection fails, review
the fields filled in, especially the user, and password server path.
Connecting Access Via Odbc

Home >> Connections >> MS-Access >> Connecting Access via ODBC
To create a connection using ODBC, we must create an ODBC connection in the Windows Control
Panel (The ODBC should be created in the same server where it is located the web server). Open the
ODBC Data Source Administrator, select the tab System DNS (see image below) and create your
connection with your Access Database.
To work with MS Access version inferior than 2007/2010 you should install 2007 Office System Driver: Data Connectivity Components.
If you are using Windows 7 x64, you must use the Control Panel located in C:/WINDOWS/SysWOW64/odbcad32.exe to create the ODBC.
Use the following ODBC driver:
Accdb
MDB
Extension
Extension
MicroSoft
MicroSoft
Access
Driver
Access
(*mdb,
Driver
*accdb)
(*mdb)
After creating the ODBC, follow the steps below to create the connection:
CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (MSACCESS)
item "New".
the MS Access database.

DBMS type - Set the type of the DBMS : ADO or ODBC.
Test Connection - Used to test if the connection is successful or not.
ODBCName - Enter the ODBC created in the Windows Control Panel.
Username - Enter a valid database user name.
Password - Enter the valid password.
your script ends.
tables.
Filter - By clicking in his option, the following screen appears:
Show - Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures.
Filters - Define which tables and owners will be displayed.
successfully" is displayed, then complete the establishment of the connection.
Db2
Ibm Db2
Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2
Windows IBM DB2 database connection.
To build the ibm_db2 extension, the DB2 application development header files and libraries must be
installed on your system. DB2 does not install these by default, so you may have to return to your DB2
installer and add this option. The header files are included with the DB2 Application Development Client
freely available for download from the IBM DB2 Universal Database IBM DB2 Universal
If you add the DB2 application development header files and libraries to a Linux or Unix operating
system on which DB2 was already installed, you must issue the command db2iupdt -e to update the
symbolic links to the header files and libraries in your DB2 instances.
ibm_db2 is a ? PECL extension, (Repository for PHP Extensions, providing a directory of all known
extensions and hosting facilities for downloading and development of PHP extensions) so follow the
instructions in Installation of PECL extensions o install the ibm_db2 extension for PHP. Issue the
configure command to point to the location of your DB2 header files and libraries as follows:
bash$ ./configure --with-IBM_DB2=/path/to/DB2
On the links below select the desired option
Creating a Scriptcase Connection (DB2 Native).

Creating a Scriptcase Connection (DB2 ODBC Native).
Creating a Scriptcase Connection (DB2 ODBC Generic).
Ibm Db2 Native
IBM DB2 Connection

Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 >> IBM DB2 Native
Windows IBM DB2 database connection using Native Driver
Step 1: Log in ScriptCase, and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ", click on the sub item
"New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu.
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of the DB2 database.

DBMS Type - Set the model of the DBMS is Native, ODBC or native ODBC Generic.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed.
Database Name - Enter the DB2 database instance name.
Schema - You can tell the Schema (Optional), if you wish to use only the tables belonging to the
schema.
Password - Enter the user valid password.
For more details on configuring the database connection , click
your script ends.
tables.
i5_lib - Library used in IBM i5/OS Operating System.
Ibm Db2 Odbc Native
IBM DB2 Connection.

Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 >> IBM DB2 ODBC Native
Windows IBM DB2 database connection using ODBC Native driver.

Database Name - Enter the DB2 database instance name.
schema.
your script ends.
tables.
i5_lib - Library used in IBM i5/OS Operating System.
Ibm Db2 Odbc Generic
IBM DB2 Connection.

Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 >> IBM DB2 ODBC Generic
Windows IBM DB2 database connection using ODBC Generic driver.
Step 1: Use Windows Data Source Administrator to create ODBC, select System DSN.
Step 1.2: Select DB2 ODBC Driver.
Step 1.3: Enter ODBC name and select the database used.
Step 1.4: Configure ODBC.
Step 1.5: Enter database user name and password and test the ODBC.


ODBC Name - Enter the ODBC name created in the Control Panel.
schema.
your script ends.
tables.
Firebird
Firebird
Home >> Connections >> Firebird
Select the desired option on the links below.
Connecting to Firebird in Windows.

Connecting to Firebird in Windows using ODBC.
Connecting to Firebird in Linux.
Creating a Connection on Scriptcase.
Creating a Connection on Scriptcase using ODBC.
Firebird - Windows
Creating a Firebird database Connection in Windows

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Firebird on Windows
Requirements:
Enable interbase.dll module in php.ini
Edit Windows services file and add gds_db on 3050/tcp port.
Edit the php.ini file. Run ScriptCase diagnosis and check where the file is located.
In the PHP.INI, look for the word php_interbase.dll and remove the comment ";" to enable this module.
See image.
Check if interbase module was enabled correctly. http://server:port/scriptcase/info.php
Edit Windows services file fix an error when try to connect to FireBird using ScriptCase: "Unable to
complete network request to host "localhost". Failed to locate host machine. Undefined service
gds_db/tcp".
Open services file (you can find it at in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\).
Then add the following line:
gds_db 3050/tcp # Firebird
Save and create a ScriptCase connection.
ScriptCase 6 runs on PHP 5.3. This version of PHP had a few issues while connecting with
Firebird database. To solve this connection issues, please do the following:
1 - Download this file and extract it on PHP extension folder (by default, it is "C:\Program
Files\NetMake\v6\ZendServer\lib\phpext"):
http://www.netmake.com.br/knowledge/download/php_dll_firebird.zip
2 - Download this file and extract it on Zend Server Binary folder (by default, it is "C:\Program
Files\NetMake\v6\ZendServer\bin"):
http://www.netmake.com.br/knowledge/download/dll_firebird.zip
3 - Add these lines on your

Files\NetMake\v6\ZendServer\etc"):
php.ini
(by
default,
it
is
located
extension=php_interbase.dll
extension=php_pdo_firebird.dll
4 - Restart your server and you will be able to connect with Firebird (Interbase).
Once it is correctly installed we are able to create a connection on Scriptcase

at
"C:\Program
Firebird - Odbc
Creating a Firebird database connection Using ODBC

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Firebird on Windows using ODBC
Connecting to FireBird in ScriptCase using ODBC
To
create
the
connection
using
(http://www.ibphoenix.com) is required.
the
IBPhoenix
Open
Source
ODBC
Driver
Download and install the driver, create a new ODBC Source as System Source, and choose
Firebird/Interbase driver.
Connect to a firebird, running in another server (glacial) as in the example below.
Data Source Name: ODBC Name

Database: HOST:PATH
Enter the user name and password.

Creating a Connection on Scriptcase using ODBC.
Firebird - Linux
Creating a Firebird database connection on Linux

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Firebird on Linux
Configuring Firebird/Interbase on Linux
Requirements:
To enable PHP to work with Firebird/InterBase, compile it with --with-interbase[=DIR]option.
For more information, check php website at http://www.php.net/manual/en/ref.ibase.php

Firebird - Creating A Connection
Creating a Connection on Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Creating a Connection
CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (FIREBIRD)
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of the Firebird
database.

DBMS Type - Select the DBMS type.

Server/Host (Name or IP) - Enter the FireBird Server.
Database Name - Enter your database name.
Username - Enter a valid username.
your script ends.
Use the schema before the table name - Use schemas before the tables names.
Connecting to FireBird in ScriptCase using ODBC
To
create
the
connection
using
(http://www.ibphoenix.com) is required.
the
IBPhoenix
Open
Source
ODBC
Driver
Download and install the driver, create a new ODBC Source as System Source, and choose
Firebird/Interbase driver.
Connect to a firebird, running in another server (glacial) as in the example below.
Data Source Name: ODBC Name

Database: HOST:PATH
Enter the user name and password.
Firebird - Creating A Connection Using Odbc
Creating a Connection on Scriptcase using ODBC

Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Creating a Connection
CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (FIREBIRD ODBC)
Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase, and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections", click
on the sub item "New".
Step 2: After you click "New", will appear at the right a screen to create connection, click on the image of
the Generic ODBC.
Connection Name - Set the name of your new connection.

DBMS Type - Defined as Generic ODBC.
ODBC Name - Enter the name of your database.
For more details on configuring the database connection click
your script ends.
Informix
Informix
Home >> Connections >> Informix
This tutorial let the user connect to a Windows server where Scriptcase is installed with another one
where the database is.
The first step is to install the Informix client. Here we are using the IBM Informix Connect. We wil
describe the native and ODBC connection.
Connecting with Informix PDO in Scriptcase. (recomended)

Configuring Informix Native.
Connecting with Informix Native in Scriptcase.
Configuring Informix ODBC.
Connecting with Informix ODBC in Scriptcase.
Configuring Informix Native

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Configuring Informix Native
Client image used by connections.
Database images used by connections.
In the Windows services file add the Informix Service (Name and Port).
Client(Setnet32) Configuration.
IBM Informix Server: Server Name used by connection.
HostName: IP/Host Database Server.
Protocolname: Protocol used.
Service Name: Service Name.
Enter IP/Host Database Server user name and password.
Verify if the database server is accessible using client DBPing.
Using I-Connect verify the connection.
Enabling Informix in the PHP

Step 1: Enable Informix PHP Module in the configuration file (php.ini)
Step 2: Accessing the info.php and verify if the module was enabled.
If the Informix module is loaded correctly in your php, you already can access ScriptCase to create your
connection.
Connecting with Informix Native in Scriptcase.
Connecting With Informix Native In Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Connecting with Informix Native in Scriptcase
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of Informix database.

DBMS Type - Set the DBMS type as Informix or Informix PDO.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Tell Informix Server.

Database Name - Enter your database (actual base) name.
Password - Enter a valid password.
For more details on configuring the database connection, click
your script ends.
Show- Display filters on the tables, views, system tables and procedures.
Check if the module is properly enabled for PHP.
Configuring Informix Native.
Configuring Informix Odbc

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Configuring Informix ODBC
Step 1: Create the ODBC using the database driver as in the pictures:
Step 2: Enter the ODBC (Data Source Name) used by connection.
Step 3: Enter the connection data and test it.
If the ODBC datasource was created correctly, you already can access ScriptCase to create your
connection.
Connecting with Informix ODBC in Scriptcase.
Connecting With Informix Odbc In Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Connecting with Informix ODBC in Scriptcase
the Generic ODBC.

DBMS Type - Defined as ODBC Generic.
ODBC Name - Enter your database name (actual base name).

your script ends.
If you still get errors, check if the ODBC Data Source has been properly established.
Configuring Informix ODBC.
Configuring Informix Pdo

Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Configuring Informix PDOz'
To create a connection on Scriptcase using Infomix PDO is necessary to follow the steps bellow.
* To use the infomix is necessary to have the "Infomix Instant Client" installed on you mahcine.
Step 1: If you already have Scriptcase installed make a full backup of it inside Options > Settings >
Backup. Uninstall Scriptcase completely.
Step 2: Download the Zend Server CE with PHP 5.3 at Zend Page.
Step 3: Run the Zend installer and select the "Custom" option.
Step 4: Enable the "Zend Guard Loader" and the "Infomix" extensions.
Proceed with the installation pressing next a few times, the Zend installer will install the Zend Guard
Loader, Apache and PHP creating a small environment.
We must enable the check box to run the Zend after the installation, at this time the browser will open to
proceed with the installation.
Step 5: Now we must activate the Infomix extension in the Zend, so we must type: localhost:10081 .
Into the "Server Setup" tab, then into the Extensions tab, we must look for the pdo_infomix and turn it on.
We can't forget to restart the PHP.
Step 6: Now we must install Scriptcase using the zip file on the HTDOCS folder.
Remember to rename the folder after the Scriptcase zip file get uncompressed and now we are ready to
install Scriptcase in the new Environment.
Manual Installation Tutorial.
Create your first project, select the Infomix PDO connection and use this structure as host:
ip\service_name:port Example: 192.168.254.130\ol_ids_1150_1:9088
* We cant use "localhost", we must use the IP of your machine on the network.
Step 7: Save the connection and create an application (form or grid), try to run your application using the
default values, one error about the time zone will appear this way you can copy your time zone from the
error and paste it into the php.ini file after the date.timezone tag like the picture bellow.
Step 8: SRestart you apache and your Scriptcase will be ready to be used.
Interbase
Interbase
Home >> Connections >> Interbase
In this tutorial we will see how to enable the PHP module "php_interbase.dll" in php.ini and then connect
to Interbase from Scriptcase.
Enabling Interbase in PHP(Windows).

Enabling Interbase in PHP(Linux).
Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase.
Configuring Interbase On Windows

Home >> Connections >> Interbase >> Configuring Interbase on Windows
See how to do it step by step:

Edit the php.ini file. Run ScriptCase diagnosis and check where the file is located.
In PHP.INI, look for the word php_interbase.dll and remove the comment ";" to enable this module. See
image below.
Check if interbase module was enabled correctly. http://server:port/scriptcase/info.php
If the module INTERBASE is loaded correctly in your php, go through ScriptCase to create your
connection.
Configuring Interbase On Linux

Home >> Connections >> Interbase >> Configuring Interbase on Linux
Requirements:
To enable PHP to work with InterBase, compile it with --with-interbase[=DIR]option.
For more information, check php website at http://www.php.net/manual/en/ref.ibase.php

Connecting To Interbase From Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Interbase >> Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of the Interbase
database.

DBMS Type - Set the version of the DBMS type.
IP: PATH - Enter the IP Server path.
Username - Enter a valid user name.

For more details on configuring the database connection, click
your script ends.
If the connection was not successful, verify that the PHP module is enabled:
Enabling the PHP Interbase(Windows).
Enabling the PHP Interbase(Linux).
Mysql
Mysql
Home >> Connections >> MySQL
The Scriptcase installer enable the MySQL module in the PHP by default, then you just need to connect
from Scriptcase to the database.
If you are using your own environment, you must be sure if the MySQL extension is enabled in the PHP.
Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (WINDOWS).

Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (LINUX).
Conecting to MySQL from Scriptcase.
Enabling Mysql (windows)
Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (WINDOWS)

Home >> Connections >> MySQL >> Enabling MySQL (WINDOWS)
To enable the PHP MySQL extension/module we must edit the PHP.ini file.
Run the PHP info function to check the php.ini file location according to image below.
In the PHP.INI file, look for the php_mysql.dll and remove the ";" to enable the MySQL module in PHP.
If you wish to use the MySQ? PDO connection, you should remove the semicolon from
php_pdo_mysql.dll.
Remember to restart the web server. See image below.
To connect to MySQL database, check in ScriptCase Diagnosis (menu: Help | Diagnosis) if the MySQL
module is enabled, see image1. If not, edit the file php.ini and enable the MySQL module
(php_mysql.dll).
Problems enabling MySQL extension on Windows
When using the Apache Web server with PHP ISAPI, in many cases the MySQL 5 extension is not
enabled. This error occurs because Windows cannot find the DLL libmysql.dll which is located in the
folder "bin" on the MySQL installation folder. Copy this DLL to the system32 Windows directory and
restart the Services.
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to MySQL from Scriptcase:
Enabling Mysql (linux)
Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (LINUX)

Home >> Connections >> MySQL >> Enabling MySQL (LINUX)
To enable the PHP MySQL extension/module on a Linux environment we must compile PHP with the
option mysql (see description below).
Setting MySQL with PHP4:
The option --with-mysql is enabled by default. This is the standard operation and can be
disabled by setting --without-mysql. If MySQL is activated without specifying the path to the
MySQL installation directory, PHP will use the MySQL client library.
Users running other applications that use MySQL (for example, auth-mysql) should not use
the library built, but instead only specify the MySQL path to the installation directory, like this: -with-mysql=/path/to/MySQL. This will force the PHP to use the customer libraries installed by
MySQL.
Setting MySQL with PHP5:
MySQL is not active by default, neither the MySQL library is built in PHP.
Use the option --with-mysql[= DIR] to enable MySQL extension.
Restart the web server.
For other settings, visit the site http://www.php.net/manual/pt_BR/ref.mysql.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to MySQL from Scriptcase:
Connecting To Mysql From Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> MySQL >> Connecting to MySQL from Scriptcase
the MySQL database.

DBMS Type - Set the DBMS type: transactional or not.
Server/Host (Name or IP) -Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed.
Port - Set the port to be used for your connection. By Default port is 3306.
Database Name - Enter the MySQL database instance name.

Username - Enter a valid database user name. If you are connecting with a remote database
server, check if the database user has remote access.
your script ends.
If you have problem to connect, check if the MySQL module is enabled in the PHP:
Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (WINDOWS).
Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (LINUX).
Oracle
Oracle
Home >> Connections >> Oracle
To connect with the Oracle Database it is necessary to install and configure some Oracle addons.
On the links below we must choose the desired operating system.
Connecting to Oracle using instant client for windows.

Oracle in linux environment.
Enabling the Oracle on the PHP.
Creating a connection on Scriptcase.
Oracle - Instant Client
Creating an Oracle database connection in ScriptCase

Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Instant Client (WINDOWS)
This tutorial describe the steps to connect to Oracle from ScriptCase using Oracle Instant Client in
Windows and the PHP configuration. When using Instant Client 11g, PHP OCI8 connects to all editions
of Oracle 9.2, 10.x, and 11.x databases.
Requirements:
*Download 'Oracle Instant Client Basic Package' (http://www.oracle.com);
Grant Access to Oracle database;
Configure the PHP for Oracle.
Installing Oracle Instant Client
Step 1: Unzip the .zip file downloaded to any directory (Ex: c:\instant_client_oracle).
Step 2: Enter the Instant Client in Windows environment variable 'Path' location. Click with the right
button on My Computer, then Properties, tab Advanced --> Environment Variables. Edit the
variable 'Path' and enter theOracle Instant Client path. Add the variable 'NLS_LANG', used to set the
language. (See images below).
When a value already exist in the 'Path', add ; (semicolon) at the end of line and the instant client path. It
is necessary to restart the machine.
Follow the images below.
Picture 1: Right click on the "My Computer" icon the properties menu
Picture 2: At the "Advanced" tab we must click on the "Environment Variable" button.
Picture 3: Once we are inside the "Environment Variables" menu, we must search for the "Path"
variable and edit it.
Picture 4: We will add the path to the instant client folder that we just created, we must add ";"
(semicolon) to separate the existant data from the new data that we are going to insert.
Ex: ;C:\instantclient_11_2
Picture 5: We must add a new system variable.
Picture 6: We must set the variable name as "NLS_LANG", the oracle will use this environment variable
used to define language, territory and character set properties.
In this link we will see a list with some of the variables. http://www.orafaq.com/wiki/NLS_LANG
Here is a list with some of those language variables:
French_France.WE8ISO8895P
French_Switzerland.WE8ISO8895P1
Norwegian_Norway.NDK7DEC
Norwegian_Norway.WE8ISO8895P1
Japanese_Japan.JA16SJIS
Arabic_Egypt.AR8MSWIN1256
American_America.AR8MSWIN1256
American_America.WE8ISO8859P1
Latvian_Latvia.BLT8CP921
Note: Restart the server to activate the Environment Variables.
Note 2: The way to get into the environment variables may be different depending on the windows version.
Once that the instant client is successfully we must certificate that the Oracle DLL is up into the PHP
configuration:
Enabling the Oracle on the PHP.
Oracle - Linux
Connecting to Oracle in Linux Environment

Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Linux
Installing the Instant Client

When the Scriptcase is installed in Linux environment the Oracle DLL is enable, to perform a connection
it is needed to install the Instant Client </ a> for Linux.
Step 1: In the Oracle's website we will choose the desiredoperating system and then download the
"Instant CLient Basic Package".
Step 2: Uncompress the zip file.
Step 3: Let's edit /etc/environment.
Step 4: We must add the path to the folder that we just created, remember to separate what we will
enter with ":" (colon).
After the four steps scriptcase is ready to make a connection to the Oracle database.
Oracle - Enabling The Php
Enabling the PHP

Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Enabling the PHP.
PHP SETTINGS
To enable oracle module in PHP, remove the comment in php.ini file. Find the extension=php_oci8.dll
line and remove the comment at the beginning of the line ";".
Restart the web server if php is not configured as cgi.
Check if the module was really loaded opening our 'diagnosis.php' or 'info.php'.
Example:
diagnosis.php
info.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to Oracle from Scriptcase:
Oracle - Creating A Connection On Scriptcase
Creating a Connection on Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Connecting from scriptcase.
CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (ORACLE)
the Oracle database.

DBMS Type - Oracle version used.
TSNAME - Inform the IP of the server where the database is installed and the instance name
created in the Oracle installation.
your script ends.
Client encoding - Encoding used on your database
Postgresql
Postgressql
Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL
To connect with PostgreSQL in Scriptcase you should enable the PHP extensions/module php_pgsql.dll
in php.ini file.
Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (WINDOWS).

Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (LINUX).
Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase.
Enabling Mysql (windows)
Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (WINDOWS)

Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL >> Enabling PostgreSQL (WINDOWS)
Edit the PHP.ini file. Run the phpinfo() function to check the php.ini file location according to the image
below.
In the PHP.INI file, search for php_pgsql.dll and remove the ";" to enable the module PostGreSQL in
PHP. See image below.
If you wish to use the PostgreSQL PDO connection, you should remove the semicolon from php_pdo_pgsql.dll
Make sure the PostGreSQL module was enabled. See Diagnosis.
Creating a connection in Windows Server

To connect to PostGreSQL database, check in ScriptCase Diagnosis (menu: Help | Diagnosis) if the
PostGreSQL module is enabled, see image1. If not, edit the file php.ini and enable the PostGreSQL
module (php_pgsql.dll).
If the connection is made in a different server from where PostGresSQL is located, you must check if the
"Allow Access Foreign" is marked.
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase:
Enabling Postgresql (linux)
Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (LINUX)

Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL >> Enabling PostgreSQL (LINUX)
To enable the module for PostgreSQL, the option --with-pgsql[=DIR] should be used when compiling
the PHP.
For other settings visit the site http://www.php.net/manual/en/ref.pgsql.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase:
Connecting To Postgresql From Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL >> Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase
item "New".
the PostgreSQL database.

DBMS Type - PostgreSQL version used.
Database Name - Enter the PostgreSQL database instance name.
Username - Enter a valid database user name .

your script ends.
tables.
If you have problem to connect, check if the PostgreSQL module is enabled in the PHP:
Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (WINDOWS).
Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (LINUX).
Sql Server
Ms Sql Server
MS SQL Server connection on Scriptcase (Windows Environment) can be made in 4 different ways:
ADO
MS-SQL Server Compatibility

Win
Win
Win
Win 7 Win XP
Server Server
Vista
2003
2008
OK
OK
Win
2000
OK
ODBC
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
SQL Server Client
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Native SRV
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Native SRV PDO
OK
OK
Linux
OK
OK
To make the connection in ScriptCase installed on a Linux Environment, and a MSSQL Database on a
Windows Server, use the FreeTDS Library www.freetds.org
SQL Server in Linux
Ms Sql Server Ado
Connecting to MS SQL Server using ADO

To connect your SQL Server using ADO, verify the Diagnosis ( main menu: Help | Diagnosis) if the COM
option is enable, see image1. If you have problems with the COM option, make sure the MDAC is
properly installed on this computer. It is recommended version 2.6 or higher.
* The ScriptCase.exe installer that you can download from our site already configures everything
needed to use this module.
Creating the Scriptcase connection (MS SQL SERVER/ADO)

Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection to the MSSQL database.
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of MSSQL server
database.

DBMS Type - Set the DBMS type: ADO, ODBC or Native SRV.
DBMS Host or IP - Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed.
Database - Enter the MSSQL. database instance name.
User - Enter a valid database user name.
your script ends.
Note: When connecting ScriptCase via ado with SQL Server to another server you need to check the port block settings to the SQL server database where the
Firewall is installed.
The SQL Server listens by default port 1433.
To change or add a new port we must use comma.
Ms Sql Server Odbc
Creating a MS SQL Server connection using ODBC

To create a SQL Server connection using a data source ODBC, we must create a System
ODBC Connection. Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data Sources (The
ODBC must be created in the same Host where ScriptCase is installed ). Follow the steps below to
create a new connection using ODBC:
* The driver that enables access to odbc by PHP is compiled in 32 bits. When using Windows 64 bits
environment, it is necessary to create the odbc by "odbcad32.exe" application in the folder
"../windows/syswow64/".
Example:
c:/windows/syswow64/odbcad32.exe
Note: We are using the ODBC driver from the "SQL Native Client" installed in the machine. ( http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=101877 )
Creating the Scriptcase connection (MS SQL SERVER/ODBC)

We will now access the ScriptCase by the browser and we'll create the connection to the
MSSQL database.
Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type, click on the image of MSSQL server
database.

DBMS Type - Set the DBMS type: ADO, ODBC or Native SRV.
ODBC Name - Enter the MSSQL database instance name.

your script ends
Ms Sql Server Client
Requirements:
Enable extension/module mssql.dll in php.ini (remove the comment in the line)
MS-SQL Server installed on the same machine
Uncomment the extension in php.ini php_mssql.dll
Ms Sql Server Native Srv
Using Native SRV Driver in Windows Environment

The Native SRV connection is the recommended alternative to use with ScriptCase. It is faster
(regarding database access) and it is the only that work properly with image and document database
fields.
Below are step-by-step instructions for installing the Native SRV driver:
Required:
Operating Systems
* Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 * Windows XP Service Pack 3 * Windows Vista Service
Pack 1 or later * Windows Server 2008 * Windows Server 2008 R2 * Windows Seven
Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Installed (sqlncli)
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=101877
SQLServerDriverForPHP Driver installed ( already installed by Scriptcase Installer )
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/sqlserver/cc299381.aspx
First Step: Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Installation (sqlncli)

After downloading the file "sqlncli.msi", execute and follow the installer steps
*After installation, it is recomended reboot the operating system.
Second Step: Installing the Driver - SQLServerDriverForPHP

Note: This step is not necessary if you have used the Scriptcase Installer.
After executing the "SQLServerDriverForPHP", inform the php "ext" folder's path according to the
image below.
The installer will extract "dlls" that will be used by php to start the service.
After Installation, it is necessary to enable in php.ini the following dll:
php_sqlsrv_53_nts_vc6.dll and php_sqlsrv_53_nts_vc9.dll
Example:
extension=php_sqlsrv_53_nts_vc6.dll
* It is necessary to include the statement above after calling the extension php_mssql.dll in the
php.ini
After edit the file "php.ini", it is necessary reboot the service of "apache" inside : "Control Painel->
Administrative Tools-> Service-> ApacheScriptcase6".
Final Step: Create the connection mssql SRV in scriptcase v5.

To create the connection, choose the option: MSSQL Server NATIVE SRV
Note: The SQL Server listens by default port 1433.

To change or add a new port we must use comma.
Ms Sql Server Native Srv Pdo
Using Native SRV PDO Driver in Windows Environment

The Native SRV PDO Driver for SQL Server is the fastest driver to connect with MS SQL Server.
Below are step-by-step instructions for installing the Native SRV PDO driver:
Required:
Operating Systems
* Windows Vista Service Pack 2 or later * Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 2 or R2) * Windows
7
Microsoft? SQL Server? 2012 Feature Pack
http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=29065 -> MICROSOFT SQL SERVER
CONNECTIVITY FEATURE PACK COMPONENTS ( sqlncli.msi )
Microsoft Drivers 3.0 for PHP for SQL Server
http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=20098 --> You must extract it and then
use nts(non thread safe) dll in the php.ini
First Step: Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Installation ( sqlncli. msi )
After downloading the file "sqlncli.msi", execute and follow the installer steps
*After installation, it is recomended reboot the operating system.
Second Step: Installing the Driver - Microsoft Drivers 3.0 for PHP for SQL Server
After executing the "Microsoft Drivers 3.0 for PHP for SQL Server", inform the php "ext" folder's
path.
The installer will extract "dlls" that will be used by php to start the service.
After Installation, it is necessary to enable in php.ini the following dll:
php_sqlsrv_53_nts.dll/php_sqlsrv_54_nts.dll and
php_pdo_sqlsrv_53_nts.dll/php_pdo_sqlsrv_54_nts.dll
Example:
extension=php_pdo_sqlsrv_54_nts.dll
* It is necessary to include the statement above after calling the extension php_mssql.dll in the
php.ini
After edit the file "php.ini", you must reboot the "apache" service ("Control Painel -> Administrative
Tools-> Service-> ApacheScriptcase6").
Final Step: Create the connection mssql SRV PDO in Scriptcase.

To create the connection, choose the option: MSSQL Server Native SRV PDO
Note: The SQL Server listens by default port 1433. To change or add a new port we must use comma.
Mssql No Linux(freetds)
SQL Server no Linux
Neste tpico iremos ver como conectar o ScriptCase com SQLServer

usando o ambiente pr configurado do XAMPP.
Pr requisitos:
Possuir acesso a base de dados SQLServer.
Ter o PHP configurado com o FreeTDS.
Nota: O Pacote XAMPP possui o FreeTDS na sua lista de produtos, mas caso queira configurar o FreeTDS entre no site http://www.freetds.org/
1 Efetuando o Download do XAMPP

1.1 Nesta imagem voc pode ver o site apachefriends.org, onde podemos baixar o XAMPP.
1.2 Fazendo o download direto atravs do wget
Download efetuado com sucesso.
2 Instalando o XAMPP
2.1 Vamos mover o XAMPP para o diretrio '/opt'.
2.2 Utilizando o comando 'tar -xzvf' vamos descompactar o arquivo do XAMPP.
Arquivo descompactado com sucesso.
2.3 Iniciando os servios do XAMPP
2.4 Agora basta acessar a partir do seu servidor Linux '/'
2.5 Acessando o arquivo info.php e checando as configuraes do mdulo mssql.
3 Efetuando o Download do Ambiente de Produo
3.1 Configurando o Ambiente de Produo
O ambiente de produo uma biblioteca de funes comuns usadas nas aplicaes geradas pelo
ScriptCase, deve ser usado e configurado junto aos sistemas publicados.
Para mais informaes sobre publicao acesse o tpico Esquema de Publicao.
Na imagem abaixo podemos visualizar o link direto para download do ambiente de produo.
3.2 Copiando o Ambiente de Produo ScriptCase para seu servidor WEB
Copiando e descompactando o arquivo '.zip' na a raiz do servidor web dando origem ao ambiente de
produo.
3.3 Renomeando o diretrio para 'prod_scriptcase' e dando permisso total para este diretrio.
4 Configurando o FreeTDS
4.1 FreeTDS uma biblioteca que possibilita a conexo com MS SQLServer a partir de uma estao Linux.
Dentro do diretrio '/opt/lampp/etc' existe um arquivo chamado 'freetds.conf', este o arquivo de

configurao do FreeTDS.
4.2 Acessando o arquivo de configurao do FreeTDS:
As configuraes usadas no nosso caso esto destacadas.

[SQLSERVER] --> o nome que vai fazer referncia ao meu servidor de Banco de Dados.
host --> o IP do meu servidor de banco de dados.
port --> a porta onde est instalado o meu Banco de Dados.
tds version --> a verso do meu SQLServer.
5 Criando uma Conexo a partir do meu Ambiente de Produo

5.1 Acessando o ambiente de produo atravs da URL --> '/scriptcase/prod/'
Acessando o ambiente de produo com a senha padro 'scriptcase'.
5.2 Alterando a senha padro do ambiente de produo.
5.3 Criando uma nova conexo.
5.4 Selecionando o SGBD.
5.5 Definindo o modo de acesso ao banco.
5.6 Informando o nome de referncia ao meu servidor e o nome da base de dados.
Ver: Configurao FreeTDS
5.7 Informando os dados para autenticao do usurio.
5.8 Informando o nome da conexo.
5.9 Testando a conexo.
Conexo Realizada com sucesso.
Sqlite
Sqlite
Home >> Connections >> SQLite
To connect with SQLite in Scriptcase you should enable PHP modules/extensions php_pdo.dll,
php_pdo_sqlite.dll and php_sqlite.dll in php.ini file.
Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (WINDOWS).

Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (LINUX).
Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase.
Enabling Php Module Sqlite (windows)

Home >> Connections >> SQLite >> Enabling PHP module SQLite in Windows
Edit the PHP.ini file. Run ScriptCase diagnosis and check the file path according to the image below.
On the PHP.INI file find the DLL's pdo.dll, pdo_sqlite.dll, sqlite.dll and remove the ; (semicolon) to enable
the PHP SQLite module. See image below.
Then you must check if the SQLite PDO module was enabled in the info.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to SQLite from Scriptcase:
Enabling Php Module Sqlite (linux)

Home >> Connections >> SQLite >> Enabling PHP module SQLite in Linux
To enable the module for SQLite, the options --with-pdo[=DIR], --with-sqlite[=DIR] e --withpdo_sqlite[=DIR] should be used when compiling the PHP.
For other settings visit the site http://www.php.net/manual/en/ref.sqlite.php
Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to SQLite from Scriptcase:
Sqlite Pdo

Home >> Connections >> SQLite >> Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase
the SQLite database.

DBMS type - Set the DBMS type: SQLite PDO or SQLite.
PATH - Enter the full path to the file .Db.
If you have problem to connect, check if the SQLite module is enabled in the PHP:
Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (WINDOWS).
Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (LINUX).
Sybase
Sybase
Home >> Connections >> Sybase
To connect to Sybase database becomes necessary install and configure "Sybase Client".
In the links below select the desired option.
Installing and configuring the "Sybase Client."

Enabling PHP in Sybase.
Creating a connection in Scriptcase.
Sybase
Home >> Connections >> Sybase >> Sybase Client
Requirements:
Must have SyBase client installed on;
Enabled extension/module php_sybase_ct.dll of PHP in php.ini file;
How to do step by step:
On WINDOWS, install the SyBase client. We used in this tutorial the version ASE 12.5.1 GA.
SyBase client installation.
Its only necessary to install the modules selected below.
After the installation open the program DSEDIT and create an entry to your server.
Testing your connection with the software SQL Advantage.
Once the "Sybase Client" is installed correctly, we must make sure your DLL is being enabled in PHP:
Enabling Sybase in PHP.
Sybase
Home >> Connections >> Sybase >> Enabling PHP
After connecting with success, edit the PHP.ini file. Run the PHP info function to check the php.ini file
location according to image below.
In the PHP.INI file, look for the php_sybase_ct.dll and remove the ";" to enable the SyBase module in
PHP. Remember to restart the web server. See image below.
Creating a connection in Scriptcase
To connect with your SyBase Database in ScriptCase, follow the steps above and when the SyBase
module is enabled in ScriptCase Diagnosis (in the main menu of ScriptCase: Help | Diagnosis), proceed
to create the connection.
Once the DLL is enabled we can create a connection in Scriptcase:

Sybase
Home >> Connections >> Sybase >> Creating a Connection
CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (SYBASE)
the Sybase database.

DBMS Type - Gets the DBMS type.
Database Name - Enter the Sybase database instance name.
your script ends.
Generic Odbc
Generic Odbc
Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC
connection via "Generic ODBC" is generally used to create connections to databases dBase (.dbf),
Progress, Dataflex, Paradox, Visual FoxPro, etc.. You just need to have the ODBC driver that
corresponds to your database available.
This tutorial is only valid for the ScriptCase (server) running on WINDOWS.
See step by step how to create and configure the ODBC related to your database and how to connect
with ScriptCase
??
Creating the ODBC dBase (.dbf)
??
Creating ODBC for Progress
??
Creating the ODBC Visual FoxPro
??
Connecting to the ODBC Scriptcase.
Dbase(dbf)
Creating the ODBC for dBase (.dbf)

Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> dBase(DBF)
See step by step hot to create the ODBC data source:
To create a connection using ODBC, we must create an ODBC connection in the Windows Control
Panel. Open the ODBC Data Source Administrator, select the tab System DNS (see image below) and
create your connection with your DBF file.
Select the folder and the dbf file, see image below.
Once the ODBC Data Source is created, we can proceed with the connection in Scriptcase:
??
Connecting to an ODBC data source in Scriptcase.
Progress
Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> Progress
Steps to do:
Install Merant Progress 92 ODBC.
Create a ODBC data Source on the same ScriptCases server.
Installing Progress
1. Enable ODBC (Merant ODBC) option during Progress Installation.

2. Set environment variables:
DLC - C:\Program File\Progress (according to final Progress path)
PATH - %DLC%\bin
PROMSGS - %DLC%\promsgs
3. Create a directory to save your test database, ex.: C:\sports.
4. Open Progress "Data Dictionary" tool and choose "Create a New Database" option.
5. Choose "A Copy of the SPORTS Database" option and enter the full path to the file.
Ex: C:\sports\sports.db
6. Edit C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\services file.
7. Add "sports" services to a free port using "tcp" protocol, ex: 2050
8. Create a load.bat file in c:\sports directory.
9. Put the following data in load.bat file, with the port defined in services file on the -S parameter:
@echo off
cd \
cd c:\sports
_mprosrv sports -n 4 -Ma 1 -Mn 21 -Mpb 10 -N tcp -S 2050
10. Run the load.bat file.
11. Open the Progress "Data Administration".
12. Open the menu "Database :: Connect".
13. On the new window, enter the database full path: C:\sports\sports.db
14. Click in: "Options" and inform the following:
Network - TCP
Service Name - sports
15. Click in OK and open the menu option "Admin :: Security :: Edit User List".
16. Add user "sysprogress", use "sysprogress" as password for this example.
17. Close the "Data Administration".
Creating a PROGRESS ODBC
1. Access Windows Control Panel to create a new ODBC Source.

1. Open "System Source" tab and click "Add".

2. Choose "MERANT Progress SQL92" driver.
3. Put a name to your ODBC and set these parameters:
Hostname - localhost
Port Number - your port defined in "services", ex: 2050
Database Name - sports
User ID - sysprogress
Password - sysprogress
4. Test and create the connection.
??
Visual Foxpro
Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> Visual FoxPro
This tutorial connects the Scriptcase server with Visual FoxPro ODBC.
The ODBC Driver is found at : http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/vfoxpro/bb190233.aspx
Native Connection
Step 1: Create a new ODBC in the System DSN.
STEP 2: Select the Visual FoxPro Driver.
Step 3: Enter the ODBC(DSN) name, and enter the database file path.
STEP 4: After complete the ODBC creation verify it.
??
Generic Odbc Connection In Scriptcase
Connecting to an ODBC data source in Scriptcase

Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> Generic ODBC connection in Scriptcase
Requirements:
Configure an ODBC to your database.
Access ScriptCase to create a new connection.
Step 2: After you click "New Connection", click on the image of the Generic ODBC.

DBMS Type - Defined as ODBC Generic.

ODBC Name - Enter the name of the ODBC.
Username - Enter the user name (if exist) to access your database.
Password - Enter the password (if exist) to access your database.
your script ends.
Step 4:Always test your connection before completing the same, if the message "Connected
If there is any connection failure, check the fields filled in, especially user, password and ODBC name.
If your ODBC is not yet created, see how to create it:
Creating the ODBC dBase (.dbf)

??
Creating ODBC for Progress
??
Creating the ODBC Visual FoxPro
Working With Applications

Overview
Applications
Each page created by Scriptcase is called "Application". The following types of application are available:
GRID - Applications used for data visualization and analysis. ScriptCase Grid applications combine
search functions and report formatting functions including generating output in PDF, XLS, XML, RTF and
other formats.
FORM - Applications for data update. ScriptCase creates applications with all resources: records
inclusion, update, exclusion and navigation. Scriptcase offers a flexible range of form types to
accommodate the business needs. See below the options available .
Simple - A record per page
Multiple Record - Multiple records per page. Record lines are inserted, updated or deleted at the
same time.
Editable Grid - Multiple records per page. Each record must be edited at a time. All record lines are
enabled to edit.
Editable Grid View - Multiple records per page. Each record must be edited at a time. The record
lines are disabled. To edit a record line, first it must be enabled to edit.
CONTROL - Applications to manage the system infra-structure, like capturing data (parameters) that will
be passed to other applications. Ex.: system login, company selection, access selection and etc.
SEARCH - Filter form to link to any application that needs to receive a string having a WHERE clause.
MENU - Applications to create a system hierarchic navigation structure. It is a extremely useful resource,
once that it organizes the applications visually, facilitating the user access to the applications.
TREE MENU - Applications to create a system TreeView navigation structure (similar to the windows
explorer).
TABS - ScriptCase combines many developed applications in a structure where each tab corresponds to
an application.
PDF REPORT - Create PDF files. ScriptCase provides a tool to generate quality reports using predefined formats. Use this application to generate reports for government institutions or other organization
that required specific format.
CONTAINER - Allows you to display various types of applications nested in Widgets similar to those for
iGoogle.
BLANK - Allows developers to write PHP / HTML code and display a result of the process.
CALENDAR - It allow to generate Calendar applications. Great to build applications with Scheduling and
Appointments.
Creating Applications
How To Create Applications?
Creating Applications
ScriptCase offers a Standard mode and a Batch mode to create applications. To access the Standard
Mode, just click on File >> New Application Menu or on the toolbar button New Application.
Image1: New Application through Menu.
Image2: New Application through Toolbar.
To see more about creating applications, click on the following link:

Creating applications
Batch Creation
Scriptcase has an option to Create Multiple Grid and Form Applications at once. (Batch)
Image 3: Acessing Batch Express Creation through Menu.
Image 4: Acessing Batch Express Creation through Toolbar.
See more details about the Batch Express Creation Mode.
Express Mode
The Express mode helps to create applications faster than Wizard Mode. Just trivial data must be
informed. All information is in the same screen.
Image1: Express Mode Interface.
The user selects the application type to create on the left side and all necessary settings are displayed
on the right .
Connection - It indicates a database to use. The connection must be previously created in the
project.
Table - It allows to create a SQL Select command based on a table (or view) from the database. It
will get all fields from the table.
SQL Select Statement (only for Grid and Search applications) - Displays the SQL Select
Statement. It can be edited or you can use "SQLBuilder" Tool to build the SQL.
Name - Define a name to the Application.
Localization - Define the Language and Regional settings used in the Application.
Batch Express Mode
Batch Express mode creates multiple applications (Grids and Forms).
Image1: Batch Express Mode Interface.
First a connection must be selected. Then a list with all tables availabe on that database (connection) is
displayed (Image1).
Image2: Selecting Tables.
When a table is selected then ScriptCase displays an option to create Form and Grid based on that table
(Image2).
Click on "Next" to see a list of Grid and Form applications selected on previous step. Inform the name, a
description and the type if it is a Form. (Image3)
Image3: Applications Descriptions Interface.
On the bottom, there is an option to generate the source code and/or to open the applications to be
edited after creating them.
Then click on "Finish" to create the applications.
Image4: Creating the applications.
After created the applications are listed in the Project Home.(Image5)
Image5: Batch Express Mode Interface.
Editing Applications
How To Edit Applications?
Editing Applications
Each application type has a great variety of settings. These settings can be edited by opening the
application edit panel.
To edit an application you can click on the application name or on the "Edit" option in the Application list
panel.
Image1: Editing an application.
An application workspace has 2 panels. The first is the applications settings groups (a tree menu divided
in Groups). The second panel opens the settings option selected in the first.
Image2: Editing an application.
1 - Application Settings Groups

It groups the access to application settings using Tree Menus inside an Accordion Menu. It helps to
subdivide categories of settings.
2 - Application Settings Panel

It opens the settings option selected from the Application Settings Groups (Menu on the Left).
Grid Applications
Overview
Grid applications
Grid applications are powerful information analysis resource. Grid applications display data retrieved
from a database using a SELECT statement. The displayed information is organized in a grid layout.
The grid applications generated are complete web reports with the following functionality:
Feature
Search
Description
Search form associated to the grid. Use the search page to
filter the displayed data
Paging
Define the number of rows to display per page and page
navigation.
Data Exporting Generated grids can export data to many formats : RTF,
XML, XLS e CSV.
Groups
In one click is possible to create break down lines and group
data by N levels or fields.
Totals
Summarize columns using different functions such as: SUM ,
AVG , MAX , MIN.
Summary
Display a summary page based on groups and totals,
displaying only the summary data.
Charts
Charts based on grids data can be displayed in different
styles like: Bars , Columns , Pie , Dots and more
Sorting
Single sort is automatically created on reports columns
header, cascade sort is also available at run time.
Fields
The end user can select at runtime which columns to
selection
displays in the grid.
Printing
Print the generated reports in PDF or HTML. formats.
options
Links creation Create links to other applications.
Events
Customize grid events PHP code, used to create calculated
programming fields , business rules, etc.
Data formatting Format the grid data, field types such as: date , currency ,
decimal values, integer values, images, text. Automatic data
formatting can also be integrated to the regional settings.
Image1: Simple grid application running.
Image2: Grid application using group and total.
Grid
Settings
Image1: Grid Settings.
Attributes:
Load modules - Loaded interfaces available to end user.
Start by Search - Select the grid initialization mode (display the search form before the grid).
Search Modal - Display search form as a modal window.
Initial Module - Define what module will be opened first.
Orientation - Define the grid orientation as:
Horizontal
Slide
Vertical
Pagination - Define the pagination as below:

Partial - Display in multiple pages (number of records per page is user defined).
Total - Display in a unique page (all selected records).
Lines per Page - Number of lines per page.
Display Line Number - Display the line number in the begin of each line.
Display Titles - Display the field title (labels).
Line break in Titles - Allows the line break in the heading titles (labels).
Columns per Page - Used when selecting the Orientation type Vertical or Slide. Enter the record
number to display sequentially (side by side) in a page.
Vertical Total on Single Line - Used when selecting the Orientation type Vertical. Display
records sequentially (side by side) in a page.
Horizontal Alignment - Application horizontal alignment.
Margins - Define the margin of the application (up, down, right and left).
Alignment - Slide or vertical grid fields alignment.
Table Width - Table width. Use with ?Width Unit?. Ignored for ?Automatic? type.
Table Width Unit - Table width measurement unit (Percentage, Pixel or Automatic).
Table Columns:
Informed - It will assume the informed width values at field level in the configuration of the
visualization.
Calculated - Calculate size according with the type and the field size.
Automatic - The alignment will be a browser criteria.
Refresh Interval - Interval in seconds to refresh (reload) the grid records.
Edit Fields
New interface included in the V6. It allows the user to arrange and edit the fields
Image 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options:
1 - Fields - This column is used to show the name of the field.
2 - Label - Column to edit the field label displayed in the end application.
3 - Datatype - It allows to change the field type.
Note: Observe that all lines are draggable. There you can define the position of fields.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Defines which fields are displayed in the application.
Figure 1: Select Fields.
Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application. The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the
application (select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form).
Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons
for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts simultaneously.
Image1: Toolbar.
Attributes:
Navigation - Display navigation checkboxes that can be displayed in the grid.
Next
Previous
First
Last
Exit
Navigation by page
Advance to the next page of the grid.

Return to the previous page of the grid.
Locates in the first page of the grid.
Locates in the last page of the grid.
Quit the application.
Display links to pages. eg: 1 2 3 4 5
Exports - Define the formats that must be generated. The ScriptCase can generate:
Print Create the grid in HTML format.
PDF Create a complete report, having all grid data in PDF
format.
WORDCreate a complete report, having all grid data in WORD
(.doc) format.
XLS Create a complete report, having all grid data in Excel
format.
XML Create a complete report, having all grid data in XML
format.
RTF Create a complete report, having all grid data in RTF
format.
CSV Create a complete report, having all grid data in CSV
format.
Other
Jump to
Rows limit
Define a button that allows to skip ( and position)

to a specific record.
A button to define a maximum number of line per
page.
Search
Columns
Group By
Sorting
Order
Summary
Gantt
Languages
Themes
When clicked lead to the search form.

Selects columns to display (or hide).
Selects a "group by" rule to be used in the
application.
A button that allows the user to sort the page by
multiple criteria ( column ).
A option in the toolbar that displays a summary
line with result set records info.
A button to display the Gantt's chart.
A combo box to select the language.
A combo box to select the theme (available in the
project properties).
Display a rows counter in the application.
Rows
Counter
Web help
A button to display the current page help.
Quicksearch Executes a search in any field of the application.
Separator
Image used to separate the buttons group.
Group of Buttons
Export
Define a button that allows to open a float menu with

a group of buttons.
Separator
Separator Image used to separate the buttons group.
Buttons Settings
Image2: Buttons Settings.
OPTIONS
Image3: Grid Toolbar Options.
Attributes:
Display summary - Display summary at the bottom of each page.
Format rows counter - Display format of the rows counter. eg.: [1 to 10 of 200]
The amount of links displayed - The amount of page links to display if the option navigation by
page is enabled.
Lines per page - Amount of record lines per page.
Jump to - Jump to page, or record.
Rows to choose - Show which options will be displayed for amount of rows in the combobox. eg.
10,20,30
Export
This screen allows to configure the PDF file to generate by the grid to export.
Image1: PDF Settings Interface.
Attributes:
PDF Orientation - Define the printing orientation: Picture or Landscape.
PDF Format - Define the PDF form type (letter, A4, etc.).
Print type - Defining the printing mode: colorful or economic.
Records per page - Applicable only for horizontal lined up grids, define the number of records
printed per page.
Rows per page in summary - Define number of rows printed per PDF page summary.
Complete lines until footer - Fill with lines (empty) until footer.
Open PDF directly - Opens the generated PDF file without displaying an intermediated link page.
Create Charts - Creates summary charts in PDF.
Configurable PDF - Allows the user to configure the PDF parameters during the application.
Page numbers format- Define the display format: simple (1,2,3,4,5,...), complete (1/n, 2/n, 3/n,?) or
it will not use numeration.
Upper Margin - Enter a value in mm to be applied on the PDF upper margin.
Bottom Margin - Enter a value in mm to be applied on the PDF bottom margin.
Right Margin - PDF right margin in Millimeters.
Left Margin - PDF left margin in Millimeters.
Print Background - Allow the user to print the PDF with the background or not.
JS Execution Time - The max execution time to wait the JS proccess.
Configure the WORD format of the grid.
Image2: WORD Settings Interface.
Attributes
Print Type - Character used to separate lines of registers.
Rows per page in grid - Define number of rows printed per WORD page.
Rows per page in summary - Define number of rows printed per WORD page summary.
Open WORD directly - Opens the generated WORD file without displaying an intermediated link
page.
Configure the CSV format of the grid.
Image2: CSV Settings Interface.
Attributes
Lines separator - Character used to separate lines of registers.
Columns separator - Character used to separate the data columns.
Text delimiter - Character used as a data delimiter of a column.
Opening CSV Directly - Open the CSV generated file without the displaying an intermediated page
link.
Add Label - Adds label to he columns.
Image4: Other formats Interface.
Open XLS directly - Open the generated XLS file without displaying an intermediated page link.
Format - File format (XLSX or XLS).
HTML Print
Configure the HTML format of the grid.
Image3: HTML Print Interface.
Attributes:
Print Mode - Select what will be printed: Both, Current Page and Complete Report.
Print Type - Selecting the print mode (color): Both, Black and White and Colorful.
Rows per Page - Define the quantity of rows to display per page.
Rows per page in summary - Define the quantity of rows to display per page in PDF summary.
Print Background - Show Background printing HTML.
Other Formats
Image4: Other formats Interface.
Open XML directly - Open the generated XML file without displaying an intermediated page link.
Open RTF directly - Open the generated RTF file without displaying an intermediated page link.
Sql
Image1: Interface of SQL Configuration.
SQLSelect Statement - Display the SQL select command. Edit the statement to add or delete
fields, functions, etc.
Tip: Use the SQL Builder for statement fast assembly.
SQL Preparation - Enter SQL commands or procedure names to be executed before the main
select.
Connection - Display the (database) connection name used. This connection can be changed for
another that has the same tables (SQL).
Use Customized Message - Define a customized error message to be displayed when the
application has no records.(EOF). ?
No Records Message - Message displayed when the application has no records. Field associated
to Use Personalized Message.
Font Face - Error Message font face. Field associated to Use Personalized Message.
Font Size - Error Message font size. Field associated to Use Personalized Message.
Font Color - Error Message font color. Field associated to Use Personalized Message.
Variable for Table - Variable name used for replacing the table name. Also inform the part of the
table name that will be changed by the contents of the variable.
Note: Fill the first box with the variable name. The second box must be filled with a part of the table name to be substituted.
Fields Variables - Variables for substitution of the field names of the application. For each
dynamically determined field, enter the name of the variable and the field that will be substituted.
Note: Fill the first box with variable name, in the second select the name of the field to be substituted.
Case Sensitive - Apply case sensitive.
Sorting
Define the sorting of the fields. The application fields are sorted at running time, just by clicking on the
column name (field) to order it. By default breaks are respected in the fields sort. Also by default, the six
first fields already come checked (with an asterisk at the field left side).
Image1: Fields with Sort.
Note: Use the function on/off to include or remove a field.
Log
New interface included in the V6. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the
application.
Image 1: Log Interface.
Options:
Scheme - Scheme of log to be used for the application.
All Fields - Use all fields in the log.
Events - Which event the log will save the application changes.
Security
Attribute:
Use Security: With this option selected, the application is only accessible when enabled using the
sc_apl_status macro. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when
accessed.
Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users. See the
examples below.
Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories.
In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user),
insert the following macro call:
sc_apl_status('grid_categories','on');
Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called
userid.
insert the following code:
// two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications
if({userid} == 'john') {
sc_apl_status('form_categories','on');
sc_apl_status('grid_products','on');
sc_apl_status('form_products','on');
}
elseif({userid} == 'mary') {
sc_apl_status('grid_products','off');
sc_apl_status('form_products','off');
}
else{
sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!");
}
Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table.

In the login application onValidate event, enter the following code:
URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL, if he does
not have access to the application.
Use Password: An application password setting is required. (See image below).
At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. If the password is not entered
correctly, an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed.
In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing
purposes, thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each
application execution. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password
in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase.
Quick Search
Quick Search is an option that allow us to make searches in multiple fields through a text input field in
the toolbar.
In the Quicksearch settings we have the following options:
Button within the search - Option to inform if the search button is inside of the text box (input
object).
Quicksearch show combobox - Show combobox if there is only one quicksearch option.
Quicksearch Watermark - Watermark showed in quicksearch
Quicksearch width - Quicksearch width in pixels.
Then we must select which fields can be searched.
And we can select several search criterias.
Note: You must add the quicksearch button on the "Toolbar" Settings to use it.
Fields
Overview
In this session just the fields that are part of the grid are displayed, that is, the fields that were selected in
the menu GRID - SELECT FIELDS.
A series of attributes are defined to each field. The user can set the attributes specific to a field data type
using the update attribute settings page that reloads according to selected type.
Text
Image1: Field General Settings.

Attributes:
Data type- Define the application field type. Text fields accepts all characters.
Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could
be label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer.
Case Settings - Converts the field text depending on the option:
HTML Content - Define the field as HTML. HTML fields store HTML tags processed accordingly by
ScriptCase.
Grid Mask - Define the field display mask. See below the characters used to define the mask.
CharacterDescription
X
Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If
number of characters entered are less then the mask size, the
field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field
entry is required).
Z
Replaced by any character retrieved from database.
Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional).
When used combined with the mask character X it should be
placed at the mask left.
Examples:
Mask
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
Field Value
1234567890
12345678
1234567890
12345678
0012345678
Formatted Value
(12) 3456 - 7890
(00) 1234 - 5678
(12) 3456 - 7890
( ) 1234 - 5678
( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value - Display the field only once (for records with equal values). See below.
Repeating value
Without repeating value
SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Grid Lookup
Used to modify the display of a grid field. For example, a field gender in the database with values M or F
is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a
database table (see lookup automatic).
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Grid Lookup - Automatic

Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically, retrieving the values from a database table.
Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.
Attributes :
SQL Select Statement - Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. The
statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field =
{grid_field}".
The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. During execution the field enclosed in
curly brackets is substituted by its table value.
Multiple Options - Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed
value.
Delimiter - Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Use
this option when Multiple Options = Yes.
Use lookup in:
Grid
Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML

, CSV e RTF).
Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).
Both
Same as selecting Grid and Summary
Default Value - Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Select Command return value.
Otherwise, the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character
defined in Separated by.
Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select
Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
Choose connection - Select a different connection available in the project.
Grid Lookup - Manual

Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values.
Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface.
Attributes :
Lookup Types - Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value , Multiple Values (Delimiter),
Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).
Single Value
Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. The value store in the
database is substituted by a label defined in a list.
Figure1.1: Single Value lookup settings.
Label - Text displayed in the grid.

Value - Attribute stored in the table. For example, M is displayed Male.
Multiple Values (Delimiter)
Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the
table by full description. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. For
example, the stored value S;M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.
Figure1.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).

Value - Attribute stored in the table.
Delimiter - Define the character used to separated string values.
Multiple Values (Position)
table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and
size.
For example, in a string to save Gender (a byte) , Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby
(two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in
bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list:
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books .
Figure1.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).

Start - String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1).
Size - Data size in bytes in the string.
Multiple Values (Binary)
table by full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved
by specific algorithm.
For example, the following information list has the data and the value automatically
attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. (the values are displayed):
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the
following algorithm:
11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling)
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books - Traveling)
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Figure1.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).
Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value.
Update - Update selected item.
Remove - Remove selected item.
Clear - Clear the attributes.
Save - Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).
Load lookup definitions - Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF).
Both
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Label value . Otherwise, the
field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.
Figure5: Display Settings

Attributes:
Font Style - Field font type.
Font Size - Font size.
Italic Text - Uses Italic font.
Bold Text - Apply bold formatting to the field.
Number of characters - Characters limit in the field.
Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment.
Vertical Alignment - Field Vertical alignment.
Background Image - Uses a background image in the field.
Line Break - Uses line break in the field.
Font Color - Font color (Select from color palette).
Background color - Background color (Select from color palette).
Width - Field width.
Height (px) - Field height.
Title Horizontal Aligment - Horizontal alignment of the title.
Title Horizontal Aligment - Vertical alignment of the title.
Bold - Apply bold formatting to field title only.
Column Chart
Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart.
Column Chart Interface.
Attributes:
Group by Label - Column group by label. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select.
Summary Function - Summary function applied: Count, Sum, Max, Min or Avg.
Configurable Chart - User configurable Chart parameters.
Display Values - Display Chart Values.
Column for Label - Column Label.
Chart width - Chart width, in pixels.
Chart height - Chart height, in pixels.
Legend height - Maximum height, in percentage between the chart and the space (on top)
reserved for captions.
Multiple Lines Text
Figure1: General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type -Define the application field type. Multiple line text fields display line breaks (like HTML
tag ).
HTML Content - Define the field as HTML. HTML fields store HTML tags processed accordingly by
ScriptCase.
X
entry is required).
Z
Examples:
Mask
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
Field Value
1234567890
12345678
1234567890
12345678
0012345678
Formatted Value
(12) 3456 - 7890
(00) 1234 - 5678
(12) 3456 - 7890
( ) 1234 - 5678
( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Column Chart
Attributes:
Integer
Figure1: Field General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Integer fields are formatted according to integer
formatting rules.
X
entry is required).
Z
Examples:
Mask
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
Field Value
1234567890
12345678
1234567890
12345678
0012345678
Formatted Value
(12) 3456 - 7890
(00) 1234 - 5678
(12) 3456 - 7890
( ) 1234 - 5678
( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Figure2: Values Format Interface.
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. If No is selected the
attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Negative Sign and Negative format of number are
displayed.(See regional settings).
Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator.
Negative Sign- Define the character used to display negative values.
Number negative format - Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field).
Negative Color - Define a different font color to negative values.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Lookup
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.

Attributes:
Line Chart Type - There are two types that can be used:
Bar Chart : Display a bar chart relative to working column. The calculation of the bars size is
done in relation to the Grand Total of the column values. The chart width defines the images
size to be displayed.
Note: Chart width 200px.

Icon Chart -Display icons relative to working column. The amount of icons calculated is
the division of the column value by icon quantity entered.
Note: Icon Quantity is 1000, thus, the amount of stars beside, is display value divided by 1000.
Display value - Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons).
Quantity Icon - Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field.
Chart Width - Chart width in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bar Graph. Default value is
200px.
Chart Height- Chart height in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.
Margin - Chart Margin. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.
Image / Positive Color - Enter color to be used.
Image / Negative Color - The same as Image / Positive Color above. This parameter is used if the
field value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes:
Decimal
General SettingsInterface
Figure1:
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Decimal fields are formatted according to real numbers
formatting rules.
X
entry is required).
Z
Examples:
Mask
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
Field Value
1234567890
12345678
1234567890
12345678
0012345678
Formatted Value
(12) 3456 - 7890
(00) 1234 - 5678
(12) 3456 - 7890
( ) 1234 - 5678
( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Image: Values Format Interface.
Attributes:
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. When selecting No the
attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format
are displayed. (See regional settings).
Decimal Separator - Define the character used as decimal separator.
Negative Signal- Define the character used to display negative values.
Negative Color - Define a different color to negative values.
Decimal Precision - Value decimal precision.
Complete with Zeros - Define the decimal precision to be completed with zeros at the right.
Example: The value is $125.50 with decimal precision of 3. Using Complete with zeros the field is
displayed $125.500.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Value
M
Start
1
Size
1
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
8
16
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.

Attributes:

200px.
Column Chart
Attributes:
Percent
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Percent fields are like a number field, but displaying
the percentage symbol after it.
X
entry is required).
Z
Examples:
Mask
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
Field Value
1234567890
12345678
1234567890
12345678
0012345678
Formatted Value
(12) 3456 - 7890
(00) 1234 - 5678
(12) 3456 - 7890
( ) 1234 - 5678
( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Decimal Format
Attributes:
displayed $125.500.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Value
Start
Size
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
4
8
16
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.

Attributes:

200px.
Column Chart
Attributes:
Currency
Figure 1: Interface General Settings
Attributes:
Data type -Define the type of field application. Currency fields are formatted according to currency
formatting rules.
X
entry is required).
Z
Examples:
Mask
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
Field Value
1234567890
12345678
1234567890
12345678
0012345678
Formatted Value
(12) 3456 - 7890
(00) 1234 - 5678
(12) 3456 - 7890
( ) 1234 - 5678
( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Attributes:
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. If selecting No the
attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign, Currency positive format
and Currency negative format are displayed.(See regional settings).
Monetary Format - Define if the field is displayed in monetary format.
Monetary Symbol - Define the character used as the monetary symbol.
Negative Sign - Define the character used to display negative values.
Currency positive format - Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field).
Currency negative format - Define the character used to display negative values.
Complete with Zeros -Define the decimal precision is to be completed with zeros to the right.
Example: The value is $125.50 with decimal precision 3. Using Complete with zeros the field is
displayed $125.500.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.

Attributes:

200px.
Column Chart
Attributes:

Html Image
Figure1: Field General Settings.
Attributes:
Data type ? Define the application field type. Html image fields are used to display images.
- Define the image to display. The icon
"Choose image" displays Scriptcase standard images.
Alternatively click in
"Upload image" to send an image from a different location to the server
(images need to be in the same server to be displayed).
Border - Image border width in pixels.
Width - Define image width in Pixels.
Height - Define image height in Pixels.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Calculated Percent
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Calculated Percent fields are calculated based on the
total value of a related number field.
Related Field - Related number field to calculate the total value.
X
entry is required).
Z
Examples:
Mask
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
Field Value
1234567890
12345678
1234567890
12345678
0012345678
Formatted Value
(12) 3456 - 7890
(00) 1234 - 5678
(12) 3456 - 7890
( ) 1234 - 5678
( ) 1234 - 5678
Repeating value
Decimal Format
Attributes:
displayed $125.500.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.

Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Lookup
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.

Attributes:

200px.
Column Chart
Attributes:
Date
General Settings Interface
Image1:
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date
rules.
Repeating value
Image2: Values Format with regional settings.
Image3: Values Format without regional settings.
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings date formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes)
the option Detail Mask is displayed. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display . To set
one of the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings).
Display - Show a list of predefined date display formats.
Detail Mask - Define the grid display format to the field, according to the PHP Date function.
Examples:
d-m-Y
F/Y
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A
25-09-2009
September/2009
25/9/2001
14:30:11
PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday, January 25
2009
h:i:s
11:33:20
#h:i:s
123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table
j day of the month
"1" to "31"
d day do month with zero "01" a "31"
at left
n month
"1" a"12"
m month with zero at left "01" a"12"
M month (written format "Jan"
with 3 char)
F month (written format "January"
complete)
y year with 2 digits
"09"
Y year with 4 digits
"2009"
D weekday with 3 char
"Mon"
l weekday (written format "Monday"
complete)
g hour 12-hours format
"1" a "12"
G hour 24-hours format
"0" a "23"
h hour 12-hours format "01" a "12"
with zero at left
H hour 24-hours format "00" a "23"
with zero at left
i minutes
"00" a "59"
s seconds with zero at "00" a "59"
left
a pre and pos meridian "am" a "pm"
A pre and pos meridian "AM" a "PM"
#h hours accumulator
#i minutes accumulator
#s seconds accumulator
\ escape
Internal Format - Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Use the characters
Y, M and D for Year, Month and Day to enter the format.
Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year, the
position 5 and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day, define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD
Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represents the month and the
positions 3 and 6 the year , define the internal format as: MMYYYY
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music

Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
Time
Image1:
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type.Time fields are formatted according to specific time
rules.
Repeating value
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes)
the option Detail Mask is displayed. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display . To set
one of the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings).

Examples:
d-m-Y
F/Y
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A
25-09-2009
September/2009
25/9/2001
14:30:11
PM
2009
h:i:s
11:33:20
#h:i:s
123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table
j day of the month
"1" to "31"
at left
n month
"1" a"12"
with 3 char)
complete)
"09"
"2009"
"Mon"
complete)
"1" a "12"
"0" a "23"
with zero at left
with zero at left
i minutes
"00" a "59"
left
\ escape
Internal Format - Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Use the
characters Y, M and D for Year, Month and Day to enter the format.
position 5 and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day, define the internal format as:
YYYYMMDD
Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represents the month and
the positions 3 and 6 the year , define the internal format as: MMYYYY
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Date And Time
Image1: General Settings Interface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Date and Time fields are formatted according to
specific date and time rules.
Repeating value
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings date and time formatting rules to the field. When
selected (Yes) the option Detail Mask is displayed. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute
Display. To set one of the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings).
Decimal of seconds - Number os decimals for seconds.
Examples:
d-m-Y
F/Y
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A
25-09-2009
September/2009
25/9/2001
14:30:11
PM
2009
h:i:s
11:33:20
#h:i:s
123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table
j day of the month
"1" to "31"
at left
n month
"1" a"12"
with 3 char)
complete)
"09"
"2009"
"Mon"
complete)
"1" a "12"
"0" a "23"
with zero at left
with zero at left
i minutes
"00" a "59"
left
\ escape
Internal Format - Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Use the characters
Y, M and D for Year, Month and Day to enter the format.
position 5 and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day, define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD
Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represents the month and the
positions 3 and 6 the year , define the internal format as: MMYYYY
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Column Chart
Attributes:
Image(database)
Image (database)
Image1: General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Using this field the images are retrieved from the
database in binary.
Image Border Image Height
Image border
width in pixels.
- Define image height (in Percent or Pixels).
Image Width - Define image width (in Percent or Pixels).

Maintain Aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.
Open in Another Window - Open another window and displays original image.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Image (file Name)
Image1:General SettingsInterface
Attributes:
Data type ? Define the application field type. The images are saved in a sever directory and the file
name in a table field in the database.
Image Border Image Height
Image border
width in pixels.
- Define image height (in Percent or Pixels).
Image Width - Define image width (in Percent or Pixels).

Maintain Aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.
Open in Another Window - Open another window and displays original image.
Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files (it is added under the directory defined in
Images Directory. See Settings). It is possible to use global or local variables, in the subdirectory
name.
Image Cache - Time in minutes to keep the image in cache memory.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Document (database)
Image1:
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Using this field the files are retrieved from the database
in binary.
Display Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type.
File name - Define the field to store the document file name (it is database field).
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Document (file Name)
Attributes:
Data type -Define the application field type. The file is saved in a server directory and the file name
in a table text field.
Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be
label Client Name. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Subfolder - Enter a
subdirectory name to save the files. Display Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file
type. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Credit Card Number
Attributes:
Data type - Credit Card Number fields are formatted according to specific rules.
Repeating value
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
Lookup
Description
1
2
4
8
16
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:
Column Chart
Attributes:
E-mail
Image1:
Attributes:
Data type ? Define the application field type.Email fields are formatted according to specific
email rules.
Repeating value
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.

Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Lookup
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
Url
Image1: General SettingsInterface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type.URL fields are formatted according to specific URL
rules.
Repeating value
Other Page - Open the link in another page.

Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes:
Data Type - Field data type.
Label - Field title.
SQL Type - Database Field type.
Barcode
Attributes:
Type - Type of barcode.
Text - Text to designate the barcode.
There are 18 types of barcode, which are listed below:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Defines the CSS values for fields individually.
Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.
Title CSS
Attributes:
Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.
Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.
Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.
Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title
using a color palette.
Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font.

Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font.
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title.
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.
Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or
justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top,
text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width - Sets the title width.
Height - Sets the title height.
Field CSS
Attributes:
Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field.
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.
HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or
justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super,
top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width - Sets the field width.
Height - Sets the field height.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.
Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application
object using a color palette.

Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object.
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.
Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center
or justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super,
Width - Sets the object width.
Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in
the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of
interacting with the applications.
Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.
Attributes:
Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.
Help Type:
Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside
the field is clicked.
Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.
Text - Display the specified help text beside the field.
Youtube
General settings
Attributes
Data Type - Application field type.
Label - Field label in the application.
Display Mode - The way the video is displayed, modal or new window.
Width - Video width in pixels.
Height - Video height in pixels.
Link Type - Type of the link: button or text.
Link Text - Text of the link.
Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in
"insert and update mode".
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Google Maps
This feature allows you to display maps using the Google API.
Data Type: - Select Google maps as the data type.

Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table and
is displayed as Client Name.
Home - Define the method for passing parameters to the Google API.
Display Mode - Defines how the map will be opened. It can either be opened in Modal window or in
a New window.
Width - Defines the width of the map.
Height - Defines the height of the map.
Zoom - Defines the initial zoom factor (available on the Google API) for the map.
API Key- You need to enter your Authorization Key to view maps using Google API.
Note: The API Key is a unique key composed of an alphanumeric string (text), which is
nothing more than the license to use this service. When you register to use the service, the
key is tied to a domain and a directory on the server. All pages (ScriptCase applications)
that are using the API must be located in the directory that was specified when registering
for the Google Maps API.
If you have a web server on your machine, you can just get a key for local testing, and
that's specified as http://localhost in the field during registration.
To get your API Key just visit the following site:
http://code.google.com/intl/en/apis/maps/signup.html
Link Type - Define the link type. This can be a text link or a button link.
Text Link - Specify the text for the link to the map.
SQL Type - Displays the SQL (database) field type.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Qr Code
General Settings
Atributtes:
Values Format
Atributtes:
Level of error correction - Codewords are 8 bits long and use the Reed?Solomon error correction
algorithm with four error correction levels. The higher the error correction level, the less storage
capacity.
Image Size - Size of the QR code.
Margin - Margin of the QR code image.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).

Gantt
The Gantt chart is used to illustrate the progress of the different stages of a project.
Gantt Chart options:

Output Format - Output format of the Gantt chart.
Field label - Field containing the record label of the Gantt chart.
Start Date - Field containing the start date of the registration in the Gantt chart.
End Date - Field containing the end date of registration in the Gantt chart.
Percent Completed - Field containing information regarding the percent completed of the task in
the Gantt chart
Resource - Field containing the name of the resource allocated to the task in the Gantt chart.
Layout
Layout
Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes, organizing fields in blocks,
and defining header formats, amongst other options.
Blocks
Conceptually a block is a container in which a Form Application, Control or Grid fields are located.
By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block, bearing the same name as
the application. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your
purpose. The Figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column, used to define the position of the next
block (positioned to the side or below in the series of blocks).
Figure 1: Block settings interface.
To the left of each block there are two icons:
to edit the block properties; and
to delete the block.
Organising Blocks and Changing position
See below how to modify the page block display order.
Click to select the block in order to modify its position.
This is how to remove a block from being displayed.

Click on the block and drag it to Blocks not shown.
To change the page block is displayed in, all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated
below.
Attributes:
Block (name) - Block title header displayed.
Title (Display) - Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed.
Label (Display) - Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block.
Label (Position) - The label options are:
"Above" - Displays the label above the field.
"Beside" - Displays the label beside the field.
"Below" - Displays the label below the field.
Fields (Columns) - Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block.
Fields (Position) - Position of fields within the block:
Below - The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns.
"Beside" - The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns.
"Line" - The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns).
Organization (Next) - Organization of blocks on the page:

"Below" - Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one.
"Beside" - Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one.
"Tabs" - Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab.
Organization (Width) - Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent.

Organization (Height)- Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent.
Add New Block

To add new blocks to an application, just click
Figure 2: Add New Block interface.

Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Label - Block label.
Edit Block
Click
to edit the block properties and click Save.
Figure 2: Edit Block interface.

Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Title - Block Title.
Display Title - Whether to display a line containing the block title.
Title Font - Block title font applied.
Font size - Block title font size applied.
Font color - Block title font color.
Background color - Block title line background color.
Background image - Block title background image.
Title Height - Block title line height (in pixels).
Horizontal Alignment - Block title horizontal alignment (Left, Center or Right).

Vertical Alignment - Block title vertical alignment (Top, Middle or Bottom).
Display Label - Display block field labels.
Columns - Number of block field columns.
Column Width - Calculate the block columns.
Label color - Field label display color.
Field Organization - Block field organization.
Label Position - Field label position.
Next Block - Position of the next block in relation to the current one.
Border color - Block border color.
Border width - Block border width.
Block width - Block width.
Block height - Block height.
Cellspacing - Spacing between the block cells.
Settings
Figure 1: Layout Settings interface
Is used to define the Application Theme. (CSS)

Attributes:
Header Template - Used to select the Header format.
Footer Template - Used to select the Footer format.
Theme - Used to select an existing Theme (colors, fonts, etc) for the application.
Header
Figure 1: Header Interface.
This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header
Template".
Display Header - This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed
Application Title - Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. (A Form Applications
has 2 titles: one for Insert mode, and another one for Update mode).
Header Variables - The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the
Combobox. Depending on the type, you may need to associate content with it. See the available
types below:
Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. A Combobox
listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (Select query) are displayed
beside the header variable when the Field type is selected. The selected field value is then
displayed in the header line.
Title: Displays the value entered in Select Title in the header .
Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There
are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. To see all the
available date formats, click
to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and
examples. Enter the format in the text field alongside it.
Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. To locate existing images and select one,
click on the Choose an image icon and to upload new images to the server click on the
Upload an Image icon
.
Value: When the Value type is selected, the contents of the text field to the right is displayed
in the header line. Enter text and/or Global Variables. For example: Employee name:
[v_name].
Search Criteria - The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in
the header. (available only in Grid applications)
Search Criteria (one per line) - The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed
in the header. Each condition is displayed on a new line. (available only in Grid applications)
FOOTER
Figure 2: Footer Interface.
This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >>
Footer Template".
Display Footer - This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed.
Footer Variables - The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the
types below:
listing the fields that are part of the Select (application's data source) are displayed beside
the Footer variable when the Field type is selected. The selected field value is displayed in
the footer line.
Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in Select Title.
Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are
many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time.
to see all the
available date formats, click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and
.
in the footer line. Enter text and/or Global Variables. For example: Employee name:
[v_name].
in the footer. Each condition is displayed on a new line. (available only in Grid applications)
Events
Events
Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. Events
allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a record is inserted,
when it is loaded, upon submitting a form, ...) and for a specific type of application.
OnInit- This event is executed just one time, before the main select of the application execution. In this
scope, normally, are executed the macros that update the select, as these: sc_select_field,
sc_select_order,sc_select_where(add) and etc.
onRecord- This event is executed before displaying each grid record.
onHeader- This event is executed immediately before displaying the grid header. Use this event to print
some calculated value in the header for example.
onFooter-Used to display some calculated value. Write in this event the necessary calculation to display
the result in the footer.
Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. These
functions are called "Scriptcase Macros".
Read more about Scriptcase Macros.
Ajax Events
Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up
application processing. It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to
refresh the entire page.
Figure 1: AJAX event interface.
The following events are available in ScriptCase.

onChange - This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus
is then directed to another object.
onClick - This events fires when the field is clicked.
onBlur - This events fires when the field has focus, the field value is NOT changed and the focus is
directed to another object.
onFocus - This events fires when the field has focus.
Only the onClick event is available to Grid applications.
See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). For valid users it returns
the name. For invalid users a message is displayed.
Example:
1 - Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process, (in PHP code). Passing parameters is
optional.
Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing.
2 -Enter
the PHP business rule in the PHP editor. The code is processed by the Server and the XML
result is sent to the browser.
Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX.
1. PHP editor - Use it to type in your PHP code.

2. Insert Code - ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be
inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly.
3. Parameters (Fields) - Use this to create parameters retrieving field values.
Buttons
Buttons
There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar.
Figure 1: Create new button.
New Button
To create a new button, click on the New Button option and enter a name and the type of the button.
Buttons Types : (Javascript, PHP, Link).
Image2: Edit button function.
Deleting a button
To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the
Buttons option.
Javascript Button
Creating a Javascript Type Button

To create a new button, click on "New button", enter the name and select the type of button.
There are three types of display buttons: (Button, Image and Link).
Button Display Mode
Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image.
Label - Defines the button title to be displayed in the application.
Hint - Defines a hint message.

Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.
To not display a message, leave this field blank.
CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor.
Figure 1: Buttons Settings Interface.
Image Button Display Mode
Icon - Button display icon.
Link Button Display Mode
Label - Defines the button title displayed in the application.
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Php Button
Creating a Php Type Button

Button Display Mode

Link Button
Creating a Link type button

Button Display Mode

The link button requires a link associated to it. In the application menu (on the left side of the window)
there is an option to create new links.
Follow the steps below to create the link required and configure the new Link button to complete the
operation.
Creating a new Link

1 - Using the link option click in new link, as in the image below.
Image2:Create new Link.
2 - Select the link type Buttons and click in next (as Image below).
Image3: Link Type Interface.
3 - Select the application that will be called and click in Next.
Image4: List of Applications Interface.
4 - Define the parameters passed. It can be of three types: Field, Variable, Value or Empty.
Field - Enter the field used to pass the content.
Image5: Parameters Definition Interface - Field.
Variable - Enter a global variable existing in the application.
Image5: Parameters Definition Interface - Field.
Fixed - Enter a fixed content to be passed.
Image6: Parameters Definition Interface - Value.
Empty - No value will be pass.
Image7: Parameters Definition Interface - Empty.
5 - Define the form link properties - Iframe display.
Image8: Link/Form Properties Interface.
Link Operation Mode - How the link is displayed

Open in the same window- Show the form in the same browser window, exiting the search
and going to the form.
Open in other window- Open another window to show the form.
Open in a Iframe- Show the form in the same window that the search. Below the search an
Iframe is created to display the form.
Exit URL for the target application - Web address accessed when the user exit the grid.
Link Hint - Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.
Form Properties - Select the buttons displayed.
Run Button
Creating a run type button

This new option in the Grid allows to create a button to process a PHP code for selected records
(checkbox).
Image1: Button Configuration Interface.
Edit Button: Display Mode (Button)
Image1: Buttons Settings Interface.
Display mode - Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Button).

Label - Button Title in the application.
Hint - Hint message.
Confirmation Message - To not display the message, leave the field empty.
Css Style - CSS style class name, created in the schema editor buttons. (Layout buttons)
Edit Button: Display Mode (Image)
Display mode - Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Link).

Edit Button: Display Mode (Link)
Display mode - Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Link).

Label - Button Title in the application.
Css Style - CSS style class name, created in the schema editor buttons. (Layout buttons)
This button Type Uses 2 events to process PHP Codes.

OnRecord: Executed on each selected record.
Image2: PHP Code Interface.
OnFinish: Executed after process all selected records.
Image3:PHP Code Interface
Detail
About
The detail is an interesting grid feature. It allows to organize the information displayed according to its
importance. Display more important information in the grid and complementary data in detail form.
Click on
displayed at each grid line to enable the feature.
To enable the details, go to the Grid Settings, as shown below, and enable the checkbox:
Detail Settings
Select the fields to display in detail page.
Image1:Detail Settings.
Attributes
Choose the fields to display in detail page - Click field and click in On/Off to select (or unselect)
fields.
Display Detail - Define display detail according to following options:
Beside the Grid - Display detail at the right side of the record, in the same window that
displays the grid.
Below the Grid - Display selected record detail, below the record at same window (use the
detail button to select the record detail).
In another page - Display just the detail for the selected record hiding the grid.
In another window - Display detail in popup window.
Alignment - Define detail alignment configuration of each field (left, right, center).
Detail's page width - Define the grid detail page HTML width.
Measure unit of the detail - Define grid detail page HTML width unit as percent or pixel.
Detail Keys
Define the fields that will be a part of the where clause to search selected record.
Image2: Detail Keys.
Choose detail field keys to display - Configure the fields to be passed by the WHERE clause:
Turn On/Off - Select field to display in the detail. An asterisk is displayed by the selected field .
All - Select all fields.
None - Uncheck all fields.
Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons
Image1: Toolbar.
Attributes:
Navigation - Display navigation checkboxes that can be displayed in the grid.
Exit
Quit the application.
Exports - Define the formats that must be generated. The ScriptCase can generate:
PrintCreate the grid in HTML format.
PDF Create a complete report, having all grid data in PDF
format.
Separator
Separator Image used to separate the buttons group.
Buttons Settings
Header
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Group By
Group By Settings
Define the Group By criteria. The fields that will be grouped and the sequence the field breaks should
occurs.
Image 1: Group by Interface.
Attributes:
Enable Treeview - Turn on/off the group by.
Group By Line - Select the breaking position: Before and after the records.
Before the records - It shows the Group By Title before its records.
After the records - It shows the Group By Title after its records.
Group By Header - Display break header in all pages.

Keep Group By Order - Order the fields in group.
Display Titles - Display fields label on the breaking line.
Record Count - Define a column title for the amount of registers.
Value Separator - Define a separator between the title and the value of a field in the breaking.
Tab a Group By - It defines the left margin of the Group By.
Separates the Group By - It defines the margin from a Grouping to the next one.
Group By Sorting
It defines the selection sorting of the Group By rules created.
Image 2: Group by Rules Sorting.
Group By Rules
The Group By rules is where we can select the fields to Grouping the records.
It is possible to create several Group By rules allowing the end-user to select what rule he wants and
change the Group By dinamically in the application.
Image 1: Interface of Group By rules.
attributes:
Name - Each rule must have a name to identify it.
Label - It is the rule name that will be displayed to the end-user.
Fields - There you can check/uncheck one or more fields to create the Group By and define the
level of each Group By field.
Example:
Image 2: Group By Rule settings.
Image 3: Button to select a Group By Rule in a generated application.
Image 4: Selecting the Group By Rule.
Image 5: Results of a Group By Rule selected.
Events
OnGroupBy - This event is always performed when breakings occurs, independently of the level, and
allow the manipulation of the totalization fields. The ScriptCase have all totalization variables of the grid
scope. Guessing that an application which have two levels of breakings (state and city) and which
totalize two fields (parcel and balance), we can have access to the totals, in the scope of calculate for
each register, in the following way:
{count_ger}
- contains the total amount of the registers;
{sum_parcel}
- contains the total sum of the field parcel;
{sum_balance}
- contains the total sum of the field balance;
{count_state}
- contains the total amout of the registers of the

breaking of state which has been processed;
{sum_state_parcel}
- contains the total sum of the field parcel of the

field of state which has bem processed;
{sum_state_balance} - contains the total sum of the field balance of the

field of state which has bem processed;
{count_city}
- contains the total amout of registers of the breaking

of city which has been processed;
{sum_city_parcel}
- contains the total sum of the field parcel of the

breaking of city which has been processed;
{sum_city_balance}
- contains the total sum of the field balance of the

breaking of city which has been processed;
Considering that the formulas defined to be processed in the scope of calculate during the breakings
will be acting for the some levels of breaking, the special variables of totalization, in this scope, they are
mentioned substituting the breaking name by the key word breaking that means:
{count_ger}
- contains the total amout of registers;
{sum_parcel}
- contains the total sum of the field parcel;
{sum_balance}
- contains the total sum of the field

balance;
{count_breaking}
- contains the total amount of registers, of

the breaking which has been processed;
{sum_breaking_parcel}
- contains the total sum of the field parcel

of the breaking which has been processed;
{sum_breaking_balance} - contains the total sum of the field

balance of the breaking which has been
processed;
Ex: In an application which has breakings by state and city and which totalizes a field balance in the
breakings total, we wish to show the average in substitution to the balance. It creates a method in the
event OnGroupBy with the following content:
{sum_breaking_balance}= {sum_breaking_balance} / {count_breaking};
Fields
Data Type - Define the application field type.

X
entry is required).
Z
Examples:
Mask
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(xx) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
(zz) xxxx - xxxx
Field Value
1234567890
12345678
1234567890
12345678
0012345678
Formatted Value
(12) 3456 - 7890
(00) 1234 - 5678
(12) 3456 - 7890
( ) 1234 - 5678
( ) 1234 - 5678
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
16
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Group By Settings
Image1: Group By Fields Interface.
Attributes:
Fields Position - Define the group by fields display organization.
Columns - Define how many columns are used to display the break down info.
Display Label- Display the field label on break down.
Line break - Display break down line.
Summary line (grid) - Display summary line in the grid.
Total line (summary) - Display line total in the summary.
Total line message - Define the text message displayed in the total line. Ex.: Orders total in the
state.
Records amount - Display the amount of records displayed in the break down.
PDF Grid Break Pages - Display each grid break in a separate PDF page. Ex.: Display each state
orders in a different report page.
PDF Summary break page - Display each summary break in a separate PDF page.
HTML Grid Break Pages - Display each grid break in a separate HTML page.
HTML Summary break pages - Display each summary break in a separate HTML page.
Start TreeView - TreeView initial state.
Sorting - Order in which the field will appear in the Group By.
Fields - Select the fields (VALUE and SUM) displayed in the group by line.
Group by line layout (Label)
Image2:Group by line layout (Label) Interface.
Attributes:
Text Font - Allow to define the font used on the breaking label.
Font Size - Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label.
Text Color - Label color on the breaking.
Background Color - Breaking background color.
Bold Text - Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.
Group by line layout (Value)
Image3: Group by line layout(Value) Interface.
Attributes:
Text font - Allow to define the font used on the breaking label.
Font size - Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label.
Text color - Label color on the breaking.
Bold text - Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.
Configure the total line layout
Image4: Configure the total line layout Interface.
Attributes:
Text font - Allow to define the font used on the breaking label.
Font size - Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label.
Text color - Label color on the breaking.
Background color - Breaking background color.
Bold text -Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.
Totals
Settings
Use this option to define fields with totals (on breaks or at the end).
Image1: Summarization Functions Interface.
Attributes:
Results in a single line - Display the title General Total and the total values in a single line.
"Yes"
"No"
Display Total - Define pages to display the General Total. Choose from : "Display in all pages ", "
Display in last page" or "Do not display".
Group SubTotal - It respects as the way will be visualized the totals of the breaking:
Yes - Show sub-totals of the breaking after it occurs.
No - Show sub-totals of the breaking in the beginning before it occurs.
Record Count - Display the record count beside the General Total.
"Yes"
"No"
This interface defines the "Group By" field labels:
Image2: Layout Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Group By field - Group By Selected fields.
Label - Label Description displayed in the end application.
Display - Allows to display or hide the record count.
Select Fields
Image1: Summarization fields Interface.
Select the fields to be summarized.

The buttons at the left side of the combobox allow the user to select the fields that will have to be
totalized. To attribute an operation to be used in a column (field), just select the field and check the
operation button.
Sum -Define that a sum to the selected field values is generated.
Average - Calculates an arithmetic average for the selected field.
Maximun - Highlights the higher identified value for the selected field.
Minimun - Highlights the lower identified value for the selected field.
Note: The selected fields are displayed when a break down occurs or in the end of the report.
Positioning
Overview
The positioning of the summary fields can be Default, Grouped or By field:
Default
Grouped
By field
Default
Default option returns a value just below the column that is being summarized.
Image1:Summary Fields Order Interface (Default).
The Total line is displayed in Credit Lmit column. See below:
Image2: Default Order generated.
Aligment
Total aligment is the position where will display the "Total line message". They can be: Center, Left and
Right:
"Left"
"Center"
"Right"
Label It allows to define what message will be displayed instead of Total:
Image3: Label Settings Interface.
Grouped
Grouped option returns a value just below the column that is being summarized. But in different lines to
each summarization type (Sum, Average, Max and Min).
Image1: Summary fields Order Interface (Grouped).
It is possible to change the summary positions clicking and dragging to up or down.
Image2: Changing the line positions.
This example , the Total displays the sum and average of Credit Limit :
Image3: Grouped Order.
Aligment
Total aligment is the position where will display the "Total line message". They can be: Center, Left and
Right:
"Left"
"Center"
"Right"
Label
This Settings allows to change the labels of Summarization Types.
Image4: Edting labels.
By Field
By Field option organizes each summarized field by field name. It doesn't follow the columns layout.
Image1: Summary Fields Order Interface (By Field).
Break Line per Field

Enabling "break line per field" checkbox, it will display an unique field per line with selected
summarizations (Sum, Average, Max and Min).
Image2: "Break line per Field" enabled.
Disabling "break line per field" checkbox it displays each field side by side.
Image3: "Break line per Field" disabled.
Label
This Settings allows to change the labels of Summarization Types.
Figura4: Edio dos Labels.
Fields
Total Label Settings
Figura1: Total Label Settings Interface
Text font - Allow to define a font to the text field.

Font size - Allow to define the font size.
Text color - Allow to define the text color.
Background color - Allow to define the background color.
Bold text - Allow to format the text in bold.
Example:
Total Line (Data) Display Settings
Figura2: Total Line Display Settings Interface.
Text font - Allow to define a font to the text field.

Font size - Allow to define the font size.
Text color - Allow to define the text color.
Background color - Allow to define the background color.
Bold text - Allow to format the text in bold.
Example:
Summary
Summary Settings
Image1: Summary Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Title - Defines a title for the summary, if not informed, Scriptcase uses the default title for the
summary : "Summary ", but if you want no title to be displayed enter on the title a HTML tag "
" as below.
Image2: Title Field informed with the HTML Tag.
Quantity title - Records count title.

Summary Display:
On every page - In the end of each search result page the summary is displayed below the
grid.
On the last page - In the end of the last search result page (and only in this page) the
summary is displayed below the grid.
On another page - The summary is displayed in a separated page that is opened with a button
the toolbar is clicked (the summary button).
Record Count:
Do not show - Do not show the total of records per breaking.
Show just in he summary - Show in the summary the total of records per breaking.
Show in the summary and in the Chart - Show in the summary the total of records per
breaking and show chart.
Horizontal total - Display horizontal total on summaries.
Vertical total - Display vertical total on summaries.
The chart icon positioning - Chart icon positioning.
Positioning of the Total icon - Positioning of the Total icon.
Page width - Page width value for the summary.
Width unit - Measure unit used in the widths (Automatic, Pixels and Percent).
layout settings
Attributes:
GroupBy field - Selected break fields.

Position - Sets position on the x-axis or y-axis.
Sorting - Sets the sorting by the database value or the display value.
Fill empty labels - Defines whether the labels will be filled.
Link Grid - Creates a link in the selected field.
Alignment - Defines the layout alignment :centered, left or right.
Tabular format - Sets he tabular format for the summary.
Toolbar
In this screen we can do the referring configurations to the summary. The summary always occurs when
the application of search have to show the summary, summary type, summary position, summary
ordinance, hot key, amount of registers, graph type, Chart width, Chart height, Chart edge, Chart aspect,
Chart in other window, summary width and width unit of the summary.
Image1: Interface of Summary Configuration.
Attributes:
Formats - Allow to select the formats of summary generation.
Buttons - Allow to select the buttons which are shown in the toolbar.
Buttons Order - Allow to order the buttons in the toolbar as necessary, using the selection bar
(right side of the table).
Select Fields
Image1: Summarization fields Interface.
Select the fields to be summarized.

The buttons at the left side of the combobox allow the user to select the fields that will have to be
totalized. To attribute an operation to be used in a column (field), just select the field and check the
operation button.
Sum -Define that a sum to the selected field values is generated.
Average - Calculates an arithmetic average for the selected field.
Maximun - Highlights the higher identified value for the selected field.
Minimun - Highlights the lower identified value for the selected field.
Note: The selected fields are displayed when a break down occurs or in the end of the report.
Chart Settings
Here we can configure the chart settings. For example: chart type, chart width, chart height , etc.
note: If you we have 2 or more Group By rule, we must configure the chart options for each Group By rule created in the application.
Image1: Generate Column Chart Interface .
Image2: Generate Lines Chart Interface (Total).
These options are available only to Group By rules with more than one field.
Image3: Chart Stettings Interface.
All charts are using HTML5

Attributes:
Chart Type- Define the "Default" chart type displayed when the chart option is clicked and which
chart types will be available in the application.
Bar:
Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.

Subtitle- Define the subtitle displayed in the chart.
Bar - Orientation - Bars orientation - vertical or
horizontal on the chart.
Bar - Dimension - Bars dimension (2D or 3D) on the
chart.
Bar - Stacking - Stacks the bars in a single bar (By
series ).
Bar - Series Group - Group series in bar charts
Bar - Values on the side - Place the values on the
side of the bars.
Pie:

Pie - Format - Forms pie or donut formats.
Pie - Dimension - Image dimension on the pie chart.
Pie - Sorting - Sort the pie chart.
Pie - Values format - Data format displayed.
Line:

Line - Shape - Displays the format of the line.
Line - Series Group - Line grouping type.
Area:

Area - Shape - Area shape displayed in the chart.
Area - Stacking - Stacks areas in the chart.
Area - Series group - How to group series in the
chart.
Gauge:

Gauge - Shape - Shape displayed in the chart.
Radar:

Funnel:

Funnel - Dimension - Funnel dimension (2D or 3D)
on the chart.
Pyramid:

Pyramid - Dimension - Bars dimension (2D or 3D)
on the chart.
Pyramid - Values format - Data format displayed.
Pyramid - Shape - Shape displayed in the chart.
Common Options
Summary chart type - Method of generation of graphics.
Displays Values - Displays values on generated chart .
Axis of Chart General Total - Display the chart of the General Total as a column or a line.
Display Y-Axis With Zero - Display Y-Axis With Zero.
Chart width - Generated chart width in pixels.
Chart Height - Generated chart height in pixels.
Values sorting - Sort chart values.
Chart display mode - Display charts in another window.
Chart Layout
Image 4: Chart Layout Color Settings Interface.
Options
Chart palette color - Define the color used in the chart background.
Palette color for data plots - Define the color used in the chart data plot.
Positioning
Select the positioning of the totals in the summary.
Image1: Summary fields positioning Interface.
Drag'n drop the options to the desired position.
Sorting
Select which fields can use sorting in the summary.
Image1: Summary fields sorting Interface.
Attributes:
Fields - Select the fields you want to allow the sorting.
Default Sorting column - Select one field to initial sorting in the summary.
Sorting Order - Choose if the sorting will be ascending or descending.
Initial Sorting by the GROUP BY - Select one of the GROUP BYs to the initial sorting.
Header
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Nested Grids
What Is Nested Grids?
Nested grids are used to display information in reports hierarchically. For example the orders grid are
nested to the customers grid. It is possible create as many nested grids as necessary. On the picture
bellow, for each customer a nested grid containing that customer's orders is displayed.
Image1: Nested orders grid.
Read more:
How to use nested grids.
Nested Grid- Settings
Nested Grid Settings

On the Settings menu it is possible to edit nested grids general attributes of the
Image1: Nested grids menu.
Image2: Nested grids settings page.
Attributes:
Title in the same line- This attribute lets you configure the way you view the subquery. If the title is
displayed on the same line, the table of the subquery will be incorporated into the main query.
PDF - This option allows to enable / disable the nested grids exporting to the pdf report, when
disabling this option only the "main grid" will be exported.
Enable Treeview - This option will force all the nested grids to be displayed using a "+" button on
the "main record". Watch it at the picture bellow.
Position - This parameter defines where the nested grids will be displayed in reference to the main
grid:
Option
In one column
Description
Display the nested grid in a new column after the last one.
Bellow the record Displays the nested grid below the main grids rows
Alignment - Allows to set up the nested grid horizontal alignment relative to the main grid. This
option only works when using the Position option Bellow the record.. Select between left, right and
center.
Define Individually
Any attribute that uses the option Define individually forces this attribute to be configured in each one of
the links. (see Editing nested grids ).
New Nested Grid
To create a new nested grid link click on the New Link item as displayed on the picture bellow.
Image1: Create a new link.
Define name and label to new nested grid.
Image2: Name and label for the new "link".
Applications list
All the projects grids which uses or references global variables on SQL statement are displayed. See
picture4.
Image3: Target application selection.
IMPORTANT: To use a grid as a nested grid is required that the nested application uses at least one
parameter or global variable in its SQL statement as on the picture bellow.
Image4: An order details grid, its SQL statement uses a parameter.
Parameters Settings
Define the parameter(s) that are passed between application.
Image5: Parameter var_cliente linkage.
On the picture above on the left side are displayed the nested grid inbound parameters (global
variables).
Select one option and value to each variable located on the target application (on the right side of the
above image):
Field - Used to pass a field's value from the master grid.
Fixed - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter.
Empty - Nothing is passed as parameter.
Button Save - Saves all the link parameters and closes the "link wizard".
Editing Nested Grids
Find all the nested grids of your grid in the Links folder located in the Nested Grids Application menu.
General settings
Image2: Nested grid general settings.
It is possible to edit the following attributes:

Label - Nested grid title.
Link - Define target application and the passed parameters info.
Display - Display or hide nested grid following items:
1 - Header
2 - Sequential
3 - Total
Visualization - Nested grid theme is equal to grids theme.
Define Individually
If any nested grid settings is defined individually, as on picture4. define each nested grid parameters on
the nested grids edit screen.
Image3: Nested grids settings defined individually.
All the options defined individually are displayed on the linking edit interface.
Image4: Nested grids update.
Read more about the attributes "Title in the same line", "Position", "Enable treeview" and PDF at:
Nested grids settings
Display settings
This options is displayed only if the info bellow is true.
Attribute
Title in the same line
Enable treeview
Position
Value
No
No
In one column
HorizontalAlignment - Define nested grid horizontal alignment: Left, Right or Center.

Vertical Alignment - Define nested grid vertical alignment: Top, Middle or Bottom.
Background color - Define nested grid background. Empty forces the use of the default application
color.
Title horizontal alignment - Defines nested grid title line horizontal alignment.
Title vertical alignment - Defines nested grid title line vertical alignment.
Bold - Define the nested grid label in bold.
Sorting Rules
Sorting Rules Settings
Image1: Sorting rules settings interface.
Attributes:
Order of the rule order - Allow to update the sorting rule display order. When you configure this
option, will be shown an icon (config sort) which when it is clicked, it allow the choice of the field and
its display order ascendant (ASC) or descendant (DESC).
Integrate and Sort - Allow to choose the sort type, The options are: fields/rules sort - allow to apply
the rules which were created and the field order (ascendant or descendant), fields sort - Allow to
apply the the fields sort (ascendant or descendant) or sorting rules - allow to apply the sort
according to the rules that were created.
New Rule
New Sorting Rule
Image1: Sorting Rule Interface.
Attributes:
Name - Field to inform the rule name.
Label- Field to inform the name that will be shown in the application.
Sorting Rule Settings
Image2: Sorting Rule Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Label - Allow to inform a name which will be shown when the application is executed.
Select the sorting rules fields - Allow to select through the selection bar what fields will be
shown (fields which are found in the right side box) and the fields which are not shown (fields which
are found in the left side box). To order the fields in the wanted way , use the ordinance bar located
at the right side of the box. To apply the ordinance type to the field, you only have to select the field
of the box at the right side and select the ascendant mode, where will show beside the field a + or if the ordinance is descendant.
Search
Settings
The search settings allows to define all Search application atributes.
Image1: Search Settings Interface.
Attributes
Ajax - Use Ajax technology on Search form.
EmptySearch - Display all records (for empty fields).
Search Criteria - Select the SQL "AND" or"OR" commands to define the search criteria.
Horizontal Alignment- Allows to define the search form horizontal aligment
vertical Alignment - >Allows to define the search form vertical aligment
Margins - Define the search form position (margins).
Display Condition - Display search condition to user selection.
Keep Values - Keep last form values and display it upon return.
Preserver fields and orders - Determine which values to keep to each search form.
Table width - Search form HTML width value.
Table width Unit - Unit used in width measurement.
Use Iframe - When activated, displays the search form and the search results in the same browser
window, in two FRAMES, one above the other.
Initial State - When activated displays the search form first with the grid in the iframe positioned
below the search form, when deactivated, displays just the search form. This option is associated to
Using Iframe.
Iframe Height - Iframe height in pixels where the data retrieved by the search form is displayed.
This option is associated to Using Iframe.

Use Enter to tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Required Fields
Define the required fields in the application.
Image 1: Required Fields Interface.
A marker (*) is displayed beside the field in the generated application. The required fields are validated
and a message is displayed if the field is empty.
Markers Positioning - Where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field.
Display message - Displays or not a message upon validation.
Search Criteria
Image1: Search Criteria Interface.
Allows to define filter options (SQL) for each field. The left list displays the fields and the right list has the
filter options. To select options click on one option (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains, ...) and click on
"Turn On / Off" button.
Buttons:
Turn On/Off - Enable or Disable the field or selected option.
All - Mark all fields or options.
None - Unmark all fields or options.
Show the condition - This option is displayed just if a field has only one option selected. It allows
do not display the criteria beside the field.
Toolbar
The toolbar is divided in two parts: top and bottom. It is possible to select the buttons
for each part independently. A button can even be in both parts simultaneously.
Image1: Search Toolbar Interface.
Attributes:
Toolbar (Top / Bottom) - Select the buttons displayed in the search form toolbars and the buttons
position.
Buttons Position (Top / Bottom) - Define the buttons alignment in the toolbar.
buttons settings
Image2: Settings Buttons.
Attributes:
Button - Button name.
Label - Define the label displayed on the button.
Hint - Define a hint in the button.
Access Key - Allows to define acess keys shortcuts.
Layout
Layout
OverView
Blocks

below.
Attributes:


Add New Block


Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Edit Block
Click

Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Display Settings
Layout Settings

Attributes:
Header And Footer
HEADER
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Events
onInit - This event is executed an unique time, before execute the application SQL Select Statement. In
this scope, normally are executed macros that modify the SELECT command. For example:
sc_select_field, sc_select_order, sc_select_where(add) and etc.
onRefresh - Occurs when the application is loaded.
onValidate - Is executed before submit the form..
onSave - Runs when the application is saved.
Fields
Overview
This session displays to edit just the fields that are in the search. (Fields selected in GRID->SEARCH>FIELDS.
Image1: Search Fields Interface.
New Field
It allows to add a new field in the application.
1- When click on a new button it is shown the image below, where we determine the amount of fields
that will be added.
Image1: Amount of fields Interface.
2- After we determine the amount of fields that will be added, it is necessary to define the settings of the
new field (data type, name and label).
Image2: Interface of the Properties of the new field.
Note: The description of the field type is modified as the selection of the filed type.
Text
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a text it accepts letters,
numbers and characters.
Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the
database as nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is,
the label is a field nickname in the application layer.
Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when enabled, allows you to use the title of the
field that is set in the grid, in this case the option filter label can not be used.
Maximum Size - Maximum Field Size.
SQL Type - Field type in the database.
Field's Behavior
Image1: Field's Behavior Interface.
Attributes:
Case Settings - Converts the field letters.
Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in
the field.
Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just
functions if the filter will have at least one option.
AJAX PROCESSING
Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field
onChange event occours.
For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a
cities list field by changing the state selected.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Integer
Data type - Define the application field type.

Field's Behavior
>Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.
Attributes:
the field.
VALUES FORMAT
Regional Settings - Define if the Regional Settings will be used (default values).
Separator - Group Separator.
Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Currency

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
VALUES FORMAT
Precision - Precision of the decimal field.

Decimal Separator - Decimal separator of the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Decimal

Width - Allow to determine the field width.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
VALUES FORMAT

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).

Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date

Use same Label used on the Grid -This option when enabled, allows you to use the title of the
VALUES FORMAT
Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration.
Attributes:
Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field.
Display - Selects the display format of the field.
Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database.
Use Combobox - Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox.
Display Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.
Display Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the
selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS Special conditions available to Date fields allows the end user select
common time periods to search.
Note: Use the function Turn On/Off to add or remove a condition.
All period - Search entire period.

Today - Search today.
Yesterday - Search yesterday.
Last 7 days - Search last 7 days. Ex: ((21/12/2007 27/12/2007).
Last week(sun-sat) - Search last week. (Sun-Saturday).
Last week business days (mon-fri) - Search last week business days.(Mon-Fri).
This month -Search from beginning current month until current day.
Last month - Search last month.
Note: Special condition filter form interface .
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Time

Search Label - Sets the field label in the application.
Use same Label used on the Grid - Use the field label s configured in the grid .
Maximum Size - Maximum field size
VALUES FORMAT
Image2: Interface of Filter Configuration.
Attributes:
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date And Time

Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the
database as nm_date_hour, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That
is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer.
Use Gird Label - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the
grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used.
SQL Type
VALUES FORMAT
Image2: Interface of Filter Configuration.
Attributes:
Internal Format - Format that will be recorded in the database.
Use ComboBox - Use a combox to select the field info
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Select
Allows to use in the form field an object type select (combobox).
General Settings
Image1: General Settings
Interface.
Attributes:
Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is
configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used.
Maximum Size - Maximum field size .
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields. Note on the screen bellow the State
field, before and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of
KEYS / VALUES. These lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table
(Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (lookup manual)
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method
There are available two options: Automatic, based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or
Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values.
Image1: Lookup method selection.
Edition Lookup - Automatic

Populates the select object dynamically, based on a SQL statement, note the SQL statement on the
picture bellow, it is required to retrieve a key (insert / update) and a value to display on the object field
on the SQL command.
Image1: Automatic lookup settings.
Attributes :
SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The
developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always
two fields.
NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row.
It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it.
Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, only applicable when
using the multiple values option, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ).
Height - Select object rows quantity.
Multiples Values - By selection yes, it is possible to select many items on the fields list. the list of
values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1;KEY2;KEY3 using an
specified delimiter like ; or - defined in Delimiter
Single value
Multiple Values
Use Title - Allows to display a title line on the select object. this option works combined with Title
and Title internal value.
Title - The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.
Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is
selected.
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs
on the select field, it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter.
Display original and lookup value- Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL
statement.
lookup value
original & lookup values
Separated by- Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of
values. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.
Use specific connection- Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current
project.
Create Link - Allows to create a link to a list update form. In the picture bellow, the select object is
automatically reloaded after the popup form update.
Use specific connection - Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on
current project.
Checkbox Use the drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes.
Edition Lookup - ManuaL

Enables a select object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow.
Image1: Manual edition lookup.
Attributes:
Lookup type- Selects the lookup type: Single Value , Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values
(position) and Multiple values (binary).
Single Value
Creates a simple select object, allows only one item selection.
Image2: Single value
lookup settings.
Label- Text displayed value.

Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.
Default - Selected value by default.
Height- The quantity of rows displayed in this select object.
Multiple values (delimiter)
Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. For
example the selection: Sports, Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as
a string like S;M;T. Note the default delimiter ( ; ) semicolon.
Image3: Multiple values lookup (delimiter

Delimiter - The character used to separated the items on generated string, only
applicable when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is
semicolon ( ; ).
Height - Object number of lines.
Saves on a string type field a list of values, for example it is possible to save answers
to the topics: Gender , Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. See in the
table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string.
Label
Male
Female
Single
Value
M
F
S
Start
1
1
2
Size
1
1
1
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
M
SP
MO
BO
TR
2
3
3
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male, Married and Books, the table's
value saved a string is MMBO
Image4: Multiple Values lookup settings (position).

Negative - Value saved on the string when no value is selected.
Start- Saved string initial position. (The string position counting start with 1)
Size- Bytes quantity into the saved string.
Height- Object number of lines.
Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field

See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a
integer number generated automatically.
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values
before saving.
Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on
table field is 3.
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3
Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the
saved value on table field is 13.
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
1(Sports) + 4 (Traveling) + 8 (Books) = 13
Image5: Multiple Values settings(Binary)
Label - Item displayed text .

Insert Button - Inserts the item into the list of values

Update Button - Update all the item properties.
Remove Button - Removes the item from the list.
Clear Button - Clear the item edit form.
Save Button - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed
on the Load lookup definitions field.
Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list.
Use Title - Allows to display a title line on the select object. This option works combined with Title
selected.
statement.
lookup value
Checkbox using drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).

Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Double Select
Component that displays two lists of values. In the first list are the values available for selection and the
second are the values actually selected.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection
through of two selection windows and a navigator betwen them (<< < > >>).
Search Label- Allow to define the field title in the search.
Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup enables a list of values display on forms fields.
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Figure1: Edition lookup Interface
Attributes :
two fields.
Height - Select object rows quantity
Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, the default delimiter is
semicolon ( ; ).
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload upon selected field update.
Display original and lookup value- Displays the field value and the lookup return value.
Lookup Value
Original Value and lookup
Separated by- Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only
applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.
project.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Checkbox
Allows you to use in the form field an object of type checkbox.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Checkbox is an object which allows the selction of one or more information through a
marking object.
Search Label - Allow to define the field title in the search.
Maximum Size - Maximum field size.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. See the image below.
It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from
custom arrays (Manual lookup)
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Populates the checkbox object dynamically, based on a SQL statement. Note the SQL statement on the
picture bellow, it is required to retrieve a key ( insert / update) and a value to display on the object as
fields on the SQL command.
Attributes:
SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application, The
two fields.
Columns - checkbox number of columns.
semicolon ( ; ).
NOTE: The automatic lookup option requires the form field to be string type because multiple selection saves a single string on database table field like
AK;ID>;UT when using the semicolon delimiter.
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on
the checkbox field, it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as
parameter.
Option check all - Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items.
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the value retrieved by the lookup.
Otherwise, the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the
character defined in Separated by.
Lookup Value
Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return
value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
Choose connection - Run the select statement in a different connection available in the project.
Edition Lookup - Manual

Allows the developer to manually crete a list of values saved in the application when there is no table
available with the information needed. See picture bellow.
Image1: Edition Lookup Manual Interface.
Attributes :
Single Value
Selects only on value on the list.
Image2: Edition lookup - Single Value settings.
Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object..

For example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43.
Columns - Checkbox columns quantity.
Multiple values (Delimiter)
Image3: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (delimiter) settings.
Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object.

Delimiter- The character used to separated the items on generated string, only
semicolon ( ; ).
Saves multiple values on a single string. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode
is required to enter the label, start position in the saved string and size in bytes each
item. For example, to save Gender (1byte), Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby
(2bytes) in a single use the table bellow (with the positions used by each item).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Married
Value
M
F
S
M
Start
1
1
2
2
Size
1
1
1
1
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
SP
MO
BO
TR
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
Image4: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (position) settings

Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field at
the specified position.
Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field

AttributedValueLookup
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13
Image5: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (binary) settings

Insert - Insert Label and Value in the values list.

Clear - Clear the item edit form.
Save - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed on the
Load lookup definitions field.
parameter.
Lookup Value
value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Radio
Allows you to use in the form field an object of type radio.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Radio is an object which allows the selection fof just an information of all that are
shown by it.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Display a radio object list to use in the form (see manual lookup and automatic lookup ) .
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method
Image1: Lookup type selection

Lookup used to display values in a Radio field. The values are retrieved with a Select Statement from a
database table.
Image2: Automatic Edition lookup Interface
Attributes :
SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application, the
two fields.
Columns - radio number of columns.
Single column Radio
double columns Radio
Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a
value filled manually (Title Internal value ).
Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object
title is selected.
Lookup Value
project.

Enables a radio object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow. Use
Manual lookup when the database does not have a table with required information.
Image1: Manual Edition lookup Interface.
Attributes :
Label - Text displayed in the radio object.
Value - Value store in the table. For example, the value M is added upon selecting Male.
Default - Define a selection default value.
Columns - Define number of columns used to display the radio items.
Save - Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ).
selected.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Grid Fields
Image1: Field General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - It defines the field data type on the search.
Search Label - The field label used on the search.
Use same Label used on the Grid - Allows to use the same field label used on the grid.
Height - Define the field height
SQL Type- SQL Field Type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS

Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Sorting
Attributes:
Data Type - "Sorting Fields" is a new feature that enables to be selected the order fields (ORDER
BY clause) that are part of the body of the Grid.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Text Auto-complete
This data type is one of the great news of the ScriptCase5, using the technology Ajax, it provides the
fulfillment of a field with more agility.
Attributes:
Data Type - This type when selected, allow to fill a field with more agility.
Search Label- Allow to define the field title in the search.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface.
Attributes:
SQL Select Statement - Enter a select comand use to capture the text.
Rows - Define the number of records displayed on each search.
Width - Define the capture box width (Capture Text).
Search options - Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals, Any part, End equals). Permite
determinar o modo de busca do texto(Incio igual,Qualquer parte e Final igual).
Capture Text - When this option is not selected, in the application is displayed only a field to data
entry. See an example in the link below.
Display original and lookup value - With this option disabled (=No) displays, for example, only the
name of the State in the Capture.
Display label with the description - Allows you to display the label with the description.
Choose connection - Select a different connection.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Number Auto-complete
Attributes:
database as nm_number,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. That
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Save Criteria
This resource allows to organize search profiles, it creates the option Save Criteria in the Search
application, so it is possible to save a search form with criteria to be used afterwards. Rules can be
added and with this feature is possible to save search forms criteria by user login.
Image1: Save Criteria Interface
Image2: New/Edit Rules Interface
Application
Settings
In this configuration the are the common attributes to the created applications through the ScriptCase,
following we will describe this attributes.
Image1: Interface of Application Configuration.
Attributes:
Application code - Application code determined in the moment of the application creation, this
code can be renamed through the main menu.
Description - This field can be used to describe of the application objectives.
Documents Path - The absolute path where the application documents are stored.
Image Directory - The base directory where the application images are stored.
Application Images - To Use in business rules implemention, without using macro sc_image.
Language - Language of the generated application, all the hints and messages will be put inside
the chosen language.
Share location variable - Shares location with other applications based on the session values.
Use old PDF exporter - Option to use the old pdf exporter (in java) or the new exporter(webkit).
Charset - Defines a specific charset used in the application.
Share theme variable - Shares theme with other applications based on the session values.
Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the workspace.

Edit Project - Allow that other users of the group edit the application.
Timeout - Time of execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of the PHP.
HelpCase Link - Associate a this application to a page of project documentation.
Image 2: Interface of Error Settings.
Attributes:
Script Error - Allow to show the information of the script and the line where the error occurred.
SQL Error - Allow to show the SQL command which originated the error.
Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Command in the moment of
its using.
Ajax Error Output - It opens a window with the ajax output.
Navigation
Define the navigation attributes of an application.
Figure 1: Navigation interface.
Attributes:
Exit URL - Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication.
Close Window - When exiting the application, close the browser window.
Redirecting URL - URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available
inside the application for any reason is not avaliable, this global is most commonly used to filter the
form in the SQL menu.
Redirecting Variable - Variable name, which is used to store the URL of the current application.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
This menu shows the global variables being used within the application, the global variable is a external
parameter required to application execution. The application may contain global variables in the Where
Clause, in Lookups, or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name,
created by special fields, etc.
Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]). These variables should be passed to the
application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session, Post, Get)
Image 1: Global Variables Interface.
Example:
Select customerid, customername from customers
where customerid ='[v_customerid]'
In this case, the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration. Select the way it is
passed to the Control application.
Image 2: Variables Settings Interface.
Shows all global variables used in the application.

Attribute - Variable name in the application.
Value - Defines variables behavior, this content is subdivided in three blocks, they are:
Scope - Defines how the variable is received by the application, if has been defined that a
variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't
be accepted. Variable passing methods :
Session - In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by
other application before the search call which is being defined.
Get - Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line, that means,
being visible to the browser.
Post - Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form.
Settings - Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time.

Type (Input/Output) - Defines if the variable is an input or an output. At execution time in the
development environment, a form requesting the input variables used by the application is
displayed.
Description- Determines where the variable was defined.
Links
Grid Links
Links are used to navigate between project applications. From a grid it is possible to create links with
other grids, control applications, menus and forms. Using a link between a grid and a form update the
grid record. It is also possible to create links to import data from other applications in search forms.
See more:
How to link a grid with another.
How to edit grid records linked with form.
Application Link
Field Link
Capture Link
New Link
The image below is displayed by selecting the New Link option from ScriptCases application menu.
Application - Used to edit the grid records through a form. In the generated grid a link
record is displayed on each line .
to edit the
Field - Used to link it to any other type of application. In this link type a field is used as a link
between the grid and other applications.
Capture - Used to import data from other grid to a search field. In the search is displayed an icon
next to the field.
Application
Image1: Selecting link type.
Used to edit the grid records through a form. In the generated grid a link will appear on each line to
edit the record. Clicking in the link, the selected form is displayed according to selected format (in an
iframe, in the same window or in a new window).
Applications List
Image2: List of Applications.
Application: Select the form application called by the grid.
Parameters definition
Image3: Parameters Definition Interface.
On the image above is displayed, in the left side, the application form parameters (primary key, global
variables). Select on the right side, the value to pass to the parameter. The options are:
Field - Used to pass a grid field value as parameter.

Variable - Used to pass a global variable value, used by the grid as parameter.
Value - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter.
Empty - No value is passed as a parameter.
Link Properties
The image below display the attributes that define the link behavior. Enter the selected option to
customize the link properties.
Link Properties
Image4: Link Properties Interface.
Link Operation Mode - The options are:

Mode
Open in the same
window
Open in another
window
Open in Iframe
Description
Display the form in the same browser window, (in
another page, the form display substitute the grid).
Another window is open to display the form .
The form is displayed in an frame, in the same
page, below, above, right or left to the grid.
Display the New button on the grid - The button New is displayed on the grids toolbar to add
new records.
Shortcut Key to the New button - Define the shortcut key to the add New button.
Called application exit URL - Called form exit URL. Default address (back button) is the calling
grid.
Form Properties
Select the buttons to be displayed in form.
Enable Insert button - Enable the buttons New and Insert in form.
Enable Update button - Enable the Update button in form.
Enable Delete button - Enable the delete button in form.
Enable Navigation buttons - Enable the navigation buttons (First , Previous, Next, Last) in form.
Enable button to edit a grid record -
Iframeproperties - Displayed only when Link Operation Mode is Open in Iframe.
Display the called application header - Display form header.

Iframe position relative to the main application - The form is displayed together with the grid
application according to selected position. Options are: Bellow, Above, Right and Left.
Action after insert - See table below:
Attribute
Reload the grid
Move to the grid end
IframeHeight - Iframe Height in pixels
IframeWidth - Iframe Width in pixels.
Save Button - End the link wizard.
Action
Refresh current page
Navigate the grid to the last page
Field Link
Links - Field
Image1: Selecting link type.
Used to create a link from grid field to any existing project application. When you select link type field, a
drop down list is displayed with all fields available (displayed) in the grid for selection. (See Select Fields
).
Applications List
Image2: Link between application Interface.
The image below display all the project applications (menus, search, reports pdf, forms, grid, tabs and
control forms. Select the form application called by the grid.
On the image above is displayed,in the left side, the application form parameters (primary key, global
variables). Select on the right side, the value to pass to the parameter. The options are:
Field - Used to pass a grid field value as parameter.
Value - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter.
Empty - No value is passed as a parameter.
Link Properties
The image below display the attributes that define the link behavior. Enter the selected option to
customize the link properties.
Link Properties
Link Operation Mode - The options are:
Mode
Open in same
window
Open in another
window
Open in Iframe
Description
Display the form in the same browser window, (in
another page, the form display substitute the grid).
Another window is open to display the form .
The form is displayed in an frame, in the same
page, below, above, right or left to the grid.
Called application exit URL: Called form exit URL. Default address (back button) is the calling
grid.
Link hint - Message displayed when mouse is dragged over the linking field.
Label - Sets the link title in the application. Used when there is more then one link in the same field.
Form Property
These options are displayed only when the called application is a form. Allow to select the
buttons displayed in the form.
Enable Insert button- Enable the buttons New and Insert in form.
Enable Update button - Enable the Update button in form .
Enable Delete button- Enable the delete button in form.
Enable Navigation buttons- Enable the navigation buttons (First , Previous, Next, Last) in form.
Iframeproperties - Displayed only when Link Operation Mode is Open in Iframe
Iframe position relative to the main application - The form is displayed together with the grid
application according to selected position. Options are: Bellow, Above, Right and Left.
IframeHeight - Iframe Height in pixels
IframeWidth - Iframe Width in pixels.
Capture Link
Links - Capture
Image1: Capture Link
The capture link is used specifically in the grid search form. This type of link imports data from another
grid to the field search form. When capture link type is selected, a list with the fields search form is
displayed. Choose a field to receive data through the link.
Applications List
Image3:Applications List Interface
In the image above a list with project available grid applications is displayed. Select a grid application
according to the search form field that receives the data.
Fetch field value: - Select a called grid field. This field have the value received by the search form.
Enter the values to pass to the parameters - This options is displayed when the called grid have a
parameter to pass (for example Where clause with a global variable). The options are:
Empty- No value is passed as a parameter.
Editing Links
Links - Editing
Image1: Links Menu
In the Connections folder in the of application menu (Image1)are displayed the links existent in the
application and the item New Connection. When an existent link name is selected the image below is
displayed allowing it to be edit.
Actions
Properties
Link
Editing the link properties.

Edit a Link
Delete
Delete a link
Programming
Overview
ScriptCase has incorprated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources,
methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in applications, and by using
these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.
Attributes
Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. An attribute
can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application.
Image 1: Attribute Settings interface.
Attributes:
Attributes - Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. To modify it click
on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your
changes. To remove an attribute, click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. Click the
clean button to clean the attributes list.
Libraries
To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e.g. Public Libraries, Project Libraries
or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). All methods in the library are visible in all
application events and methods. To manage libraries, access them via the main menu: Configuration
==> Libraries.
Methods
Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer, to support the implementation of
business rules for an application. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus
improve development productivity. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods.
Figure 1: Method menu interface.
Creating a new method
Figure 2: Create a new Method.
1. Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. See the Figure below.
Figure 3: Adding a Method.
2 Methods may involve parameters being passed. To include a parameter variable in a method, click the
'Var' button:
Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon.
Add the number of variables:
Figure 5: Define Parameters interface
Defining a variable:
Figure 6: Add Parameters interface.
Name: Input a variable name.

Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. * 10270
Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called.
* References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the
original data stored in that variable.
To Edit a parameter variable in a method, click the
button:
Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface.
Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field.

Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field.
Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field.
Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field.
3 In order to run a method, it needs to be called within an event. See the example below:
Figure 8: Events.
In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded. See how
simple it is to call the method in the example below:
Using a method :
Figure 9: Event method interface
Thus we get the following result when running the application.
Form Applications
Overview
Forms Application
This application type updates information in the database using web forms. The update may be direct
(INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE) or using stored procedures.
A form can be displayed in several formats. It can edit a single record or multiple records in a single
page. See the different formats in the image below.
Single Record
Multiple Records
Editable Grid
Editable Grid (view)
The created form applications have many build-in features the table below list some examples according
to the features:
Feature
Description
Hidden Fields
Hide fields in forms display while update field.
Read-Only
Fields
Fields are displayed but update are not allowed.
Required Fields Fields with obligatory entry. Values must be

entered. primary keys are automatically defined
as required Fields.
Unique Key
Define unique keys with update validation.
Procedures
Use stored procedures for data manipulation.
Master / Detail
Update various related tables in a single page.
Update link
table
Handles N:N relations in a single form.
Dependencies
Define form table dependencies. Criticisms are

automatically generated according to the
definition.
Fields Format
According to the field type required validation

are generated as well as different formats area
available.
Events
Programming
Allow the developer to add business rules in

PHP code. The form events are triggered during
the processing in the server or by the browser
(AJAX).
Links creation
Link a form with other applications.
Form applications examples:
Form
Settings
In this module are congregated diverse configurations linked to the exhibition format of the form
application.
Image1: Interface Configuration.
Attributes:
Orientation - Orientation of the registers in the form, can be: unique register and multiple registers.
Single Record: Edit/Add a register per time.
Multiple Records: Multiple records can be edited at a time. See the image below each row
represents a record in the table.
Editable Grid: Some registers can be edited per time. See in the image below that each line
represents a register in the table.
Editable Grid View: A record can be edited only if open the edit box of a record. See the
image below each row represents a record in the table.
Line Breaks in Title - It allows to break the line of the Titles
Display Line Number (Editable Grid and Editable Grid View) - It allows to display the line
number
Pagination (not available to Single Record) - Define how to display the records in the screen. All
records in the screen or using pagination.
Lines per page (not available to Single Record) - Amount of lines of registers per page.
Lines for inclusion (Multiple Records)- Amount of registers shown for inclusion.
Horizontal Alignment - Allow to define the alignment of the application in the page.
Margins - Define the magins of the form(right, left, top, bottom) in pixels.
Table Width - This parameter define the table width of the application.
Table Width Unit - Measurement unit used to the table width defined in the previous item.
Percentage, pixel or automatic.
Table Columns - This parameter define the table columns width.
Use Modal (Editable Grid View) - Define if the update mode of the Editable Grid (view) will open in
a modal window.
Modal Width (Editable Grid View) - Define the modal window width, if the "use modal" option is
enabled.
Modal Height (Editable Grid View) - Define the modal window height, if the "use modal" option is
enabled.
Layout and Behavior
Automatic tab - Advance the focus to the next field after completing the maximum number of
characters allowed in the field.
Highlight Text upon focus - Highlight field contents when the field receives focus.
Use Enter to tab - Use the "Enter" key to tab from one field to the next field.
Field with initial focus - Field that receives focus when the application is loaded.
Focus on field with error - Focus on the first field with an error when submiting the form. If any
validation errors occur, the focus will advance to the first field with an error.
Edit Fields
The Edit Fields options was included to Scriptcase on the version six, this new menu option groups the
most commonly used field configuration for all fields at the same place.
Figure 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options:
1 - Fields - This column is used to show the field's name.
2 - Label - Column to edit the field's label displayed in the generated application.
3 - Data type - This allows the change of the field's type. Select the desired data type from the
dropdown box.
4 - Form option. Not available for Grid Applications
4.1 - New - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when entering a new
record (Addition mode).
4.2 - Update - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when editing a
record (Edition mode).
4.3 - Read-Only - Defines if the field will become a read-only field, this way it cannot be edited.
4.4 - Required - Defines if the field will become a required field.
4.5 - PK - Will set a field or fields as a primary key for the application. If only one field is
selected it will work as a regular primary key, if two or more fields were selected it will work as a
composite key.
4.6 - DB Value (Insert) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the
selected field when inserting a new record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP. This
option allows you to set a default value to the field.
4.7 - DB Value (Update) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the
selected field when updating a record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP.
5 - Page - Indicates that there is a Page in the application. An application may have multiple pages,
which are arranged as high-level tabs. Each page can contain one or more blocks.
6 - Block - Indicates that there is a Block in the application.
7 - Page: Fields not shown - This contains all fields that will not be displayed in the generated
application.
Note: Please note that each line is draggable. This allows you to define the position of fields, blocks and pages by dragging fields up or down to a different block
or page. Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages.
Display
Available just to Forms and Control applications. It is not available for Grid Applications.
Figure 2: Display Interface.
Options:
Markers Positioning - Indicates where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field.
Display message - Determine whether or not to display a message upon validation.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Unique Key
Its provide validation of unique key at web server side.
Toolbar
Image1: Interface of toolbar.
Attributes:
Navigation - Display the buttons that can be shown in the form anad used for navigation. The
selection of these buttons vary according to the form application.
Update - Display the buttons that can be shown in the form and used for data update. The
Button Settings
Image2: Button Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Hint - Define a hint for the button.
Access Key - Allows to define fast acess keys using the keyboard.
OPTIONS
Image3: Interface of Tool Options.
Attributes:
JS Formatting - Use automatic filed format .
Help by Block - Group help by block. Is possible to define a help text to each field and a icon is
displayed in the block title bar linked to the help page.
General Help - "Consolidates" all field help in a unique page linked to the help page.
Log
application.
Options:
Export
This screen allows to configure the PDF file generated by the form.
Attributes:
PDF Orientation - Define the printing orientation: Picture or Landscape.
PDF Format - Define the PDF form type (letter, A4, etc.).
Print type - Defining the printing mode: colorful or economic.
Open PDF directly - Opens the generated PDF file without displaying an intermediated link page.
Configurable PDF - Allows the user to configure the PDF parameters during the application.
Print Background - Allow the user to print the PDF with the background or not.
JS Execution Time - The max execution time to wait the JS proccess.
HTML Print
Configure the HTML format of the grid.
Image3: HTML Print Interface.
Attributes:
Print Type - Selecting the print mode (color): Both, Black and White and Colorful.
Print Background - Show Background printing HTML.
Sql
In this module are defined the attributes relative to the connection with the table in that the form was
created. We can define the primary key, filters, ordinances for the create form.
Image1: Interface of SQL Configuration.
Choosing the fields that are primary key - In this function it is shown an combobox object with an
asterisk beside, that indicates what are the fields that compose the primary key of the SQL table. In
the majority cases, the Scriptcase identifies it, for the cases that this don't happen, the user will must
do this identification, using the buttons beside to do the choose of the key. See how the buttons act:
On/Off Button - Give or remove the attribute from the primary key of the field. The defined field
as primary key presents an asterisk at the left side of its name.
All Button - Define all fields as primary key. These fields become to present an asterisk at the
left side of its name.
None - Remove all fields. Normally it is used to clean all definitions of the On/Off and restart the
process.
Ordinance Buttons - They are the arrows that stay at the right side of the combobox. Allow to
order the fields of the primary key, putting it in the desired ordinance. To order click on the field
and use the arrows to do the movement
Where Condition - Option to the user enter the WHERE clause to filter sql records.
Order By - Allows the user write an ORDER BY clause that will determine the order of the records.
By default the records are ordered by primary key.
Connection - Show the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution,
this connection can be traded for another that have the same tables (SQL).
Table Name - Table name that the form application is using.
Variable for Table - These filled fields allows that part of the table name defined in the select to be
traded before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
Note: In the first field you must fill it with the variable name. The second field must be filled with the part of the table name to be traded.
Case Sensitive - Set it to "No" only if the database is configured for case-sensitive and it is desired
that the filter does not respect this setting.
Sorting
Define the sorting of the fields. The application fields are sorted at running time, just by clicking on the
column name (field) to order it. By default breaks are respected in the fields sort. Also by default, the six
first fields already come checked (with an asterisk at the field left side).
Image1: Fields with Sort.
Note: Use the function on/off to include or remove a field.
Procedures
In this module we can configure a form application so that it use Stored Procedure (defined by the
database) in the operations of insertion, update, and exclusion. It isn't necessary to use the three options
at the same time, being thus the options that are not configured to use procedures will continue with the
Scriptcase standard that are the commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
See below pass-by-pass the implementation if a Stored Procedure for Insertion in the Database.
Image1: Interface of Stored Procedures for Form.
1- Let's mark the first option: I want to use Procedure to do INSERT. Afterwards, inform the procedure
name and the amount of parameters.
Image2: Defining procedure parameters.
2- Now we define the fields that will be reference to the parameters of the Stored Procedure, as like the
type of each parameter (input or output). Afterwards, we click on the button save to finalize this process.
Image3: Passing of values to the Stored Procedure.
Javascript
The concept of Edit Javascript is to associate to the form fields events in Javascript, that means, for
each field you can edit actions associated to its events.
Image1: Edit Javascript Interface
Attributes:
Choose the object - In this combobox are shown all fields that are part of the form application, as
the object form form.
Choose event- In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field, for whom we
will write the Javascript code. See the available events:
onclick - Occurs on the mouse click over the field See Example
onblur - Occurs when the objects lose focus. See example
onChange - Occurs always that the object lose focus and the value is modified. See example
onFocus - Occurs always that the object gains focus. See example
onMouseOver - Occurs always that the mouse pointer is over the field. See example
onMouseOut - Always that the mouse pointer goes out of the field. See example
Events linked to the form - The events below are directly linked to the form.
OnLoad - This event occurs when the page is loaded, that means, when you navigate from a
register to other. When click on the buttons (new, insert, previous, etc).
OnSubmit - This event occurs when click on the buttons insert, update and remove
Edit Javascript
Selecting the object and its event, then click on the button "Edit" opening a window to edit the
javascript action that will be executed when the selected event is actioned. In this screen we
can type customized javascript actions or we can use default Scriptcase events, for example:
nm_reload_form(); that do a reload on the form.
Image2: Interface of Javascript Edition.
Save the javascript command clicking on the button "update".

Note: Javascript language doesn't have the same behavior to each browser available in the market. If
it's necessary to type a complex rotine using Javascript, we recommend to make tests in different
browsers.
OnClick Example: When click on a field of the radio type can be turned on/off a series of form fields
according to the selected value.
if(document.F1.sex[0].checked){
document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = false;
document.F1.aux_maternity .style.background='FFFFFF'
}
document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = true;
document.F1.aux_maternity.style.background='FCEEBC'
}
Note: To access a field of the radio time it is necessary to use an index.
OnBlur Example:
We can define a criteria around the field weekly_hour_job when it loose focus.
if (document.F1.tp_folha[0].checked && document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value > '20')
{
alert("job hour above the allowed.");
document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value = "";
document.F1.weekly_hour_job.focus();
}
onChange examples:
When modify the Salary of an employee and go out of the field, will occur an onChange, in this
moment we use advantage to check if the position is gardener.
if (document.F1.salary.value > 5000.00 && document.F1.position.value == 'gardener'){
alert('when you grow i want to be a gardener');
}
After informing the value of the purchase and select the modality of the payment in an object of the
Select: type payment_way, the javascript code below calculates the value of the parcel.
if(document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == 'avista')
{
document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value;
}
if (document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60')
{
document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value / 2;
}
if (document.F1.payway [document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60/90')
{
}
onMouseOver Example:
We can trade the stile (background color, font color, etc.) when the mouse is over the field.
document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "0FFCCA"
onMouseOut example:
Set a background color when the mouse loose focus of the field.
document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF"
Dependencies
This resource allows to associate tables, it means tables that exist dependences, such as the tables:
orders and items. It is possible to remove a register from the Orders table and all its items. Lets see how
to do it.
1 - First we must define a new dependence. In this example we will create a dependency between
Orders (Dependent table) and the table Customer (Current application). Click on the button new
dependency.
2 - We must select the dependent table and inform the amount of fields related between the father and
child table. In this example only one field will be related that it is the customer id.
3 - Then we must select the key fields: customers -> CustomerID - orders ->CustomerID.
4 - Now we just need to define if it will just show an error message or it will make a cascade delete.
Security
Attribute:
accessed.
examples below.
userid.
}
}
else{
}

CAPTCHA
This is a feature used to increase the level of security in the form. It requires direct user interaction,
through the entry of a random sequence of characters, displayed on a dynamically generated image.
CAPTCHA means "Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart".
Read more:
Using CAPTCHA on a login form
Use CAPTCHA - Enable CAPTCHA in the application.

Quantity - Number of characters displayed in the automatically generated image.
List - Characters to be used in the generated image.
Label - Message containing instructions on how to use the CAPTCHA feature.
Error message - Error message displayed when the user input does not match the generated
image.
Height - Height of the generated image in pixels.
Width - Width of the generated image in pixels.
Font Size - Captcha font size
Reload - Option for the user to request a new code.
Select one layout - This option allows the developer to set how the CAPTCHA should be displayed
in the application.
Fields
Overview
This interface allow to inform the validation rules abd formatting of the content of each form field . The
configuration of the form fields is done clicking on the field to be formated, in the existing list, in the left
side of the Form folder.
Image1: List of fields.
Done this, the system opens a screen at the right side of this list, where must verify if in the field Data
type the value attributed by ScriptCase through the SQL table analysis is according to the existing
content. In case that it isn't, the user will must select in the list (combobox) an adjusted type to the
content of its field. For each Data type selected will be formated a window with diferent characteristics.
Example: A field of type Text have diferent characteristics of a field of date type. Being thus, the
formatting of the screen will be according to the chosen type.
Afterwards, after the choose of the data type, just complete the others fields of this window and click on
the button Save, Compile or Run.
Text
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it accept letters,
numbers, characters.
Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is
displayed as Client Name.
Watermark - Creates a watermark in the input object.
Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new"
button.
Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive
parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to
use a session variable created on a login screen.
System Date - Uses the server date.
Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.
Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.

Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field.
Password field - Transforms the input type field to password.
Text field
Password field
Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For
example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the
applications.
Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).
Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be
merged:
9
Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9)
A
Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z)
*
Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by

the user.
Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously, separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it. The replacement occurs during
data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size.
Examples:
Field
Telephone
number
Software Key
(Only letters)
Software Key
(Letters and
Numbers)
Car Plate
Scriptcase's
serial key
Multiple Masks
(Telephone)
Mask
+99 99 9999 9999
AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA
****-****-****-****
Value entered
123456789012
Value formatted
+12 34 5678 9012
QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK
Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8
AAA - 9999
QWE1234
QWE - 1234
A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111****
DG2P
9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Validate with Mask - Shows an error if the end-user don't enter a complete mask.
Complete to the Left - Defines the character used to complete the field selected. Field is filed from
left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database.
Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically
read from your DB Schema information.
Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.
Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Without field label

attribute
Using field label attribute
HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form.
Values Format
Image1: Values Format Interface.
Attributes:
Uppercase
Converts all text to capital letters.
Lowercase
Converts all text to lower case.
Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the
word
first letter of the first word to capital letter).
Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first
words
letter of every to capital letter).
Minimum Size - Defined the minimum size accepted.

Max length- Defined the maximum size accepted.
Allowed Characters - Select and define the character set accepted:
All - Accepts all characters.
Selected - Define the character set accepted. Using the settings below the field accepts
letter, numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute). The letters a b c (defined in the
Less attribute) are not accepted.
DATABASE VALUE
It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the
field to the final user.
Image1: Database value interface.
Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful
to passing parameters.
Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar,
if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is
displayed
Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by
calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.
Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.
User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.
Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the
process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger.
Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null).
GRID LOOKUP
A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX
technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).
See an example in the image below.
Image1: Grid Lookup.
Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.
Attributes:
Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup.
SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is
possible to use the select wizard
. For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id
code use the following SQL statement :
SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}'
Font - Font type used to display the lookup.

Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.
Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup.
EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved.
To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup.
Choose connection - Run SQL statement in different connection.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Multiple Lines Text
General Settings
Image1: General SettingsInterface.
Attributes:
button.

Lines - Allows to configure the field height defining the lines quantity.
applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
Uppercase
Lowercase
word
words

DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Integer
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accept only
integer numbers.
button.

applications.
merged:
9
A
*

the user.
Examples:
Field
Telephone
number
Software Key
(Only letters)
Software Key
(Letters and
Numbers)
Car Plate
Scriptcase's
serial key
Multiple Masks
(Telephone)
Mask
+99 99 9999 9999
AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA
****-****-****-****
Value entered
123456789012
Value formatted
+12 34 5678 9012
AAA - 9999
QWE1234
QWE - 1234
A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111****
DG2P
9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Figure2: Values Format Interface
attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. (See
regional settings).
Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator.
Maximum Size - Define the maximum size of the field.
Minimum Value - Define the field minimum value.
Maximum Value - Define the field maximum value.
Decimal Precision - Define the field decimal precision.
Decimal Separator - Define the character used as the decimal separator.
Negative Sign - Define the character used as negative sign.
Negative number format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value).
Accept - The field can accepts only positive values, only negative values or positive and negative
values.
Show a calculator- Displays a calculator.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Decimal
General Settings
Interface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as decimal, it accepts real
numbers.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator.*
Number negative format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value).
Accept Negative - The field accepts negative value.
Show a calculator - Displays a calculator.

Complete with zeros - If enabled, it fills decimal digits automatically, otherwise the end-user should
always enter the decimals digits.*
* "Format as you type" must be enabled in "Form>>Settings" menu to use this option.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Currency
General Settings
Image1:General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as value, it accept letters,
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Currency Symbol Usage - Define if the field will show the currency symbol.*

DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type -Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date
rules.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Image1:Interface of Values Format.
Attributes:
Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings date format to the field. (See regional
settings).
Display - Allows you to select the display format of the field.
Use ComboBox - Allows you to select the date and month by combobox.
Year as Combo - Allows you to select the year by combobox.
"Initial Year" - Define the minimum year selectable.
"Actual Year +" - Define the maximum year selectable.
Minimum date:
Fixed Date - Insert a minimum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type
in the format as it is presented.
Actual Date - When click on the icon beside of the box, the scriptcase have the following
options:
Simple Actual Date - Will define the actual date as the maximum date, that means, it
won't accept anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date.
Actual Date with increment - The minimum date will be the actual date (+) the days or
month or years that you increment.
Actual Date with decrement - The minimum date will be the actual date (-) the days or
month or years that you decrement.
Maximum Date:
Fixed Date - Insert a maximum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type
options:
Actual Date with increment - The maximum date will be the actual date (+) the days or
Actual Date with decrement - The maximum date will be the actual date (-) the days or
Display Format - Allows you to display next to the field how to complete the date field.
Display Calendar -Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this allow the selection of the
month and year passing to the field the value that was defined in the calendar.
Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Time
General Settings
Image1:
Attributes:
Data type- Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific time
rules.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Figure2:Values Format Interface
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. (See Regional
settings).
Time Separator - Define the time separator used in the field.
Display - Determine the field display format from a list of predefined formats.
Display Format - Displays the field format beside the field hour.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date And Time
General Settings
Attributes:
specific date rules.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Image1:Values Format Interface.
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. When not selected (
NO) the options Date separator and Time separator are displayed. (See Regional settings).
Date separator - Date separator symbol used.
Time separator - Time separator symbol used.
Display - Select the field format from a list of predefined date/time display formats.
Display Format - Display field the format at the fields side.
Group Date and Time - Display the Date and Time in the same input field.
Display calendar - Display a calendar a calendar to select the date.
Decimal of Seconds -Defines how many decimal of seconds the field will use.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Image (database)
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Defines the field type. Fields type Image (Field Name) uses server stored images in
the. Note that the images are stored in the database as text.
Image Border - Image border width in pixels.
Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels.
Progress bar - Display or not a progress bar when uploading files.
Upload Area - Define if a drag'n drop area is used to upload files.
Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels.
Maintain Aspect - Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Its used in conjunction with
Image Height and Image Width.
Open in Another Window - Displays the original image in another browser window.
Display link only - Displays only a link in the field with the image name. The link will open in a
(pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection).
Extensions to allow - Define which extensions are allowed to upload. Separate several extensions
using semicolon.
Multi-Upload
It allows to upload multiple files and store the information in a relative database table.
Multi Upload Settings
Attributes:
Table - Choose the database table to store the files.
After choose the table, it will display all fields from that table and we should associate parameters to fill
the fields upon inserting or updating.
Multi Upload Fields Settings
The options are:

File name - Gets the file name that is being uploaded.
Upload - Gets the bynary of the file.
Auto increment - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your DBMS
uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed .
Manual increment - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the
field's value automatically before inserting a record.
Foreign Key - Allows to associate a field value from the current form.
Defined - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to
passing parameters..
Date of inclusion - Get the data from the server upon inserting.
Datetime of inclusion - Get the data and time from the server upon inserting.
User IP - The field will be filled with the IP of the computer that is accessing the application.
Calculated by the database - The field value is assigned by the database.
Calculated by the database if empty - The field value is assigned by the database if no value is
passed to it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Image(file Name)
IMAGE (FILE NAME)

Allows the developer to use fields in the forms to upload images. The images are save in the server in a
directory defined using the Application Settings menu in the attribute Image Directory (see Settings).
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image(file name) type, it
stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The images are stored
separately in the server and automatically displayed when the file name is referenced.
SubFolder - Defines a sub folder to organize the files stored.
Create Subfolder - Creates the subfolder if it does not exist.

Image Caching - Time in minutes the image cache will be kept for on the server before being
deleted. Resize function generates temporary image copies that are kept in the cache.
using semicolon.
Example of field of the image type in a cadastre of products.
Multi-Upload
Attributes:
The options are:

passed to it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Document (database)
DOCUMENT(Database)
General Settings

Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Document, it accept the
opening of the file directly, creating a link for each existent document in the database.
Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type.
File Name - Field that contains the document file name.
File Size - Defines the field that contains the file size.
using semicolon.
Multi-Upload
Attributes:
The options are:

passed to it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Document (file name ) type,
it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The documents are
stored separately in the server.
Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files in (it is added under the directory defined in
the Documents Path attribute in the Application Settings menu. See Settings). It is possible to use
global or local variables in the subdirectory name.
using semicolon.
Multi-Upload
Attributes:
The options are:

passed to it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Credit Card Number

The ScriptCase provides credit card numbers validation routines in its applications. Currently
ScriptCase applications supports validation routines to handle AMERICAN EXPRESS, VISA,
MASTERCARD and DINER cards.
General Settings
Figure1: General Settings Interface

Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is
formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules.
button.

applications.
merged:
9
A
*

the user.
Examples:
Field
Telephone
number
Software Key
(Only letters)
Software Key
(Letters and
Numbers)
Car Plate
Scriptcase's
serial key
Multiple Masks
(Telephone)
Mask
+99 99 9999 9999
AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA
****-****-****-****
Value entered
123456789012
Value formatted
+12 34 5678 9012
AAA - 9999
QWE1234
QWE - 1234
A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111****
DG2P
9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Without field label

attribute
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Credit Card
Define the Credit Card Company (flag). It relates to a Credit Card Field and used by the validation
routines to validate according to the specific company rules.
General Settings
Attributes:
applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Formats
The picture below show how to related the Credit Card Number field with the Credit Card field.
Figure2:
Values Format Interface
Attributes:
Card Type - Display a selection box with available card companies (flag).
Use Title/Deny - Allows the user to enter an different option from the options available in the
ScriptCase (American Express, Diners, Master Card and Visa). The label and value for these
options are defined in Negative Value and Title.
Negative value - New option value.
Title - New option label.
Related Field - Define the field that contains the values to validate.
Reload Form - Reload the form After after field value update.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
E-mail
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed
by its side, clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader. It validates the field value according to
standard e-mail formats.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Display Icon - Display an email icon by the field side

DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Url
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface .
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it is shown a link of
access.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Display Icon - Display an icon by the field side

DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Html Color
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Color is shown
beside of the field an icon with a pallet of colors.
button.


applications.
Without field label

attribute
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Select
Use select object (combobox) in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The data type Select is a drop-down object which allow the selection of information
through a sliding window.
button.
applications.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

on the SQL command.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single value
Multiple Values
selected.
statement.
lookup value
project.
current project.

Attributes:
Single Value
lookup settings.


semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Married
Sports
Value
M
F
S
M
SP
Start
1
1
2
2
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
Movies
Books
Traveling
MO
BO
TR
3
3
3
2
2
2


Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Implicit
Value
Item Description
1
2
4
8
16
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music


selected.
statement.
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Double Select
Resource to display two values: A list with values to select and a list with selected values.
General Configuration
Image1: Interface of General Configuration.
Attributes:
Data type - The data type double select is a drop-down object which allow the multiple selection
through two window of selection and a navigator between them( << < > >> ).
button.
applications.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Attributes :
two fields.
semicolon ( ; ).
Lookup Value
project.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Checkbox
Use checkbox object in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The type checkbox is an object that allows the selection of one or more information
through a box of marking objects.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Attributes:
two fields.

semicolon ( ; ).
parameter.
Lookup Value

Attributes :
Single Value


semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Value
Start
Size
Male
Female
Single
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
M
F
S
M
SP
MO
BO
TR
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2


Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music


parameter.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Radio
Use radio object in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The type radio is an object that allows the selection of only one information of all shown
by it.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method

database table.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single column Radio
title is selected.
Lookup Value
project.

Attributes :
selected.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Text Auto-complete
This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a
filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object
where each item has a value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value of must
be alpha-numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.
Figure1:General SettingsInterface
Data Type - Defines the data type as text auto-complete.

button.

Text field
Password field
applications.
Without field label

attribute
Validate on submit - Validate fields only when submit.

Values Format
Attributes:
Uppercase
Lowercase
word

words

DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
where each item has a value and label associated. For the number Auto-Complete each item value of
must be numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.

Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Number Auto-Complete
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute

VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Maximum Size - Allow to determine the maximum size of the field.
Minimum Value - Allow to determine the minimum value of the field
Maximum Value - Allow to determine the maximum value of the field
Grouping - Allow to define the decimal separator.
Accepts Negative - Allow the field to accept negative value.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Html Image
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the fields is of the type html image, it allows to
insert in the field an image.
Imagem - Sets the image to be displayed. The icon "Choose image"; list ScriptCase standard
images for selection. The icon "Upload an image" allows the developer to send the server an image
located on another machine.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Label
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is of the type label, it is shown as just
an output.
Text - Text box to enter a text displayed by the field side.
Reload - Reload the form when clicking in the link created with the text entered in the Text
attribute.
Position - Position the field on the selected block, when reloading the form.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Html Editor
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the field data type. HTML editor type fields accept letters, numbers and special
characters.
Height - Define the editor box height in pixels.
Toolbar
Attributes:
Properties :
Position - Toolbar position in the HTML Editor.
Alignment - Button alignment in the toolbar.
Status - Hides or displays the status bar. Choose the position in which to display the toolbar:
Top or Bottom.
Amount (Toolbar lines) - Number of Toolbar lines in the HTML Editor.
Button layout - Define the toolbar display settings.
Preview - Preview the toolbar display settings defined.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Theme
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Application field type
Reload - Reloads form after updates.
Localization
General Settings
Attributes:
Youtube
General settings
Attributes
Display Mode - The way the video is displayed, modal or new window.
Width - Videos width in pixels.
Height - Videos height in pixels.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Google Maps
This feature allows you to display maps using the Google API.
Data Type: - Select Google maps as the data type.

Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table and
is displayed as Client Name.
Home - Define the method for passing parameters to the Google API.
Display Mode - Defines how the map will be opened. It can either be opened in Modal window or in
a New window.
Width - Defines the width of the map.
Height - Defines the height of the map.
Zoom - Defines the initial zoom factor (available on the Google API) for the map.
API Key- You need to enter your Authorization Key to view maps using Google API.
Note: The API Key is a unique key composed of an alphanumeric string (text), which is
nothing more than the license to use this service. When you register to use the service, the
key is tied to a domain and a directory on the server. All pages (ScriptCase applications)
that are using the API must be located in the directory that was specified when registering
for the Google Maps API.
If you have a web server on your machine, you can just get a key for local testing, and
that's specified as http://localhost in the field during registration.
To get your API Key just visit the following site:
http://code.google.com/intl/en/apis/maps/signup.html
Link Type - Define the link type. This can be a text link or a button link.
Text Link - Specify the text for the link to the map.
SQL Type - Displays the SQL (database) field type.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes:
Barcode
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Log
application.
Options:
Layout
Overview
In this module we can see how to customize layout of applications and its settings. Allowing us to add
Themes(colors) to the application, organize the application fields in different blocks and pages or define
heading and footer values.
Pages
Blocks
Colors Schema
Header & Footer
Pages
Using the definition of blocks, a page is a container of blocks. Where in each application it is created a
page which has default name pag1 . In applications of form, control and filter it is possible to create
more pages to an application. The pages are show in the application in tabs mode, where each tab has
the blocks defined in Organization of Blocks.
Image1: Interface of Configuration of the pages (available only to applications of form, control an filter).
See below an example of a form application using two pages: General Data and Documents (see
Image2).
Image2: Form application using resources of pages.
The form application already bring a standard page, identified by pag1, that can be renamed, with the
creation of new pages. The use of pages is very indicated when we have an application that involves a
lot of fields of a table (more than 20 for example). A form with more than 20 fields in the vertical would be
difficult to use.
An application can have a lot of pages, and in each of them, you can include a lot of blocks.
Image3: Interface of Configuration of the Pages.
To include a new page, just fill the two text above of the buttons Insert, in the first field fill the
page name and in the second field select the image that will be presented as folder icon, and
afterwards click on the button INSERT.
To delete a page, just click on the delete button presented on the line of the correspondent page.
NOTE: The definition of the pages is only considered by the form in the orientation Unique Register
Configurations relative to the folder tab.
Attributes:
Font Name - Allow to define what font and characters are going to be shown in the field. Click
on the icon that is at the right side of the field it is opened a window to font selection. Just select
the font in the existing list, that it is transferred to the field below of the list and click on the
button Confirm. The window is closed and the option is transferred to the field in the main
window.
Font Size - Inform the font size desired.
Color of the selected font - Field to the color definition to the text that will have the selected
tab. Clicking on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a
color palette. Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent
code to the selected code will be automatically transferred to the field.
Color of the selected background - Allow to define the background color that will have the
selected tab. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having
a color palette. Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the
correspondent code to the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Color of the non selected font - Allow to define the font color that will have the non selected
tab. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a color
palette. Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent code
to the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Color of the non selected background - Allow to define the background color that will have
the non selected tab. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a
window having a color palette. Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and
the correspondent code to the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Blocks

below.
Attributes:


Add New Block


Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Edit Block
Click

Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Layout Settings

Attributes:
Header & Footer
HEADER
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Events
Events
onApplicationInit - This event runs when the application is loading just for the first time.
onNavigate - This event runs when navigating from one record to another one.
onScriptInit - This event runs when the application is loading.
onRefresh - This event runs to reload the page of the application.
onValidate - This event runs by clicking on the validation (OK, Update, Insert, Delete, Filter)
depending on application.
onValidateFailure - This event runs if the validation is failured. With errors.
onValidateSuccess - This event runs if the validation is successfully. Without errors.
onBeforeInsert - This event runs before insert a record.
onAfterInsert - This event runs after insert a record.
onBeforeUpdate - This event runs before updating a record.
onAfterUpdate - This event runs after updating a record.
onBeforeDelete - This event is executed before the deletion.
onAfterDelete - This event runs after the deletion.
onLoad - This event occurs when the page is loaded, ie when navigating from one record to
another one, clicking on the buttons (new, insert, etc. earlier.).
Ajax Events

Example:
optional.
2 -Enter

Quick Search
Quick Search is an option that allow us to make searches in multiple fields through a text input field in
the toolbar.
In the Quicksearch settings we have the following options:
Button within the search - Option to inform if the search button is inside of the text box (input
object).
Quicksearch show combobox - Show combobox if there is only one quicksearch option.
Quicksearch Watermark - Watermark showed in quicksearch
Quicksearch width - Quicksearch width in pixels.
Then we must select which fields can be searched.
And we can select several search criterias.
Note: You must add the quicksearch button on the "Toolbar" Settings to use it.
Buttons
Buttons
New Button
Types button: (Javascript, PHP, Linking).
Image2: New button function.
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Javascript Button

Button Display Mode

Target - Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other
Window).
Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode.
Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
Window).
Target - Destination window where the code will be executed. (Same Window / Other Window).
Code
Image2: JavaScript
Interface.
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Php Button

Button Display Mode

Window).
Window).
Code
Image2: Php
Interface.
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Link Button

Button Display Mode

Window).
Window).
there is an option to create new links configure the new Link button , and follow the steps below to
create the link required to complete the operation.
Creating a new Link

Image2:Create new Linking.
Image3: Link Type
Interface.
4 - Define the parameters passed. It can be of three types: Field, Value or Empty.
Image5: Parameters Definition
Interface - Field.

Image8: Link/Form Properties
Interface.
Link Operation Mode - How will be presented the link.
Open in the same window - Show the form in the same browser window, exiting the search
Open in other window - Open another window to show the form.
Open in a Iframe - Show the form in the same in the same window that the search, below of
search an Iframe is created to display the form.
Output URL of the called application - web address accessed when the user exit the grid.
Hint of the Link - Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.
Form Properties - Select the buttons that will be shown.
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Master/detail Form
Overview
MASTER/DETAIL FORM
Allow to create update forms to update tables 1:N in a single window.
Image1: Master / Details orders and orders Items Form.
See more:
How to create a Master Detail
New Detail
In the application menu , clicking in the item New Detail from the folder Master/Detail Form create a
new detail link.
Image1: Creating a new Master/Detail.
Defining name and label
Enter detail link name and label.
Application List
The Wizard lists the project applications available to link. Select the called application from the list by
checking the box.
Note: The detail form required type is Grid,

Editable grid or Editable grid view. Only these types are listed by the Wizard.
Parameters settings
In the column Field (image left side) all master form fields are displayed. In the column Key (image
right side) is displayed the detail form fields. Usually the detail form foreign key are associated to the
primary key to the master form.
Editing Form Detail
Link Property
Its possible to change the Link properties by clicking in the created link.
Attributes:
Form properties - Select the buttons displayed (operations performed) in the detail form.
Iframe properties - Configurein pixels the iframe height and width where to display the detail form.
Other Properties:
Editable Grid - Select if the detail form is editable.
Paging - Select paging mode:
PartialPaging according to number of
records configured.
Total Display all records.
Lines per page - configure the lines number (records displayed) for Partial paging.
When deleting - Choose dependency treatment mode:
Criticize if child
row exists
Also delete child
row
Display error message for form

dependencies with the detail record.
Exclude all dependent records in detail
form.
Edit Link - This button update the detail application link.
Many-to-many Relationships
Configure M:N relationship tables.
See more :
Update related table
Updating Many-to-Many Relationship via CheckBox List
Image1: Generated application with associated tables
Identification
This link is treated as a field in the Form application. Define Field name, Data type, Label and specific
Connection for this link. For specific connection is displayed a select with the project available
connections.
Image2: Create a relationship field
Grid Information
Define the select (lookup) data source. Enter a select command or base it on a table.
Image3: Enter a select command.
For the option Choose Table 3 objects select are displayed allowing to choose the table and the fields
Key and Description.
Image4: Select command base on a table.
Key - Value stored in the relationship table.

Description - Value displayed in the update field.
Command Select
Select Command to display the update field values available.
Image5: Select Command.
Lookup Display
Image6: Lookup display field.
Define the update display format.
Image7: Field object type.
Display key and description - Display the key and the description entered in the select command.
Display Title - Display the relationship attribute title. (see relationship attribute).
Separator - Define a delimiter between key and description when the option selected is Display key
and description.
Object - Lookup object type to display in the form. Available types: Select, Double Select,
Checkbox and Radio.
Check and Uncheck all - Enable an option to check or uncheck all values( available only to
Checkbox).
Columns - Define number of columns displayed (available only to objects Checkbox and Radio).
Relationship Table
Image8: Relationship table.
Define the relationship table updated.
Image9: Select table.
Relationship Key
Image10: Link key.
Define the application fields related to the relationship table fields.
Image11: Defining update table field values.
Lookup Field
Image12: Lookup field.
Define the lookup table field related to the relationship table.
Image13: Defining table foreign key.
Relationship Attributes
Image14: Application view generate with the relationship attribute type Access Type.
Define the values stored in the relationship table fields that are not foreign keys.
Image15: Defining field attribute.
Dados Entry - Store a value entered by the user. Create a field and relate it via the select.
Attribute - Store an application field value.
Search (only for Double Select)
Image16: Double Select Filter.
Define a search to the relationship table.
Image17: Search field settings.
Limit of Records - Maxim quantity of records return by the search.

Initial State - Define the object load state.
Search fields - Define search fields (Key and/or Description) to display.
Display Settings (optional)
Define relationship field display settings such as CSS field
attributes, title and object..
Image18: Display Settings.
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Application
Settings
Define applications attributes.
Image1: Application Settings
Interface.
Attributes:
Application Images - Specific images used by this application.
Localization - Generated application language used, all the hints and messages are converted to
Share location variable - Use the session location variable in this application.
Share theme variable - Use the session theme variable in this application.
Edit Project - Allow all project users to edit this application.
Timeout - Timeout time in seconds. Zero is the standard value of PHP.
Timeout Message - Timeout for Ajax update message.
Update and removes lines... - Records can be selected in the checkbox to be updated or
removed.
HelpCase Link - Associate a HelpCase manual to your application.
Maximum File Size - Max upload file size for this application.
Message Title - Text used in title line as label.
Use Enter to Tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Image2: ErrorSettingsInterface.
Attributes:
Error Position - Error position in the application. Values: right, left, top and bottom.
Show error title in the application - Allow to show the title line of the error message.
Show error title in the field - Allow to show the title line of the error message in the field. The
standard value is deactivate.
Error title - Title of the error message in the application.
Error Script - Show information of the script and line where the error occurs.
Error SQL - Show the SQL command that originated the error.
Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Commands in the moment of
its use.
Ajax error output - Open a widow to display Ajax error messages output during debug mode.
Timeout Error - Time to display the validation error message.
Navigation
Attributes:
Return After inserting - Define the application return mode: return to edit a record after insert it or
open the new record mode after insertion.
Exit Application - Exit application after the form processing.
Messages
This interface is used to configure the messages of the application.
Image 1: Validation messages.
Attributes:
No records message - Messsage displayed when there is no records to show.
Primary key violation - Message displayed when there is an error with the primary key.
Unique key violation - Message displayed when validating an unique key.
Interface used to configure the messages upon insert a record.
Image 2: Insertion messages interface.
Attributes:
Message after insert - Message displayed after the insertion of a record.
Message to confirm insert - Confirmation message displayed before the insertion of a record.
Interface used to configure the messages upon Update a record.
Image 3: Update messages interface.
Attributes:
Message after Update - Message displayed after the Update of a record.
Message to confirm Update - Confirmation message displayed before the Update of a record.
Interface used to configure the messages upon Delete a record.
Image 4: Exclusion messages interface.
Attributes:
Message after Delete - Message displayed after the Delete of a record.
Message to confirm Delete - Confirmation message displayed before the Delete of a record.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:

displayed.
Synchronize Table
This process will realize a comparison between the definitions of the application fields and the table
fields that has origin in the database. In case that in origin table occurs any update, as for example the
inclusion of a new field, or exclusion, or still a change in the data type, this update will show it visible as
seen in the image below:
Image1: Synchronize table function interface.
After accessing the function from the link Synchronize table is show a comparison table between the
application fields (left table) and the table fields of the database (right table), above Image, the marked
fields in red will be deleted of the application, the marked fields in Green will be inserted in the
form, and the marked fields in orange will be updated, so they suffer type update in the database.
Note: When a table field in the database is renamed, the effect of the table synchronization, comparatively, will be the same of the exclusion of a field that exist in
the application plus the inclusion of a new field.
Link
We use to link the form application which we are defining with other applications, we can link our form
with application of the types: Search, Form, Control, Menu and Tab.
There are three types of links available:
Application - Used to link our form to any other type of application. This linking type is associated
to events of Inclusion and/or alteration, when occurs one of those events the navigation will be
effected to the application that we are calling.
Field - Used to link our form through a link
to any other type of application. For effecting this
linking we have to create a special field of the type Formula Label and associate to it the linking.
Capture - Will be created an icon
beside the field inside the form, when being selected it opens
other window showing a search application. In this application that will be opened can do searches
and return a value to text field.
In the windows below, the user will be able to edit an existent linking or to do a creation of a
new application.
Image1: Menu of Links.
Creating Links
In the screen below the user will must specify which the linking type to be effected, Application,
Field or Capture.
Image2: Interface of Linking between applications.
Used to link our form to each other type of the application. This linking type is associated to events of
Inclusion and/or Alteration, when occurs one of this events the navigation will be effected to the
application that we are calling.
The window below Application List show the form applications, the user will must choose the
application which will must be linked and clink on Continue >>.
Image3: Interface Linking between application.
In the window below Definition of Parameters, at the left side, is shown the application fields which we
are linking and that need to receive parameters to execution and, at the right side, will must be selected
the option for passing value, there are three options, they are:
Field - When choosing this option have to inform the field to be used for passing content.
Value - In case of selecting this option in the text field inform fixed content to be passed.
Empty - Choosing this option it will be passed no value to the field.
Image4: Interface of Definition of the Parameters.
In the window below Linking Properties will must be filled the relative attributes to the linking.
Image5: Interface of Linking Properties.
Attributes:
Redirecting after insert - With this option activated, when occurring the inclusion will be done the
navigation for the application that we are linking.
Redirecting after Update - With this option activated, when occurring the alteration will be done
the navigation for the application that we are linking.
Form property - Allow to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar of the filter.
Will be created an icon beside the field in the filter form, when being selected it opens another window
showing a search application. In this application that will be opened we can do searches and return a
value to the text field.
The window below Linking Type show that when it is selected the linking Capture Type, appears a
combobox with the fields of the origin application to be selected the field that will be used for the link.
Image6: Interface Parameter Definition.
The window below Application List show the search applications, the user will must choose the
application which will must be linked and click on Continue >>.
Image7:Application Link Interface
In the window below Definition of Parameters, at the left side, is shown the application fields which we
are linking and that need to receive parameters to execution and, at the right side, will must be selected
the option for passing value, there are three options, they are:
Field - When choosing this option have to inform the field to be used for passing content.
Value - In case of selecting this option in the text field inform fixed content to be passed.
Empty - Choosing this option it wil be passed no value to the field.
Recovering the field value - It should be selected the field of the search application to the linking object,
so its content return for the field the filter form.
Image8: Interface Parameter Definition.
Concluding the linking, the user will be able to update and remove the linking done, as its necessary.
Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
Methods
'Var' button:

button:

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :
Libraries
==> Libraries.
Tabs Applications
Overview
Tabs applications
This application type allows to organize multiple applications display in one single screen in a tab
structure. Usually applications related to a common topic are grouped into a tab application for example:
Employees / Projects.
Image1: TABS application.
Tabs
Tab Settings
Image1: Tab Settings Interface.
This property, Tab Settings, allows to define the following attributes:

Title - Application title that will be shown in the toolbar.
Organization - Allow that the application run in the folders through an iframe or normal.
Type - How the folders organization will be presented, it can be:
Folder above - Display the folders above the application.
Folder below - Display the folders below the application, next to the footer.
Folder in the left - Align the folders in the left, like a vertical menu.
Folder in the right - Align the folders in the right.
Menu above - Have the same principle of 'Folder above', but its visual schema has the menu
style.
Menu below - Have the same principle of 'Folder below', but its visual schema has the menu
style.
Menu in the left - Have the same principle of 'Folder in the left', but its visual schema has the
menu style.
Menu in the right - Have the same principle of 'Folder in the right', but its visual schema has
the menu style.
Side by Side - Show all applications in folders order, one next other.
Table size - Size of the main table.
Measurement Unit - The unit used by table size. Can be: Pixel or percentage.
Tab Alignment - Define the tab position. Can be: center, left or right.
Application Alignment - Define the application position, Can be: center, left, or right.
Exit - Define how the app will be presented, can be:
Button on the bottom of the page.

Folder.
Button in the toolbar
Exit Icon - You can define the icon of the exit button on the toolbar. Use the image selection
resource to visualize and select in easy way the desired image.
Folder Settings
This function serve to link each folder with a pre-existent application.
Image1: Folder Settings Interface.
Add a folder - To create a tab, click in 'Add' and fill these fields:
Label - Application name that will be shown in the tab or menu (examples: Personal Data,
Finance Data, etc.);
Image - Choose an image that will be used on this tab;
Update - Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then update the desired
data. Finally, click on the 'update' button.
Delete - Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then delete the item.
Clean - Clean all data of selected item.
Application Settings
Here we define the application for each tab. See the picture:
Image1: Application Settings Interface.
Initially the user must click on the tab that want to update. You have the following options:
Add - When you click in 'Add', a screen with app list will show up to choose the application. (Picture
2).
Edit - Select the application and then, click on edit button. The following steps are selection of the
application and the definition of the iframe size (Picture 3), requested in the add application process.
Remove - Select the application that you want to delete and click on remove.
How to Add and Edit Applications
Selecting the application and click on 'Next', as the screen below:
Image2: Application Link Interface.
On the next screen you define a few parameters of the link:
Iframe width - Width size of the iframe. If you put in 100% the application will be adjusted more
easily.
Iframe height - Height size of the iframe. If this size is small than your app, a scrollbar will appear
automatically.
Reload Iframe - When this option is enabled makes the application of the tab, to be reloaded each
time you change the tab.
Parameters / Value - For each parameter of the application that we choose, you have options to be
chosen, they are:
Variable - Name of the global variable to get the content.
Value - Static content to be loaded for the parameter in the execution time.
Empty - Leave empty or do not change if it has some value.
Security
Attribute:
accessed.
examples below.
userid.
}
}
else{
}

Pdf Settings
In this window, the user will define the configuration of the PDF, available in tab application, as following:
You have the following attributes:

Create PDF - Define if the app will have the output in PDF format.
PDF Orientation - Define how will be the orientation sense of the generated reports in PDF, can be:
picture or landscape.
PDF Format - Format of the pages generated in PDF, as: Letter, A4, A5, etc.
Open PDF Directly - Indicate if the application will allow to generate the PDF directly by the button
or if will be through a link to the PDF.
Allow to print - This option allow that the user print the PDF.
Allow to modify - This option allow that the user modify the PDF.
Layout
Layout Settings

Attributes:
Header
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Log
application.
Options:
Application
Settings
Here we have the general application settings:

Application Code - Application name and code for ScriptCase internal use.
Connection - ScriptCase connection used by this application.
Default Profile - Default connection profile to be used on production environment.
Exit URL - URL address to be when the user click in exit button.
Folder - Folder where the application will be placed in scriptcase work area.
Description - Name descriptive of the application.
HelpCase Link - Associate a this application to a page of project documentation.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


displayed.
Container Applications
Overview
Container Application
Allows you to display various types of applications nested on Widgets similar to those for iGoogle. They
are usually incorporated into reports and / or Charts that display information from the database, also can
be displayed information external URL's.
Image1: Containers Display.
Container
Container Settings
Image1: Container Settings Interface.
This property Container Settings allows to set the following attributes:

Column
Width -Column width where will be the Widget.
Add Column - Adds a Widget to the selected column.
Remove Column - Removes the selected column and all the Widgets
that are associated with the column.
Widget
Title - Title that will appear in the Widget.
Link - Application or URL to be loaded into the Widget selected.
Height - Height of the Widget in pixels.
Reload time - Charging time of application or URL selected in the
Widget, it must be defined in seconds.
Mobile - Allows to change the Widget column at run time.
Removable - Allows to be remove the Widget at runtime.
Collapsible - Allows to expand the Widget at run time.
Maximize - Allows to maximize the Widget at run time.
At the page bottom we can see two more options:

Add Column - Adds a column to the Container application.
Save - Saves the Columns and Widgets information.
Security
Attribute:
accessed.
examples below.
userid.
}
}
else{
}

Layout
Layout Settings

Attributes:
Header & Footer
HEADER
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Log
application.
Options:
Application
Settings
Image1: Settings Interface.
In this folder you define the application attributes , such as:

Application Code - Application code for ScriptCase internal use. Should begin by letter.
Connection - Connection name used by ScriptCase to access the tables. User can select it.
Locales - Application language.
Session Locales - Provides a variable locales in session.
Folder - A folder containing the application.
Editing by Project - If you have Not checked the application can only be edited by the owner.
Description - Application descriptive name.
HelpCase Link - Help Page.
Control Applications
Overview
Control Application
This application type is structured differently from form applications. It is not based on a database table,
allowing the form creation using fields added manually and source validation. Common examples of this
application type are the forms for login and batch processing.
Figure1: Control Interface
Functionality
Description
Hidden Fields
Hide fields in forms display while keep the field

value from form to submit.
Read-Only
Fields
Fields are displayed but edit are not allowed.
Fields
Required
Fields with obligatory entry. Values must be

entered.
Fields Format
According the field type required validation are

generated, different formats area are available.
Events
Programming
Allow the developer to add business rules in PHP

code. The form events are triggered during the
processing in the server or by the browser
(AJAX).
Links creation Link a form with other applications..
Control
Settings
In this window are congregated diverse configurations linked to the exhibition format and the way of
update.
Figure 1: Settings Interface.
See below the attributes description:

Attributes:
Keep Values - Allow to keep the values of the last access to the form, thus having this value in the
next access.
Line Breaks in Title - It allows to break the line of the Titles
Horizontal Alignment - Allow to define the horizontal alignment of the application. The options are:
center, left and right.
Margins - Allow to define the application margins (Above, below, right and left).
Table Width - Allow to define the table width of the application.
Table width unit - When defining the property Table width can determinate the width unit, they
are: Percentage, Pixels and Automatic.
Layout and Behavior
Automatic tab - Advance the focus to the next field after completing the maximum number of
characters allowed in the field.
Highlight Text upon focus - Highlight field contents when the field receives focus.
Use Enter to tab - Use the "Enter" key to tab from one field to the next field.
Field with initial focus - Field that receives focus when the application is loaded.
Focus on field with error - Focus on the first field with an error when submiting the form. If any
validation errors occur, the focus will advance to the first field with an error.
Edit Fields
New interface included in the V6. It allows the user to arrange and edit the fields
Image 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options:
1 - Fields - This column is used to show the name of the field.
2 - Label - Column to edit the field label displayed in the end application.
3 - Datatype - It allows to change the field type.
4 - Read-Only - Define if the field is just read-only.
5 - Required - Define if the field is required or not.
Note: Observe that all lines are draggable. There you can define the position of fields, blocks and pages. Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks
are grouped in Pages.
Display
Options:
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Toolbar
Define toolbar attributes and options such as validation, formatting and help settings.
Figure 1: Toolbar Interface
The application toolbar is divided in two parts:Top and bottom. It is possible to select the buttons
Attributes:
Navigation - Buttons used to navigate on the application or exit from control application.
Other - Other buttons type: Theme, Webhelp, PHP, Javascript or link button.
Ordinance of the buttons - This option lets you define what will be the display order of buttons
used in the application.
sEttings buttons
Figure 3: Toolbar Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Button - Show all buttons selected in application.
Label - Set a label for button.
Hint - Set a message that will show when the mouse is on the button.
Access Keys - Allows you to set hotkeys keyboard to a button.
OPTIONS
Figure 4: Toolbar Options Interface.
Attributes:
JS Formatting - Allow to define if there is automatic fields formatting on the form.

Help by Block - Indicates if the helps of the relative fields, will be grouped per block. In each field
we can define a text of help to it, with this option activated appear an icon in the title bar of the block
to the calling of the help page .
General Help - General help consolidates all fields help in a unique page, placing an icon in the
toolbar to calling the help page.
Log
application.
Options:
Sql
In this group is defined the attributes relative to the connection to the database.
Figura1: SQL Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Connection - Show the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution,
this connection can be changed with another that have the same tables (SQL).
Case Sensitive - This option should be set to "No" only if the database is configured for casesensitive and it is should not respect this setting.
Fields
Overview
This interface allows informing the rules of validation and formatting of the content of each field of the
control. The configuration of the fields is made giving a click in the field to be formatted, in the existing
list, the left part of the folder ?Form?.
.
Made this, the system opens a screen to the right of this list, where it must be verified if in the field Type
of the Data the value attributed for the ScriptCase through the analysis of table SQL is in accordance
with the existing content. In case that he isn?t, the user will have selecting in the list (combobox) a type
adjusted for the content of its field. For each Type of selected Data a screen with different characteristics
will be formatted. Example: Fields of the type Text possess different characteristics of a field of the type
Date. Thus being, the formatting of the screen will be in accordance with the chosen type.
Text
General Settings
Figure1: General Settings
Interface
button.

Text field
Password field
applications.
merged:
9
A
*

the user.
Examples:
Field
Telephone
number
Software Key
(Only letters)
Software Key
(Letters and
Numbers)
Car Plate
Scriptcase's
serial key
Multiple Masks
(Telephone)
Mask
+99 99 9999 9999
AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA
****-****-****-****
Value entered
123456789012
Value formatted
+12 34 5678 9012
AAA - 9999
QWE1234
QWE - 1234
A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111****
DG2P
9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
Uppercase
Lowercase
word
words

GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Multiple Lines Text
General Settings
Attributes
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as multiple lines text, it
accepts letters, numbers, characters. Upon selecting the data type as multiple lines text the attribute
Lines is enabled to definethe number of lines is selected.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
Uppercase
Lowercase
word
words

AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Integer
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accepts only
integer numbers.
button.

applications.
merged:
9
A
*

the user.
Examples:
Field
Telephone
number
Software Key
(Only letters)
Software Key
(Letters and
Numbers)
Car Plate
Scriptcase's
serial key
Multiple Masks
(Telephone)
Mask
+99 99 9999 9999
AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA
****-****-****-****
Value entered
123456789012
Value formatted
+12 34 5678 9012
AAA - 9999
QWE1234
QWE - 1234
A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111****
DG2P
9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
regional settings).
values.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS

Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Decimal
General Settings
Figure1: .General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
numbers.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Currency
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as currency, it accepts only
decimal values.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format

GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date
General Settings
Attributes
Data type - Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date
rules
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
settings).
Minimum date:
options:
Maximum Date:
options:
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Time
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific Time
rules.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
settings).
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date And Time
General Settings
Attributes :
specific Data and Time rules.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Image(file Name)
IMAGE (FILE NAME)

General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image(file name) type, it

using semicolon.
Multi-Upload
Attributes:
The options are:

passed to it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
General Settings
Attributes:
using semicolon.
Multi-Upload
Attributes:
The options are:

passed to it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Credit Card Number
The ScriptCase provides credit card numbers validation routines in its applications. Currently ScriptCase
applications supports validation routines to handle AMERICAN EXPRESS, VISA, MASTERCARD and
DINER cards.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it
is formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules.
button.

applications.
merged:
9
A
*

the user.
Examples:
Field
Telephone
number
Software Key
(Only letters)
Software Key
(Letters and
Numbers)
Car Plate
Scriptcase's
serial key
Multiple Masks
(Telephone)
Mask
+99 99 9999 9999
AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA
****-****-****-****
Value entered
123456789012
Value formatted
+12 34 5678 9012
AAA - 9999
QWE1234
QWE - 1234
A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111****
DG2P
9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Without field label

attribute
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Credit Card
Define the Credit Card Company (flag). It relates to a Credit Card Field and used by the validation
routines to validate according to the specific company rules.
General Settings
Image1:General SettingsInterface.
Attributes :
applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Formats
Figure2:
Attributes:
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
E-mail
General Settings
Attributes:
>Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is
displayed by its side, clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader. It validates the field value
according to standard e-mail formats.
Label - Field title in application.
Initial Value - Populates the field with a pre-defined value when the end-user clicks on the "new"
button. Select from the options below:
Defined Value - Uses the value entered for the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to receive
parameters by using this function. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use
a session variable created at a login screen.
System Date - Uses the server date. Note: When you use the System Date option, you do not
need to enter an Initial value.
Initial Value - The value displayed for the field when using the Defined Value option.

applications.
Field without label attribute. Field with label attribute.

GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Url
General Settings
Figure1:General SettingsInterface.
Attributes
Data type- Define the application field type. URLfields display links.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute

GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Html Color
General Settings
Figure1:General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Color an icon is
displayed by its side with a colors palette.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Select
Use a select (combobox)) object in form field.
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

on the SQL command.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single value
Multiple Values
selected.
statement.
lookup value
project.
current project.

Attributes:
Single Value
lookup settings.


semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
S
M
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2


Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music


selected.
statement.
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Double Select
Component that displays two value lists. A list with values available to select and another with the
selected values.
Figure1: Double Select object .Available values/ Selected values.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type- The field type Double Select is a drop-down object that allows the selection of multiple
information using two list boxes and a navigator ( << < > >> ).
button.
applications.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Attributes :
two fields.
semicolon ( ; ).
Lookup Value
project.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Check Box
CHECKBOX
Use a checkbox objecto in form field.
General Settings
Atributos:
Data type - The field type checkbox is an object that allows the single or multiple information using
an objects selection box.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Attributes:
two fields.
semicolon ( ; ).
parameter.
Lookup Value
Attributes :
Single Value


semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
S
M
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2


Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music


parameter.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Radio
Use a radio object in form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type- The field type Radio is an object that allows the selection of a single information from all
information displayed.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method

database table.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single column Radio
title is selected.
Lookup Value
project.

Attributes :
selected.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Html Image
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Image it displays an
image.
Imagem - Sets the image to be displayed. The icon "Choose image"; list ScriptCase standard
images for selection. The icon "Upload an image" allows the developer to send the server an image
located on another machine.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Label
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Label fields are display only fields.
Text - Text box to enter a text displayed by the field side.
Reload - Reload the form when clicking in the link created with the text entered in the Text
attribute.
Position - Position the field on the selected block, when reloading the form.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Text Auto-complete
where each item has a value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value of must
be alpha-numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology
General Settings

button.

Text field
Password field
applications.
Without field label

attribute

Values Format
Attributes:
Uppercase
Lowercase


word
words

Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
where each item has a value and label associated. For the number Auto-Complete each item value of
must be numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology
General Settings
Attributes:
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute

VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Menu Links
Create a menu structure in the form.
Proprieties:
Values Format
Proprieties:
Menu Item - Insert , Update and Remove menu items control.
Label - Define menu item label.
Link - Define an application or extern link called when a menu item is selected.
Icon - Define the icon displayed at the item link side for the display Link mode.
Default - Define it the menu item is selected by default in the display modes (Select and Radio
).
Insert - Insert new menu item
Update -Update menu item.
Remove - Remove menu item.

Clear- Clear a menu item data
Clear all - Remove all menu items data.
Display Mode - Menu Links generation format : Select , Radio or Link:
Example using Select mode :
Example using Radio mode :
Example using Link mode :
Hide Label - Do not display the link labels. This option is available to the Display Link mode.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Profile
Display the production environment connections available in a Select object at run time.
To use this option do not enter the connection name at deployment time. See deployment.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Editor Html
Attributes:
characters.
Toolbar
Attributes:
Properties :
Top or Bottom.

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Locales
Add an select object to the application. The object allows to select a language for the project application.

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Javascript
Attributes:
Choose event - In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field, for whom we
Edit Javascript

browsers.
}
}
OnBlur Example:
{
}
onChange examples:
}
{
}
{
}
{
}
onMouseOut example:
Security
Attribute:
accessed.
examples below.
userid.
}
}
else{
}

CAPTCHA
Read more:

image.
in the application.
Layout
Layout
Blocks
Settings
Header & Footer
Blocks

below.
Attributes:


Add New Block


Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Edit Block
Click

Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Colors Schema
Layout Settings

Attributes:
Header & Footer
HEADER
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Events
Events
Image 1: Event Button access of Control application.

onApplicationInit - Occurs once when the application is loaded (first time).
onScriptInit -Occurs when the application is loaded
onRefresh -This event is executed during the application page reload.
onValidateSucess -Occurs when validation is successful. .
onValidateFailure -Occurs when a validation failure is found.
onValidate - This event is executed by clicking on validation buttons (ok, update, insert, delete,
search) depending on the used application. In case of form the buttons are: update, insert and
delete.
onLoad - This event occurs when the browser loads the window.
Ajax Events

Example:
optional.
2 -Enter

Authentications
Overview
Authentication
Image1: Authentication Option.
Scriptcase can us to link our applications using OAuth methods. These methos will allow us to integrate
our project with these data sources:
Facebook
Twitter
Google+
PayPal
Facebook
Image1: Facebook authentication Fields.
When creating a Facebook Authentication Button, you need to fill these fields:
App ID - Facebook Application ID. This Id will be given by the Facebook Developer's page.
Secret - Facebook service will give you a secret key to enable your application to run on a website.
Method return - Method to be ran when Facebook service return the data requested.
Image2: Facebook developpers page. (01/29/2013)
To create Facebook application and receive your key and secret for your website, you must follow these
steps:
1. Login to your Facebook account
2. Go to https://developers.facebook.com/apps and register your account
3. Click on + Create New App
4. Enter your APP Display Name, App Name Space and click on continue.
Image3: App Name and Namespace
Enter your SC application details and save changes. On the top of the page you can find your
APP ID and APP Secret for your SC application only.
Image4: Website details
You can use this APP ID and App Secret to connect this SC application to Facebook.
Twitter
Image1: Twitter authentication Fields.
When creating a Twitter Authentication Button, you need to fill these fields:
Key - Twitter Application ID. This Id will be given by the Twitter Developer's page.
Secret - Twitter service will give you a secret key to enable your application to run on a website.
Method return - Method to be ran when Twitter service return the data requested.
Image2: Twitter developpers page. (01/29/2013)
To create a Twitter application and receive your key and secret for your website, you must follow these
steps:
1. Go to https://dev.twitter.com/ and register your account
2. On the "My Applications" page click on Create New Application
3. Enter your Application details as asked and proceed with the application creation.
Image3: Application details.
On the top of the page you can find your Consumer ID and Consumer Secret at the OAuth tool
tab for your SC application only.
Image4: OAuth keys
You can use this Consumer ID and Consumer Secret to connect this SC application to Twitter.
Google+
Image1: Google+ authentication Fields.
When creating a Google+ Authentication Button, you need to fill these fields:
Application Name - Google+ Application Name.
Client ID - Google+ Application ID. This Id will be given by the Google+ Developer's page.
Secret - Google+ service will give you a secret key to enable your application to run on a website.
Redirect URL - URL to where Google+ must redirect the user with the data retrieved.
Method return - Method to be ran when Google+ service return the data requested.
Image2: Google+ developpers page. (01/29/2013)
To create a Google+ application and receive your key and secret for your website, you must follow these
steps:
1. Go to https://code.google.com/apis/console/ and register your account
2. On the "API Access" page click on "Create an OAuth2.0 client ID"
3. Enter your Application details as asked and click "Next".
3.
Image3: Application details.
4. Enter the Client ID as requested in the page and click "Create Client ID".
Image4: Client ID Details
5. On the next Page, you will find the data required by Scriptcase.
5.
Image5: OAuth Keys
You can use this Client ID and Secret to connect an SC application to Google+.
Paypal
Image1: PayPal authentication Fields.
When creating a PayPal Authentication Button, you need to fill these fields:
PayPal URL - This url may be to the PayPal SandBox or the PayPal API itself. The SandBox is the
place for tests before the application runs in a real environment.
Id - The PayPal ID to receive the payment.
Order number - This order number must .
Customized field - URL to where PayPal must redirect the user with the data retrieved.
Variable with the description - Here will be.
Variable with the Total amount - Method to be ran when PayPal service return the data requested.
Paypal Method - Method to be ran when PayPal service return the data requested.
Method Cancel - Method to be ran when the user cancel the purchase.
Method IPN - Method to be ran when PayPal service confirm the payment. This method is comonly
used to modify the database and register the purchase as complete.
Image2: PayPal developpers page. (01/29/2013)
To create a PayPal payment method you must fill the fields correctly. In order to test your application,
you must use the PayPal SandBox and create a fake PayPal account:
1. Go to https://developer.paypal.com/ and register your account
2. Click on "create a preconfigured account".
3. Enter the test account details as asked and save the changes.
Image3: Test account details.
4. On the Test Accounts page, activate your newly created account.
4.
Image4: Info about the test account
The variables returned by the request can be find below:

[mc_gross]
[invoice]
[protection_eligibility]
[address_status]
[payer_id]
[tax] =>
[address_street]
[payment_date]
[payment_status]
[charset]
[address_zip]
[first_name]
[mc_fee]
[address_country_code]
[address_name]
[notify_version]
[custom]
[payer_status]
[business]
[address_country]
[address_city]
[quantity]
[verify_sign]
[payer_email]
[txn_id]
[payment_type]
[last_name]
[address_state]
[receiver_email]
[payment_fee]
[receiver_id]
[txn_type]
[item_name]
[mc_currency]
[item_number]
[residence_country]
[test_ipn]
[handling_amount]
[transaction_subject]
[payment_gross]
[shipping]
[ipn_track_id]
Buttons
Buttons
New Button
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Javascript Button

AJAX EVENTS

Example:
optional.
2 -Enter

Code
Image2: JavaScript
Interface.
Php Button

AJAX EVENTS

Example:
optional.
2 -Enter

Code
Image2: PHP
Interface.
Link Button
Creating a Linking type button

AJAX EVENTS

Example:
optional.
2 -Enter

The linking button requires a link associated to it. In the application menu (on the left side of the window)
there is an option to create new links configure the new Linking button, and follow the steps below to
Creating a new Link

Image3: Link Type
Interface.
Interface - Field.

Image8: Link/Form Properties Interface.
Open in the same window - Show the form in the same browser window, exiting the search
Open in other window - Open another window to show the form.
Open in a Iframe - Show the form in the same in the same window that the search, below of
search an Iframe is created to display the form.
Linking Link Hint- Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.
Application
Settings
Define common ScriptCase application attributes.
See below the attributes description:
Attributes:
Application Code - Application Code assigned during application creation.

Description - Used to describe application goals.
Images Directory - The base directory where the application images are stored.
Documents Path - . The absolute path where the application documents are stored.
ApplicationImages - Specific images used by this application. This option deploys the images
called in event with the application.
Example: echo "<img src='image_button.png' width='30' height='30' />" ;
application.
Choose an image uploaded to ScriptCase before.

Upload new image.
Remove the image in
Localization - Generated application language (all the hints and messages) and locales (specific
data types format)
Edit Project - Allow other users of the group to edit the application.
Timeout - Execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of the PHP
Timeout Message- Show a message after timeout limit.
HelpCase Link - Associate a Help Manual to your application.
Maximum file size - Set the upload maximum file size for image or document field.
Message title- Message box displayed title
Use Enter to tab -The 'Enter' key have the same function of 'Tab' key..
Error Settings
Define ScriptCase applications error settings. See below the attributes description:
<img
src="http://192.168.254.248/tools/nm/sc_helpv7/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0634_confi_erro.png"
">
Image 3: Error Settings Interface
Attributes:
Error Position - Application error position : right, left, up and down.
Display error title in application - Display error message line with the error title.
Display error title in field - Display line with title in error field.
Error Title - Error title message in application.
Script Error - Display script line and info where the error occurred.
SQLError - Display SQL command that originated the error.

DebugMode - Run application in debug mode displaying SQL commands
Ajax Error output - Display Ajax events SQL and PHP output in a window.
Navigation
Attributes:
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:

displayed.
Links
Links
Links the control application that we are defining with other applications of the following types: Grid,
Form, Control, Menu and Tab.
There are 4 links types available:
Application - It is used to link the control to another application type. This type of link call the other
application during onsubmit event of calling application.
Field - Used to connect the control via a
to any other type of application. To make this
connection we should create a special field type Label and associate the same connection.
Capture - Creates an icon
next to the field inside the control application, when selected it opens
another window displaying a grid application. In the open application the user can start a search and
return a value to a text box.
Button - Used to connect the form to another application by clicking on the button previously
created (link type Button ).
The user can edit an existing link or create a new one using the "New LInk" option.
Figura Link between applications interface - Links created.
Link Type - Application

Linking Type - Capture
Link Type - Field
Link Type - Buttons
Links - Application
Link Type - Application

Used to link the Form to any other applications type. This link type is associated to submit events. When
an event occurs then the application is redirected to the called application.
The Applications List displayall applications. The user can choose the application that will be linked
and click in Next >>
Figure4: Link between applications Interface
Parameter definition, at left side, display the global variablename or field name which we are linking
and that needs to receive parameters. Select the option to inform the value, there are three options:
Field - Inform the field to be use its value.
Fixed - inform a fixed value.
Empty - No value is passed to the field.
Link to an Application:
Figure5: Parameters Definition with global Variable Interface
Link Properties define the link attributes
Link to Grid Application:
Link to Form Application:
Figure8: Link to Grid Application Properties
Figure9: Link to Form Application Properties
Attributes:
Link Propreties - Select the target where application will open.
Form Properties - Allow to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar.
Grid Property - Define the grid settings
"Linking" display the link created with action buttons.
Links - Button
Link Type - Buttons

A button is created in the toolbar inside the control form, when clicked it opens the window displaying a
grid or form application.
Using the opened application to search for information, add, edit or delete a record.
Figure 30: Capture Link in Control Application.
Select the link button to enable.
Figure 31: Link Type Interface
Below, List of Applicationsdisplays all applications, the user must seelect the application to be linked
Figure 32: Interface of linking between applications.
In Parameter definition, at left side, it is displayed the global variablename or field name which we
are linking and that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side, will have to be selected
the option to inform the value, there are two options, and they are:
Fixed - In this case, in the text field, you must inform a fixed value.
Empty - Choosing this option will not be passed any value to the field.
Figure 33: Parameters Definition Interface with global Variable.
Figura 35: Parameters Definition Interface
In Linking Properties enter the link relative attributes.
Figure 36: Link Properties to Grid Application.
Figure 37: Link Properties to Form and Control

Application.
Attributes:
Link Operation Mode- Allows choose the target where application will open.
Exit URL for the Target Application Hint of The link - Enter a text to display when the mouse is over the button.
Form Properties - Allows to select the buttons displayed in the toolbar.
Grid Property - Allows configure the grid settings.
Below "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions.
Figure 38: Link Interface
Links - Capture
LinkType - Capture
In this application that will be opened we can do searches and return a value for the text field.
The screen below Linking Type shows that, when it is selected the linking type Capture, it appears
a combobox with the fields of the origin application, to be selected the field that will be used for the Link.
Figure12: Interface of Definition of the Parameters.
Below, List of Applicationsdisplays all applications, the user must select the application to be linked
Figure13: Interface of Linking between applications
In Parameter definition, at left side, it is displayed the the application fields which we are linking and
that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side, will have to be selected the option to
inform the value, there are two options, and they are:
Figure15: Parameters Definition Interface with parameters.
Fixed - In this case, in the text field, you must inform a fixed Value.
Empty - Choosing this option will not be passed any value to the global variable.
Figure16 : Link Properties Interface
Modal - Displays the called application with dark background.
Figure17 : Example of capture link using modal target.
Below, "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions.
Figure18: Linking Interface
Recover the field value - Selected a field of the grid application called linking object and it returns a
value to a field of the control form.
Links - Field
Link Type - Field
Using the opened application to search for information, add, edit or delete a record.
This link mode only enables when the control application have a label type field created.
Figure 21: Option to create a label field.
More details, Click here to see a tutorial.
Select the Label field to enable.
Figure 22: Link Type Interface
Below, List of Applicationsdisplays all applications, the user must select the application to be linked
In Parameter definition, at left side, it is displayed the global variablename or field name which we
are linking and that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side, will have to be selected
the option to inform the value, there are two options, and they are:
Field - Enter the field used to get the value.
Fixed - In this case, in the text field inform a fixed value.
Link to an Application:
Figura 26: Parameters Definition Interface
Figure 27: Link Properties to Grid Application.
Figure 28: Link Properties to Form and Control Application.
Attributes:
Link Propreties - Allows to select the target where application will open.
Form Properties - Allows to select the buttons shown in the toolbar.
Grid Property - Allows to configure the grid settings
Below, "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions.
Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
Methods
'Var' button:

button:

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :
Libraries
==> Libraries.
Blank Applications
Overview
This type of application allows the developer to write PHP / HTML code and display a process result. A
good example of its use is called the batch process, the advantage of using this application instead of
creating a .php program manually outside the ScriptCase is the possibility of using ScriptCase macros
well as native integration with control access to their systems.
Blank
Onexecute
In this menu is entered the PHP code that will run by the application.
Image1: OnExecute.
Attributes:
OnExecute - Allows to entry PHP commands, ScriptCase macros and to use code libraries.
Any event can use pre-defined functions available in Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase
Macros".
See more about Scriptcase Macros.
Sql
In blank applications you can use one connection to access the database by default but as in other
application types (forms, inquiries and control ) you can run SQL commands using other connections
than the native application connection.
Image1: SQL Settings.
Attributes:
Connection - Allows you to choose one of your project databases connections.
Security
The blank applications can have their access password-protected or use your project security settings,
see below the two options highlighted.
Image1: Security Options.
Use security - Disable access to this application and only allow access to authorized users, read
more.
Use Password - Set a password for this particular application.
Log
application.
Options:
Applications
Settings
In this folder are common attributes to applications created by ScriptCase, bellow is described these
attributes.
Image1: Settings Interface
Atributos:
Application Code - Application code given when creating the application, this code can be
renamed via the main menu.
Description - This field can be used to enter a brief application description.
Application Images - To use images within the application in implementations of Business Rules,
eliminating the use of macro sc_image.
Locales - Application generated language , all the hints and messages will be placed in the chosen
language.
Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the workgroup.
Editing by Project - .Allow other project users to edit the application.
Error Settings
Image2: Error Settings Interface
Atributos:
Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, displaying the SQL commands as they are
executed.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


displayed.
Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
Methods
'Var' button:

button:

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :
Libraries
==> Libraries.
Menu Applications
Overview
Menu application
Menu applications are used to offer a single access point to the project applications, it is also possible to
create external links on the menu items. The menus structure can be modified at run time depending on
the user profile.
Image1:Horizontal menu.
Image2: Vertical Menu Interface.
Menu
Settings
Using the menu settings interface the user can define the application attributes as following:
Image1: Menu Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Orientation - Orientation of the menu in the screen : horizontal line or vertical.
Horizontal
Vertical
Note: If the vertical orientation is used, it is necessary to adjust the menu width.
Horizontal Alignment Of the Menu - Define the application horizontal alignment in the page as:
left or rigth.
Vertical Alignment of the items - Align menu items vertically as: top, center or bottom.
Horizontal alignment of the items - Align menu items horizontally as: left or rigth.
Menu Width - Width in pixels or percentage of the menu.
Menu Height - Height in pixels or percentage of the menu.
Iframe Width - Width in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications are
opened.
Iframe Height - Heightin pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications are
opened.
Hide menu items - Select the option to hide an item, instead of disabling it, when using security
schemes or access control.
Hide the menu toolbar - Remove the toolbar items instead of disabling them, if the security option
is enabled in the applications.
Open items with OnClick - Opens menu items only with the mouse onclick.
Preserves icons space - Preserves icons space in the menu even if the item has no icon.
Scrollbar - Enables the scroll bar.
Select Language - Selects the language from the menu bar.
Select Theme - Select the theme from the menu bar.
Aligment of Theme and Language - Themes and language items horizontal alignment in the
menu.
Always show items - Show the items of the menu even if the applications do not exist or they
weren't generated.
Default Application - Menu start application: an application, blank or an URL.
Menu Items
Use this interface to structure the menu, indicating which the applications are called.
Image1: Menu Settings Interface
Label - Application title in the menu.

Link - Application name. The user can click in
to select the application..
Icon - Enter the image name to display as icon to the side the application label in the menu. Click in
to select the image desired. (Optional)
Hint - Enter a descriptive text to assist the application identification by the user. (Optional).
Target - Defines how to display the applications in the menu: in the same window or another
window.
Creating a Menu - Resources & process (Icons on the top of the menu list).
Insert item - Add a menu item.
Insert Sub-Item - Add a sub-item to the menu.
Remove - Removes an item from the menu. Select the item or sub-item, and click in the button to
remove.
Import - Import applications from the project creating links to them.
Move Up - Move up a menu item or sub-item.
Move Down - Move Down an item or sub-item.
Move Left - Move an item or sub-item to the left, removing a level from it.
Move Right - Move an item or sub-item to the right, adding a level to it.
Linking applications is easy and fast. Select an application from a list to add to the menu after we click
on the icon on the side of the link text box. To structure the menu use the structure buttons.
Image2: Import Application Interface.
Toolbar
Use this interface to build a quick bar in the menu application linking applications through buttons, icons
and text links.
Image1: Toolbar Interface
Creating items (Icons on the top of the menu list).

Insert item - Add a new item on the toolbar of the menu.
Insert Separator - Add a separator into the toolbar.
remove.
Moving items (Arrows).
Move Up - Move up a toolbar item or sub-item.
Move Down - Move Down a toolbar item or sub-item.
Move Left - Move a toolbar item or sub-item to the left, removing a level from it.
Move Right - Move a toolbar item or sub-item to the right, adding a level to it.
Items settings.
Type - It can be a link, a button or an incon.
to select the application.

Display - This option allows to choose if the item will display only texts, only an image or both.
Image Position - It defines if the image will be displayed on the right or on the left side.
Target - Defines how to display the applications: on the same window or on another one.
Security
Attribute:
accessed.
examples below.
userid.
}
}
else{
}

Events
Events
Figure 1:Menus Event Interface.
OnApplicationInit - Occurs only one time when the application is initialized.

Onload - Occurs a when a menu loads.
Execute - Occurs at the moment where an item in the menu is executed or an application is
chosen.
Layout
Overview
Layout Settings

Attributes:
Header
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Log
application.
Options:
Application
Settings
Below some menu application settings description:
Figure1: Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Application Code - Application code determined at the application creation to identify it . An
application can be renamed using the main menu.
Connection - Defines the connection used by the ScriptCase to access database tables.
Language - Language of the generated application, all hints and messages are displayed in
selected language.
Charset - Selects the charset that will be used on the application.
Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the work group.
Description - Descriptive application name and information.
Applications Icons - Icons that will be used by the application.
Convert Menu
CONVERT MENU
It is used to convert an Menu application to a Tree Menu format.

It does not change any of the application orginal settings except for the format.
Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
Methods
'Var' button:

button:

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :
Libraries
==> Libraries.
Menu Tree Applications

Overview
Tree Menu application
Tree Menu applications are used to offer a single access point to the project applications, it is also
possible to create external links on the menu items. The menus structure can be modified at run time for
example depending on the user profile.
Image1: Tree menu application.
Menu
Settings
Using the menu settings interface the user can define the application attributes as follows:
Image1: Menu SettingsInterface.
Attributes:
Horizontal Alignment Of Menu - Define the application horizontal alignment in the page as: left or
rigth.
Vertical Alignmentof the items - Align menu items vertically as: top, center or bottom.
Horizontal alignment of items - Align menu items horizontally as: left or rigth.
MenuWidth- Width in pixels or percentage of the menu.
MenuHeight - Height in pixels or percentage of the menu.
Iframe Width - Width in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications will be
opened.
Iframe Height - Height in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications will
be opened.
Hide menu items - Select the option to hide an item, instead of disabling it, when using security
schemes or access control.
Open items with OnClick - Opens menu items only with the mouse onclick.
Preserves icons space - Preserves icons space in the menu even if the item has no icon.
Scrollbar - Enables the scroll bar.
Select Language - Selects the language from the menu bar.
Select Theme - Select the theme from the menu bar.

Theme and language alignment - Themes and language items horizontal alignment in the menu.
Default Application - Menu start application: an application, blank or an URL .
Menu Items
Image1: Menu Settings Interface.
Using this option define the menu structure and the called applications. Enter the following attributes:
to select the application..
Target - Defines how to display the applications in the menu: in the same window or another
window.
Creating a Menu - Resources & process.

Insert item - Add an application to the menu. ( as an item)
Insert Sub-Item - Add a sub-item to the menu.
Update - Modify a menu item or sub-item.
remove.
Clean item - Clean the picture of attributes.
Clean Menu - Excludes all items and sub-items from the menu.
Import Applications - Select the applications that will be called.
.
Importing applications is easy and fast. Selects applications from a list to add to the menu. To structure
the menu use the structure buttons.
Image2: Import Application Interface.

After importing the applications, the link receives the name from the application as below:
Security
Attribute:
accessed.
examples below.
userid.
}
}
else{
}

Events
Events
Figure 1: Event button access of Menu application.
OnApplicationInit - Occurs only one time when the application is initialized.

Onload - Occurs a when a menu loads.
Execute - Occurs at the moment where an item in the menu is executed or an application is
chosen.
Layout
Overview
Layout Settings

Attributes:
Header
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Log
application.
Options:
Application
Settings
Below some menu application settings description:
Figure1: Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Application Code - Application code determined at the application creation to identify it . An
application can be renamed using the main menu.
Connection - Defines the connection used by ScriptCase to access database tables.
Localization - Language of the generated application, all hints and messages are displayed in
selected language.
Share theme variable - Shares themes with other applications based on the session values.
Edit Project - Allow users to edit the application.
Description - Descriptive application name and information.
Applications Icons - Icons that will be used by the application.
Convert Menu
CONVERT MENU
It is used to convert a Tree Menu application to a Menu application format.

It does not change any of the application orginal settings except for the format.
Search Applications
Overview
Search applications
Used to search data to form applications. It is created based on a SELECT statement, this application
type works necessarily linked to a form application
Some search form features:
Feature
Description
Fields
formatting
The search form automatically formats several

fields types such as date, time, numbers, etc.
Search
condition
Define the search criteria individually for each

search field.
Fields
validation
The search form automatically validates several

fields types such as date, time, numbers, etc.
Save search Save the data entered on the search form for reusability.
Image1: Search form application.
Search
Settings
Attributes to define the search form (filter) settings (Alignment, Width, Criteria, etc).
Figure1: Search Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Empty Search - Select Yes, to display all the records. (including empty (blank) search fields)
Search Criteria - Allows to use the commands SQL AND or "OR" in the search criteria;
Horizontal Alignment- Define the position to align the search form horizontally;
Margins - Define the search form margins ;
Display Condition - Display search condition so that the user can choose an option.
Keep Values - When enbaled the values of the last filter are saved and displayed when the user
return the search screen.
Preserver fields and Orders - Determine which values to keep to each search form.
Table Width - Define the search form HTML width value.
Use Iframe - When enbaled it displays the search form and results in the same window , in two
FRAMES, one above of the other.
Initial State - When enbaled it displays initially the filter with grid inside of the located iframe below
the filter. This option is associate To use Iframe.
Iframe Height - Height in pixels of the serach form results iframe. This option is associate To use
Iframe.
Case Sensitive - Considers Case Sensitive.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Required Fields
Define the required fields in the application.
Image 1: Required Fields Interface.
A marker (*) is displayed beside the field in the generated application. The required fields are validated
and a message is displayed if the field is empty.
Markers Positioning - Where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field.
Display message - Displays or not a message upon validation.
Search Criteria
Allows to define filter options (SQL) for each field. The left list displays the fields and the right list has the
filter options. To select options click on one option (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains, ...) and click on
"Turn On / Off" button.
Buttons:
Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts:superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons
Figure1: Toolbar Interface.
Attributes:
Toolbar (top / bottom) - Select the buttons that are displayed in the search toolbar. Use the arrows
on the right side of the button selection box to order the toolbar buttons.
Buttons Settings
Attributes:
Access Keys - Define the access keys shortcuts.
Options
Figure3: Options Interface.
Attributes:
Buttons Position(Top/Bottom) - Positioning of the buttons on the Top and Bottom toolbars.
Save Criteria
This resource allows to organize search profiles, it creates the option Save filter in the Search
application, so it is possible to save a search to be used afterwards. Rules can be added. With this
feature is possible to save searches by user login.
Figure1: Save Criteria Interface.
Figure2: Save Criteria Interface.
Log
application.
Options:
Sql
This module is used to edit the Search application SQL.
Image1: SQL Settings Interface.
Attributes:
SQL Select Statement - Shows the SQL Select statement that is being used.
SQL Preparation - Allows to execute a SQL command (e.g:: procedure), before the execution of
SQL Select Statement (if necessary).
Connection - Displays connection name used for that application.
Variable for Table - Variable name used for replacing the table name. Also inform the part of the
table name that will be changed by the contents of the variable.
Image2:Variable for Table Interface.
Fields Variable - Variables for substitution of the field names of the application. For each
dynamically determined field, enter the name of the variable and the field that will be substituted.
Security
Attribute:
accessed.
examples below.
userid.
}
}
else{
}

Layout
Overview
Blocks

below.
Attributes:


Add New Block


Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Edit Block
Click

Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Layout Settings

Attributes:
Header And Footer
HEADER
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Events
Events
Image 1: Searchs Event Interface.
onApplicationInit - Occurs when the application is initiated.

onScriptInit - Occurs every time the application is loaded.
onRefresh- Occurs when the application is loaded.
onValidate - Occurs when a validation is carried through.
onSave - Occurs when the application is saved.
Fields
Overview
It shows just selected fields in the Search ("SEARCH->SELECT FIELDS).
To each field we can define a lot of attributes. When selecting a data type, the edit page is refreshed to
show specific seetings to each data type. These types are:
Text
Integer
Currency
Decimal
Date
Time
Date and Time
Select
Double Select
CheckBox
Radio
Text Auto-Complete
Number Auto-Complete
New Field
that will be added.
Text
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a text it accepts letters,
Width - Define the field width.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Integer
Image1:Interface of General Configuration.
Atributos:
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
VALUES FORMAT
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Currency

VALUES FORMAT

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Decimal

VALUES FORMAT

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).

Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date

VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Display - Allow to select the fielddisplay format.
Display Format - Allow to display beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.
Display Calendar - Allow to display beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Time

VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Display- Allow to select the field display format.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date And Time

VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Display - Allow to select the display format of the field.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Select
General Settings
Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters,
database as nm_date_hour,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That
Maximum Size - Maximum field size
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

on the SQL command.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single value
Multiple Values
selected.
statement.
lookup value
project.
current project.

Attributes:
Single Value
lookup settings.


semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
S
M
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2


Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music


selected.
statement.
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Double Select
General Settings
Figure1: General Settings
Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection
Label Search - Allow to define the field title in the filter.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Attributes :
two fields.
semicolon ( ; ).
Lookup Value
project.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Checkbox
General Settings
Attributes:
marking object.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Attributes:
two fields.
semicolon ( ; ).
parameter.
Lookup Value

Attributes :
Single Value


semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
S
M
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2


Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music


parameter.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Radio

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method

database table.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single column Radio
title is selected.
Lookup Value
project.

Attributes :

selected.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Text Auto-complete
AUTO-COMPLETE TEXT

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
AUTO-COMPLETE NUMBER

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Application
Settings
Figure1: Settings Interface
Attributes:
Application Code - Determine the application name. It can be renamed through the main menu.
Description - This field can be used to describe the application objectives.
Localization - Generated application language , all the hints and messages are displayed in
selected language.
Share location variable - Shares location with other applications based on the session values
Share theme variable - Shares themes with other applications based on the session values
Edit Project - Allows other users of the group edit the application.
Timeout- Execution timeout in seconds. Zero assume the PHP default value.
HelpCase Link - Associate a this application to a project documentation page.
Use Enter to tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Figure2: Error Settings Interface .
Attributes:
Error Position - Error Position in the application. Values: right, left, above and below.>
Show the Error Title in the application - Display the error message in the application.
Show the Error Title in the field - Display the error message in thefield.
Error Title - Error message Title in the application.
>Script Error - Display script information where the error occurred.
SQL Error - Show the SQL command in the error.
Debug Mode - To run the application in debug mode, showing all SQL commands used in that
application.
Navigation
Attributes:
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:

displayed.
Link
Used to link the Search form with Form applications.
There are two link types available in a Search:
Application - Used to link to a Form application. Next to each record an icon
link to a Form application.
Capture - Used to get a value from a Grid application record to the field.
Image1: New Link Menu
Select the link type.
Image2: Linking between Applications-Link Type Interface.
Link a Search with a Form application.

The screen bellow displays all applications available in the project.
Image3: LinkbetweenApplications - Application List Interface.
In Image4 the Search fields must be associated with the Form fields.
is displayed to
Image4: LinkbetweenApplications - Parameters Interface .
In the screen below, Link Properties enter the link attributes.
Link Properties:
Link Operation Mode - Define how the linked Form will be displayed.
"Open in the same Window" - Open the linked application in the same window.
"Open in another Window" - Open the linked application in another window.
"Open in Iframe" - Open the form in the same window, but in a different frame(Below).
"Open in Parent" - Open the form in the same window, but in the frame where is calling the Search.
"Modal" - Open the Form in a Modal window.
Form Property
Enable or Disable buttons in the target Form application.
Create and displays an icon beside the field. The icon allows to retrieve the field a value from a
Grid Application record.
Image6: Grid Search with link of type capture in the field.
Select a Grid application.
Image8:Application List Interface.

Image9 displays the parameters definition. It shows which fields or variables should receive parameters to execute the Grid. The parameters options are:
Fixed - Use the text box to informa a fixed value or a variable.

Empty - Choose this option to pass no value to the Grid.
Image9: Parameter definition Interface
Image10: Links created.
Actions
Properties
Link
Editing the link properties.

Edit a Link
Delete
Delete a link
In the link properties you can modify the link to modal.
Image11: Link properties
Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
Methods
'Var' button:

button:

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :
Libraries
==> Libraries.
Report Pdf Applications

Overview
Report PDF application.
This application is used to format PDF files, it is possible to build PDF files by defining each fields
position on the generated report. This application type is based on SELECT statements.
Picture1: PDF Report in action.
Report
Settings
Attributes:
PDF Orientation - Define the report page orientation: Landscape or Portrait.
Type:
Records per Page: Used to print a record on a single page.
Records per Line: Used to display the records as a conventional grid.
PDF measure unit - Unit used in printing format-: points, millimeters, centimeters and counts.
PDF format - Output print (paper) size.
PDF Destination: Send the output to de selected destination:
Browser: Open the pdf file immediately on a browser. Ex.: myfile.pdf
Download: Creates a link to download the file, in this case you must specify the filename.
Server: The pdf files are stored on the server side specified by the path. Ex.:c:\folder\file.pdf
Upper Margin - Define the pdf upper margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf
report.
Bottom Margin - Define the pdf bottom margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your
pdf report.
Right Margin - Define the pdf right margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf
report.
Left Margin - Define the pdf left margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report.
Create Search - Generate a filter form displayed before running your pdf application.
Page Amount - Set the amount of pages on the pdf report.
Amount of columns - Set the number of columns by page.

Columns width - Set the columns width.
Columns height - Set the columns height.
Font And Background
Here you can define some layout settings such as font, images, help rulers.
Font face - Font face for your pdf report.

Text Font size - Font size.
Text color - Text Color.
Text font style - Bold, Italic, Underlined.
Show ruler - A useful X & Y ruler will be displayed on you pdf to help you with the coordinates
settings.
Image - Background Image for your report.
Width - Image width.
Height - Image Height.
Position X - Where, on X axis, the image will be position.
Position Y - Where, on Y axis, the image will be position.
To print - Print the file directly.
Sql
Figure1: Interface of SQL Configuration
SQL Select Statement - Displays the SQL select command.

Tip: The user can use the SQL Builder for fast assembly of the command.
SQL Preparation - Enter the SQL commands or procedure names to be executed before the
application main select.
Connection - Shows the connection name (database) that the application is using, this connection
can be changed for another that has the same tables (SQL).
Use Customized Message - Allows defining the message to be shown if the grid do not return a
record (EOF).
No Records Message - Message to be shown. Field associated to Use Customized Message.
Font Face - Font name used, click on the icon and choose a font. Field associated to Use
Customized Message.
Font Size - Choose the font size. Field associated to Use Customized Message.
Font color - Font color. Field associated to Use Customized Message.
Variable for table - Table name variable.
Note: In the first field should be filled with the variable name. The second field must be filled with
part of the table name to be replaced.
Fields Variables - Variable to replace select field name.
Note: In the first field must be filled in the name of the variable in the second field should be
selected the name of the field to be replaced.
Security
Attribute:
accessed.
examples below.
userid.
}
}
else{
}

Pdf Layout
Interface
Interface to define where each field is displayed on the PDF report.

Attributes:
Seq - Cell number. It is automatically set by the interface.
Cell - Cell name.
Pos X - Defines the field position, on X (horizontal) axis.
Pos Y - Defines the field position, on Y (vertical) axis.
Width - Cell's width.
Alignment - Cell's Horizontal Alignment.
Field - Data displayed on the cell.
Code
Use a set of commands to manipulate the pdf report.
The Report PDF application is based on the fpdf class. The class methods are available to the user as
well macros listed in the table bellow. Use the object $pdf with the selected method, exemplo: $pdf>AcceptPageBreak(parameters);
Click here to access the FDPF a documentation.
Method FPDF
Macro ScriptCase
Description
AcceptPageBreak sc_pdf_accept_page_break Accept an automatic page break.
AddFont
sc_pdf_add_font
Add new font.
AddLink
sc_pdf_add_link
Create internal link.
AddPage
sc_pdf_add_page
Add new page.
AliasNbPages
sc_pdf_alias_nb_pages
Define alias to page number.
Cell
sc_pdf_cell
Print cell.
Close
sc_pdf_close:
close the document.
error
sc_pdf_error
Display error message.
Footer
sc_pdf
footer.
GetStringWidth
sc_pdf_get_string_length
Calculate string seize.
GetX
sc_pdf_get_x
Returns X position.
GetY
sc_pdf_get_y
Returns Y position .
Header
sc_pdf_header
header.
Image
sc_pdf_image
Puts an image on the page.
Line
sc_pdf_line
Draws a line.
Link
sc_pdf_link
Inserts link.
Ln
sc_pdf_ln
ConImagethe line break.
MultiCell
sc_pdf_multi_cell
print text with line break.
Output
sc_pdf_output
Saves or send a document.
PageNo
sc_pdf_page_no
Page number.
Rect
sc_pdf_rect
Draws a rectangle.
SetAuthor
sc_pdf_set_author
Define document author.
SetAutoPageBreaksc_pdf_set_auto_page_breakActivates/deactivates automatic page
break.
SetCompression sc_pdf_set_compression
Turns on/off page compression.
SetCreator
sc_pdf_set_creator
Define document creator.
SetDisplayMode sc_pdf_set_display_mode
Define display mode.
SetDrawColor
sc_pdf_set_draw_color
Define the color used to picture.
SetFillColor
sc_pdf_set_fill_color
Define fill color.
SetFont
sc_pdf_set_font
Define font settings.
SetFontSize
sc_pdf_set_font_size
Define font size.
SetKeywords
SetLeftMargin
SetLineWidth
SetLink
SetMargins
SetRightMargin
SetSubject
SetTextColor
SetTitle
SetTopMargin
SetX
SetXY
SetY
Text
Write
sc_pdf_set_keywords
sc_pdf_set_left_margin
sc_pdf_set_line_width
sc_pdf_set_link
sc_pdf_set_margins
sc_pdf_set_right_margin
sc_pdf_set_subject
sc_pdf_set_text_color
sc_pdf_set_title
sc_pdf_set_top_margin
sc_pdf_set_x
sc_pdf_set_xy
sc_pdf_set_y
sc_pdf_text
sc_pdf_write
Set document keywords.

Define left margin .
Define line width.
Set internal link.
Define margins.
Define right margin.
Define subject.
Define text color.
Define document title.
Define top margin.
Define X position.
Define XY position.
Define Y position.
Print string.
Print characters string.
Positioning
Interface to define the field display sequence (use the arrows to set a field position).
Fields
Fields
In this sessions is display toConfigureonly the grid selected in the menu "GRID - SELECT FIELDS ".
Field - field is possible to define the attributes. The edit page is re-loaded to display/configure each field
specific attributes depending on field type.
Text
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type text it accepts letters, numbers and special
characters.
Case Settings - Convert the field font case. All upper case, if the select option is Upper Case, all
lower case if the select option is Lower Case, only first letter of first word to upper case, if the select
option is Capitalize first word, first letter of each word to upper case if the select option is Capitalize
all word.
HTML Content - Define the field content as HTML. An HTML Content field process html tags.
Grid Mask - Define the field grid mask. For example, to format a phone number with parentheses
and dashes. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z", where X enable zero and Z disable zero.
SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Value
M
Start
1
Size
1
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
8
16
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Multiple Lines Text
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type multiple lines text is basically a text box.
Case Settings - Convert the field font case. All upper case, if the select option is Upper Case, all
lower case if the select option is Lower Case, only first letter of first word to upper case, if the select
option is Capitalize first word, first letter of each word to upper case if the select option is Capitalize
all words.
HTML Content - Define the field content as HTML. An HTML Content field process html tags.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.

Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Lookup
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Integer
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An integer type field accepts only integers.
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. If No is selected the
attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Negative Sign and Negative format of number are
displayed.(See regional settings).
Negative Sign- Define the character used to display negative values.
Negative Color - Define a different font color to negative values.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Lookup
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Decimal
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A decimal type field accepts decimal values.
Label - Define the field title.
Grid Mask - Define the field grid mask. For example, to format a phone number with
parentheses and dashes. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z", where X enable zero and
Z disable zero.
Do Not Repeat Value - Skip repeated information displaying a field value only once.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Applies regional settings to the field. To learn more about regional settings
click here.
Negative Color - Negative value's color.
Complete with Zeros - Complete the field value with zeros.. Example: The value is R$ 125,50, with
number of decimals digits defined to 3 and the option Complete with Zeros selected to Yes the
valued displayed is R$ 125,500.
Decimal Precision - Field's Decimal precision.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music

Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Currency
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Applies regional settings to the field.

To learn more about regional settings click here.
Currency Format - Display field with currency format.
Negative Color - Negative value's color.
Complete with Zeros - Complete the field value with zeros.. Example: The value is R$ 125,50, with
number of decimals digits defined to 3 and the option Complete with Zeros selected to Yes the
valued displayed is R$ 125,500.
Decimal Precision - Field's Decimal precision.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Html Image
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An HTML IMAGE field is used for images processing.
Image - Search images to display. Use the icons to select between scriptcase standard available
images or upload an image from any directory.
Border - Image border size.
Width - Image width size. May be expressed in percent or pixels.
Height - Image height size. May be expressed in percent or pixels.
Date
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type Date is formatted as in the option Values
format (Image2).
Values Format
Image2: Values Format.
click here.
Display - Format of the field display.
Internal Format - Field format for database storage.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Time
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type Time is formatted as in the option Values
format (Image2).
Values Format
Image2: Values Format.
Regional Settings - Applies regional settings to the field.

To learn more about regional settings click here.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Date And Time
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type Date and Time is formatted as in the
option Values format (Image2).
Values Format
click here.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Image (database)
IMAGE (DATABASE)
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An Image (Database) field process images stored in
binary format. in the database.
Image Height - Image height in pixels.
Image width - Image width in pixels.
Maintain aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.
Open in another window - Open the original image in another window.
Image (file Name)
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An Image (File Name ) field process images.
Image Height - Image height in pixels.
Image width - Image width in pixels.
Maintain aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.
Open in another window - Open the original image in another window.
SubFolder - SubFolder where the files are stored.
Image Caching - Time in minutes the image cache will be kept in the server before being deleted.
Document (database)
Image1: Field General Settings Interface
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A Document (Database) field creates a link to each
document in the database.
Display Icon - Display the file type icon.
File Name - Field that contains document's file name, it will be stored on the database.
SQLType - Determine the field type in database.
Attributes:
Data Type - Define Document (File Name) field creates a link to each document.
Display Icon - Display the file type icon.
File Name - Field that contains document's file name, it will be stored on the database.
Credit Card Number
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A Card field is formatted and validate accordingly.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.

Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
E-mail
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An E-mail field display an icon linking to outlook.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".
value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Url
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An URL field display an linking icon.
Other Page - Open link in another page.
Grid Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup

Attributes :
{grid_field}".

value.
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both

Attributes :
Single Value


size.
Label
Male
Female
Married
Single
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
C
S
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2

Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music
Attributed
Value
1
2
Lookup
Description
Sports
Movies
4
8
16
Books
Traveling
Music
Use lookup in:
Grid

, CSV e RTF).
Both
Separated by.
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes:
Barcode
Values Format interface.
Attributes:
Type - Type of bar code.
Output - Image format output.
DPI - Image quality.
Thickness - Image height.
Resolution - Resolution of the image.
Rotation - Rotate image.
Font - Barcode text font.
Display Settings
Display Settings interface.
Attributes:
Font Style - Used to select the font style that will be applied to the application object.
Style of the font - Style of the text font displayed in the pdf (Bold, Italic, Underline).
Number of characters - Number of characters to be displayed.
Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (left, right, center or
justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (top, middle or bottom).
Background Image - Background image Field.
Line Break - Allow line breaks.
Background Color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title
Height (px) - Sets the title height in pixels.
Title Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (left, right or
center).
Title Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (top, middle or
bottom).
New Field Subselect
New SubSelect Field

This resource is very useful when you need to make a master-detail report, for example Categories and
Products.
You must create a new "Subselect" field.
Step1:Create a new field.
Step2:Choose the "Subselect" type.

For this field type we can set up the following parameters:
Increment - The space between two lines.
Connection - Detail is stored on another database
Table - To write the SQL instruction to retrieve the data.
Subselect - SQL example SELECT ProdName, PriceUnit, UnitsStored FROM adm_products
where categoryID = {categoyid} Note the parameter {categoryid} passed.
Now, on the fields list you can expand the SubSelect Field to see it?s 'fields'.
Events
Events
If you need do something more specific on you reports, you can program it, using events. For example if
you want to sum two fields and move this result to another one, before printing the record, just edit the
event OnRecord and write a code similar to this:
{field_c} = {field_b} + {field_a};
Here you are free to program PHP, just remember the character { } , around the field name to make
reference the local variables, using [ ], you are making reference to global variables.
onApplicationInit - Occurs when the application is initiated.
onScriptInit - Occurs every time the application is loaded.
onRecord - This event is executed before printing each record.
onHeader - This event is executed immediately before printing the header. Use this event, for example,
to print a calculated value in the header.
onFooter - This event is used to show some calculated value on the footer.
Log
application.
Options:
Search
Settings
Define all Search form attributes.
Figure1: Search Settings Interface.

Attributes
Empty Search - Yes, display all records, if search fields are empty. No, no register is
displayed.
Search Criteria - Allows to select the SQL command AND or OR to define the search criteria
to be used.
Horizontal Alignment - Define the search form horizontal alignment.
Vertical Alignment - Define the search form vertical alignment.
Margins - Define the search form position (margins).
Display Condition - Display search condition so that the user can choose an option. AND or
OR appears in the search form for selection.
Keep Values - When activated the values of the last search are kept and shown when the user
return the search screen.
Preserver fields and Orders - Allows the end user to select form order.
Table width - Define the search form HTML width value.
Table Width Unit - Unit used in width measurement.

Use Iframe - Display search form and the search results in the same browser window, in two
FRAMES, one above the other.
Initial State - Display search first the grid in the iframe positioned below the search. Or displays
just the search . This option is associated to Using Iframe.
Iframe Height - Iframe height in pixels where the data retrieved by the search is displayed. This
option is associated to Using Iframe.
Case Sensitive - Define the search operation mode.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Search Criteria
Allows to define search options (SQL) for each field. The left list displays the fields and the right list has
the search options. To select options click on the option (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains, ...) and click
on "Turn On / Off" button.
Buttons:
Show the condition - This option is displayed just if a field has only one option selected. It allows
do not display the criteria beside the field.
Toolbar
Image1: Search Toolbar Interface.
Attributes:
Toolbar (Top / Bottom) - Select the buttons displayed in the filter toolbars and the buttons position.
Buttons Position (Top / Bottom) - Define the buttons alignment in the toolbar.
buttons Settings
Attributes:
Hint - Define a hint in the button.
Access Key - Allows to define acess keys shortcuts.
Rules Edit
Save criteria
This resource allows to organize search profiles. It creates the option Save criteria in the Search
application, so it is possible to save a search to be used afterwards. Rules can be added, with this
feature is possible to save searches by user login.
Image1: Save Criteria Interface.
Image2: New/Edit Rules Interface.
Layout
Overview
Blocks

below.
Attributes:


Add New Block


Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Edit Block
Click

Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Display Settings
Layout Settings

Attributes:
Header
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Events
In ScriptCase was incorporated the concept of Events in the applications, making possible a more
standard development. It was also created a documentation system in the ScriptCase to display the
ScriptCase macros that have reference to each selected event.
onScriptInit - This event is executed once, before the execution of the main select of the application. In
this scope, normally, are executed the macros that modify the select, such as: sc_select_field,
sc_select_order, sc_select_where(add) and etc.
onRefresh - Occurs when the application is loaded.
onValidate - Occurs when a validation is performed.
onSave - Occurs when the application is saved.
Fields
Overview
It shows just selected fields in the Search ("GRID->SELECT FIELDS).
To each field we can define a lot of attributes. When selecting a data type, the edit page is refreshed to
show specific seetings to each data type. These types are:
New Field
that will be added.
Text
Attributes:
Use same label used on the Grid- This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is
Width- Field Size.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Convert Letter- Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. All in capital letters, if the
chosen option is Uppercase, all in small letters, if the chosen option is Lowercase. The first letter of
the first word in capital letter, if the chosen option is Uppercase first word, it is important to point out
that the other words do not receive this configuration. The first letter of all word in capital letters, if
the chosen option is Uppercase all words.
Submit on OnChange - Allow when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the
field.
Show Condition - Allow when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Integer
Figure1: Interface of General Configuration.

Use same Label on the Gridl -This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is
SQL Type - Define the SQL Type of the field.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
VALUES FORMAT
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).

Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Decimal

Label field- Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
VALUES FORMAT


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Currency
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
VALUES FORMAT


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).

Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date
database as nm_date,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the
label is a field nickname in the application layer.
Use Gird Label -This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid,
in this case the option filter label can't be used.
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Exibition - Allow to select the exhibition format of the field.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Time
database as nm_hour,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Hour. That is, the
label is a field nickname in the application layer.
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Exhibition - Allow to select the exhibition format of the field.
Show Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.
Show Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection
of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date And Time
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Exhibition - Allow to select the exhibition format of the field.
Show Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.
Show Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection
of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Select
Interface.
Attributes:
Search Label- Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the
Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

on the SQL command.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single value
Multiple Values
selected.
statement.
lookup value
project.
current project.

Attributes:
Single Value
lookup settings.


semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
S
M
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2


Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music


selected.
statement.
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Double Select
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Attributes :
two fields.
semicolon ( ; ).
Lookup Value
project.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Checkbox
Attributes:
marking object.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Attributes:
two fields.
semicolon ( ; ).
parameter.
Lookup Value

Attributes :
Single Value

semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
Value
M
F
S
M
SP
MO
BO
TR
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2


Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
Description
1
Sports
2
4
8
16
Movies
Books
Traveling
Music


parameter.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Radio
Attributes:
Data Type - Radio is an object which allows the selection fof just an information of all that are
shown by it.
Filter Label - Allow to define the field title in the filter.
Use Grid Label - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
Lookup Method
After Lookup

database table.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single column Radio
title is selected.
Lookup Value
project.

Attributes :

selected.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Grid Fields
Attributes:
Data type - Search Fields is a new resource which allow the selection of the fields that will be
part of the grid body of the search.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Sorting
Attributes:
Tipo do Dados - "Ordenao dos Campos" um novo recurso que permite de sejam selecionados
os ordem campos ( clausula ORDER BY) que fazem parte do corpo da GRID da Consulta.
Height - Allow to determine the field height.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS

Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Text Auto-complete
AUTO-COMPLETE TEXT
Figure1: Interface of General Configuration of the field.
Attributes:
Label field - Allow when activated to show the field as a label, do not allowing the data input.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Image1: Interface of General Configuration of the field.
Attributes:
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
the field.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Application
Settings
Define the common ScriptCase applications attributes. See below the attributes description:
Attributes:
Application code - Application code determinated in the moment of the application creation, this
Application images - Specific images used by this application.
Localization - Generated application language , all the hints and messages are displayed in
selected language.
Script Error - Displays the script and the line where the error occurred.
SQL Error - Displays the SQL command which originated the error.
Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Command in the moment of
its using.
Folder - Folder where the application is stored in the workspace.

Edit Project -Allows other group users to edit the application.
Timeout - Time of execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of the PHP.
HelpCase Link -Associate a this application to a project documentation page.
Navigation
Attributes:
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


displayed.
Programming
Attributes
Attributes:
Methods
'Var' button:

button:

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :
Libraries
==> Libraries.
Calendar Applications
Overview
Calendar
A calendar is an organizer application for social, religious, commercial, or administrative purposes. The
main concept is defined time periods, typically days, weeks, months, and years.
Calendar for Month

This option shows all days in a selected month. The record title is displayed in the day slot.
Image1: Calendar for a month application interface.
Calendar for Day

This option shows all hours in a selected day. The record title is displayed in the hour line.
Image2: >Calendar for a day application interface.
Calendar for Week

This option shows all days in a selected week. The record title is displayed in the hour line and day
columm cell.
Image3:Calendar for a week application interface.
Creating or Editing the record.

Upon selecting day and hour, double click in calendar to open the form to insert a new schedule.
Image4:Editing record in calendar application.
Settings
Settings
Use this option to define the application.
Image1: Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Ajax - Allows to activate the use of ajax resources (Ajax Events, Auto-complete text, etc.) in the
generated application.
Horizontal Alignment - Allows to define the application horizontal alignment in the page.
Margins - Defines the application margins (up, down, right and left).
Table Width - Application width value. The ScriptCase applications are generated in the HTML
standard, and are organized in tables, lines and cells. This parameter defines the most external
application table width.
Table Width Unit- Measurement unit used in table width defined in the previous item: percentage,
pixel or automatic. When using percentage is generated a HTML with the format <TABLE
WIDITH="70%"> (as an example with 70 as the field width input). In pixel, the generated html to the
same application has the tag <TABLE WIDITH="70px">. For the automatic option the '%' or 'px' is
omitted and the browser will automatically dimension the table.
Width - Iframe form width. *
Height - Iframe form height. *
* The form application that insert a new schedule in calendar application, open in modal iframe on top of
calendar.
Edit Fields
The Edit Fields options was included to Scriptcase on the version six, this new menu option groups the
most commonly used field configuration for all fields at the same place.
Figure 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options:
1 - Fields - This column is used to show the field's name.
2 - Label - Column to edit the field's label displayed in the generated application.
3 - Data type - This allows the change of the field's type. Select the desired data type from the
dropdown box.
4 - Form option. Not available for Grid Applications
4.1 - New - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when entering a new
record (Addition mode).
4.2 - Update - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when editing a
record (Edition mode).
4.3 - Read-Only - Defines if the field will become a read-only field, this way it cannot be edited.
4.4 - Required - Defines if the field will become a required field.
4.5 - PK - Will set a field or fields as a primary key for the application. If only one field is
selected it will work as a regular primary key, if two or more fields were selected it will work as a
composite key.
4.6 - DB Value (Insert) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the
selected field when inserting a new record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP. This
option allows you to set a default value to the field.
4.7 - DB Value (Update) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the
selected field when updating a record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP.
5 - Page - Indicates that there is a Page in the application. An application may have multiple pages,
which are arranged as high-level tabs. Each page can contain one or more blocks.
6 - Block - Indicates that there is a Block in the application.
7 - Page: Fields not shown - This contains all fields that will not be displayed in the generated
application.
Note: Please note that each line is draggable. This allows you to define the position of fields, blocks and pages by dragging fields up or down to a different block
or page. Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages.
Display
Options:
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Unique Key
It provides unique key validation at web server side.
Image 1: Unique Fields Interface.
Toolbar
Image1: Interface of toolbar.
Attributes:
Navigation - Displays the buttons used to navigate on the form (first, previous, next, last, exit ). The
Update - Displays the buttons used to modify recorded information on the form (insert, update,
delete) . The selection of these buttons vary according to the form application.
Buttons Settings
Attributes:

Label - Defines the label displayed on the button.
Hint - Defines a hint to the button.
Access Key - Allows to define fast access keys using the keyboard.
OPTIONS
Image3: Options Interface.
Attributes:
JS Formatting - Use automatic filled format .
Help by Block - Group help by block. Is possible to define a help text to each field and an icon is
displayed in the block title bar linking to the help page.
General Help - "Consolidates" all field help in a unique page linking to the help page.
Log
application.
Options:
Sql
Define the attributes relative to the connection to the table used by the form. Define primary key, filters
and ordinances for the form.
Interface
Image1: SQL Settings
Select primary key fields - In this function it is displayed a combobox object with an asterisks that
indicate what are the fields that are SQL table primary key fields . In the majority of cases, the
Scriptcase identifies it. For cases that are not identifiable by the Scriptcase the user must use the
buttons to select the field as key, note:
On/Off Button - Select/unselect the field as primary key displaying an asterisk at its left side.
All Button - Defines all fields as primary key.
None - Defines that no field is primary key (unselect all). Normally it is used to clean all
definitions of the On/Off and restart the process.
Ordinance Buttons - Allows to order the primary key fields. To order click on the field and use
the arrows.
Where Condition - Enter the WHERE to retrieve the records to edit.

Order By - Enter the ORDER BY clause to determine the order that the records are displayed.
When the navigation is used by default, the order is determinated by the primary key.
Connection -Displays the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution,
this connection can be replaced by another that have the same tables (SQL).
Table Name - Table name that the form application is using.
Variable for Table - Fields to allow to be replaced part of the table name defined in the select,
before the execution.
Note: In the first field enter the variable name. In the second field enter the part of the table name to be replaced.
Case Sensitive - Set it to "No" only if the database is configured for case-sensitive and it is desired
that the filter does not respect this setting.
Procedures
Configures a form application to use Stored Procedure (defined by the database) for adding, updating,
and excluding information. When not configured to use procedures the default is to use Scriptcase
standards for the commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
See below step-by-step implementation for Stored Procedure Database Insertion.
Image1: Stored Procedures Interface
1 - Mark the option: I want to use Procedure to do INSERT. Enter the procedure name and the
amount of parameters.
Image2: Defining procedure parameters.
2- Define the fields that reference to the Stored Procedure parameters and each parameter type (input or
output). Click on the button save to complete this process.
Image3: Passing values to the Stored Procedure.
Javascript
Attributes:
Choose event - In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field, for whom we
Edit Javascript

browsers.
}
}
OnBlur Example:
{
}
onChange examples:
}
{
}
{
}
{
}
onMouseOut example:
Dependencies
A resource to allow to link related tables, defining a dependency between tables. For example, the table
of orders and items, removing a record from the table of orders, all its items also have to be removed.
See an example using this resource below.
1- First define a new dependence. In this example we will create an dependency between
adm_suppliers_products (Dependent table) with the table adm_supplier (Actual application). Click on the
button new dependency to begin.
2 - Select the dependent table and inform the amount of fields related to the father and child table. In
this example only one field is related : the supplier code.
3 - Select the keys (linking fields) : adm_suppliers -> supplierID - adm_suppliers_products ->supplierID.
4 - Click on the button generate Scripts to define the dependence rule.
5 - Select the script type to be generated, the position of the ScriptCase in the Event (onBeforeDelete).
Click on the button Generate to complete this process.
Security
Attribute:
accessed.
examples below.
userid.
}
}
else{
}

CAPTCHA
Read more:

image.
in the application.
Fields
Overview
This interface allows to inform the validation rules and formatting of each form field. The configuration of
the form fields is done by clicking on the field to be formated, in the existing list, in the left side of the
Calendar folder.
Image1: List of fields.

The system opens a screen at the right side of this list, where the field Data type is attributed by
ScriptCase according to SQL table definition. For each Data type a diferent list of characteristics is
presented. Example: A field of type Text have diferent characteristics of a field of date type, the
formatting should be set according to the chosen type.
Text
General Settings
Attributes:
button.

Text field
Password field
applications.
merged:
9
A
*

the user.
Examples:
Field
Telephone
number
Software Key
(Only letters)
Software Key
(Letters and
Numbers)
Car Plate
Scriptcase's
serial key
Multiple Masks
(Telephone)
Mask
+99 99 9999 9999
AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA
****-****-****-****
Value entered
123456789012
Value formatted
+12 34 5678 9012
AAA - 9999
QWE1234
QWE - 1234
A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111****
DG2P
9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
Case Settings - Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. All in capital letters, if the
chosen option is Uppercase, all lower case, if the chosen option is Lowercase. The first letter of the
first word in capital letter, if the chosen option is Uppercase first word, it is important to point out that
the other words do not receive this configuration. The first letter of all word in capital letters, if the
chosen option is Uppercase all words
Minimum Size - Allow to define the minimum size that the field accepts.
Maximum Size - Allow to define the maximum size that the field accepts.
Allowed Characters - Allow to select a set of valid characters. Option All defines that field will
accept any character (letters, space, number, period, comma, accent). The option Selected allows
to select, add or remove specific types of desired characters.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Multiple Lines Text
General Settings
Image1:General SettingsInterface.
Attributes:
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
Case Settings - Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. All in capital letters, if the
chosen option is Uppercase, all lower case, if the chosen option is Lowercase. The first letter of the
first word in capital letter, if the chosen option is Uppercase first word, it is important to point out that
the other words do not receive this configuration. The first letter of all word in capital letters, if the
chosen option is Uppercase all words.
Minimum size - Allow to define the minimum size that the field accepts.
Maximum size - Allow to define the maximum size that the field accepts.
Allowed Characters - Allow to select a set of valid characters. Option All defines that field will
accept any character (letters, space, number, period, comma, accent). The option Selected allows
to select, add or remove specific types of desired characters.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS

Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Integer
General Settings

Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accept only
integer numbers.
button.

applications.
merged:
9
A
*

the user.
Examples:
Field
Telephone
number
Software Key
(Only letters)
Software Key
(Letters and
Numbers)
Car Plate
Scriptcase's
serial key
Multiple Masks
(Telephone)
Mask
+99 99 9999 9999
AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA
****-****-****-****
Value entered
123456789012
Value formatted
+12 34 5678 9012
AAA - 9999
QWE1234
QWE - 1234
A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111****
DG2P
9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
regional settings).
values.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Decimal
General Settings
Interface.
Attributes:
numbers.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Currency
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as value, it accept letters,
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format

DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type -Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date
rules.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
settings).
Minimum date:
options:
Maximum Date:
options:
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).

Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Time
General Settings
Image1:
General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type- Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific time
rules.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
settings).
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Date And Time
General Settings
Attributes:
specific date rules.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Format
Attributes:
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Image (database)
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Defines the field type. Fields type Image (Field Name) uses server stored images in
the. Note that the images are stored in the database as text.
Max File Size - Defines maximum field length.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Image(file Name)
IMAGE (FILE NAME)

General Settings

Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image (file name) type, it
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Document (database)
DOCUMENT(Database)
General Settings

Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Document it creates a link
for each existent document in the database.
File Name - Field that contains the document file name.
File Size - Defines the field that contains the file size.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
General Settings
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Credit Card Number

The ScriptCase provides credit card numbers validation routines in its applications. Currently
ScriptCase applications supports validation routines to handle AMERICAN EXPRESS, VISA,
MASTERCARD and DINER cards.
General Settings

Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it
is formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules.
button.

applications.
merged:
9
A
*

the user.
Examples:
Field
Telephone
number
Software Key
(Only letters)
Software Key
(Letters and
Numbers)
Car Plate
Scriptcase's
serial key
Multiple Masks
(Telephone)
Mask
+99 99 9999 9999
AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA
****-****-****-****
Value entered
123456789012
Value formatted
+12 34 5678 9012
AAA - 9999
QWE1234
QWE - 1234
A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111****
DG2P
9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
Without field label

attribute
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Credit Card
Define the Credit Card Company (flag). It relates to a Credit Card Field and is used to validate
information according to the specific company rules.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Defines the application field type.
applications.
Without field label

attribute
Values Formats
Figure2:
Attributes:
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
E-mail
General Settings

Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed
by its side, clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader. It validates the field value according to
standard e-mail formats.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
Display Icon - Display an email icon by the field side

DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Url
General Settings

Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it is shown a link of
access.
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute

DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Html Color
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Color is shown
beside of the field an icon with a pallet of colors.
button.


applications.
Without field label

attribute
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Select
Use select object (combobox) in the field.
General Settings

Attributes:
Data type - The data type Select is a drop-down object which allow the selection of information
through a sliding window.
button.
applications.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup method

on the SQL command.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single value
Multiple Values
selected.
statement.
lookup value
project.
current project.

Attributes:
Single Value
lookup settings.


semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Value
M
F
S
Start
1
1
2
Size
1
1
1
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Traveling
M
SP
MO
BO
TR
2
3
3
3
3
1
2
2
2
2


Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music
Implicit
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Item Description
Sports
Movies
Traveling
Books
Music


selected.
statement.
lookup value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).

Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Double Select
Resource to display two values: A list with values to select and a list with selected values.
Attributes:
Data type - The data type double select is a drop-down object which allow the multiple selection
through two window of selection and a navigator between them( << < > >> ).
button.
applications.
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Attributes :
two fields.
semicolon ( ; ).
Lookup Value
project.
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Checkbox
Use checkbox object in the form field.
General Settings

Attributes:
Data type - The type checkbox is an object that allows the selection of one or more options (by
marking a box).
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Methods

Attributes:
two fields.
semicolon ( ; ).
parameter.
Lookup Value

Attributes :
Single Value


semicolon ( ; ).
Label
Male
Female
Single
Married
Sports
Movies
Books
Value
M
F
S
M
SP
MO
BO
Start
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
Size
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
Traveling
TR


Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
before saving.
table field is 3.
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music
Description
1
Sports
2
Movies
4
Books
8
Traveling
16
Music


parameter.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Radio
Use radio object in the field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The type radio is an object that allows the selection of only one information (from the
list shown).
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Before Lookup
After Lookup
Lookup Method

database table.
Attributes :
two fields.
Single column Radio
title is selected.
Lookup Value
project.

Attributes :
selected.
Lookup Value
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Text Auto-complete
where each item has a value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value must be
alpha-numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.
Figure1:General SettingsInterface.

button.

Text field
Password field
applications.
Without field label

attribute

Values Format
Attributes:
Uppercase
Lowercase
word
words

DATABASE VALUE
displayed

Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
where each item has a value and label associated. For the number Auto-Complete each item value must
be numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.

Attributes:
button.

applications.
Without field label

attribute

VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
DATABASE VALUE
displayed
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Html Image
Image1: General Configuration Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the fields is of the type html image, it allows to
insert in the field an image.
Image - Search the image that will must be shown. Choose it by using the icon Choose image
that have standard images or by using the icon Upload image that allows the choice of any
image.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Label
Image1: General Configuration Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is of the type label, it is shown as just
an output.
Text - Box where wil be informed the text that will be shown beside the field.
Use to reload - Transforms the text that was informed in the property Text, defined above, into a
link that reloads the form when it is clicked.
Positioning - Allow to position the form in the chosen block.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Html Editor
General Settings
Attributes:
characters.
Toolbar
Attributes:
Properties :
Top or Bottom.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:

justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Theme
General Settings
Attributes:
Localization
General Settings
Attributes:
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes:
Barcode
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Field CSS
Attributes:
justify).
Object Input CSS
Attributes:

or justify).
Help Settings
Attributes:
Help Type:
Layout
Overview
Application attributes and formatting resources such as visualization schemas, organizing fields in
blocks, define the values and the header format between others.
Pages
Blocks
Colors Schema
Header & Footer
Pages
An application page can be deifined as block container. For each application it is created a page with
default name pag1 . It is possible to create more pages. The pages are shown in the application in
tabs mode, where each tab has the blocks defined in Organization of Blocks.
Image1: Pages settings
interface.
See below an application example using two pages: General Data and Documents (see Image2).
Image2: Application using pages resources.
The application has a standard page, identified by pag1, that can be renamed, with the creation of new
pages. The use of pages is indicated when we have an application that involves a lot of table fields
(more than 20 for example).
An application can have a lot of pages, and in each of them, you can include a lot of blocks.
Image3:Page Settings Interface.
To include a new page, just fill the boxex above the button Insert, in the first field fill the page name and
in the second field select the image that will be presented as folder icon.
To delete a page, just click on the delete button.
Attributes:
Font Name - Select the font in the existing list, or enter a font name to be used in the
application.
Font Size - Enter the font size.
Select font Color- Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define
the selected text color.
Select background Color - Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information
to define the selected text background color.
Non selected font Color - Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to
define the non selected tab font color.
Non selected background Color -Select the color from a color palette or enter the color
information to define the non selected tab background color.
Blocks

below.
Attributes:


Add New Block


Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Edit Block
Click

Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Layout Settings
Layout Settings
Figure1: Layout Settings Interface.

Define the application layout.
Attributes:
Header Template - Allows to choose the template to compose the application header.
Footer Template - Allows to choose the template to compose the application footer.
Theme - Choose from the available themes. The application visual mode (color, fonts, etc.) is
loaded.
Header & Footer
HEADER
Template".
types below:
.
[v_name].
FOOTER
Footer Template".
types below:
the footer line.
to see all the
.
[v_name].
Events
Events
onInit - This event runs when the application is loading.
onRefresh - This event runs to reload the application page
onValidate - This event runs by clicking on the validation (OK, Update, Insert, Delete, Filter)
depending on application.
onBeforeInsert - This event runs after the insertion.
onAfterInsert - This event runs after the insertion.
onBeforeUpdate - This event runs before updating a record.
onAfterUpdate - This event runs after updating a record.
onBeforeDelete - This event is executed before the deletion.
onAfterDelete - This event runs after the deletion.
onLoad - This event occurs when the page is loaded, ie when navigating from one record to
another, clicking on the buttons (new, insert, etc. earlier.)
Ajax Events

Example:
optional.
2 -Enter

Buttons
Buttons
New Button
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Javascript Button

Button Display Mode
Window).
Window).
Code
Image2: JavaScript
Interface.
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Php Button

Button Display Mode
Window).
Window).
Code
Image2: Php
Interface.
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Link Button

Button Display Mode
Window).
Window).
there is an option to create new links configure the new Link button , and follow the steps below to
Creating a new Link
Image3: Link Type
Interface.
Interface - Field.

Image8: Link/Form Properties
Interface.

Open in the same window - Show the application in the same browser window, exiting the
search and going to the form.
Open in other window - Open another window to show the application
Open in a Iframe - Show the application in the same in the same window that the search,
below of search an Iframe is created to display the application.
Linking Link Hint - Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.
Deleting a button
Buttons option.
Application
Settings
Define ScriptCase applications attributes.
Image1: Application Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Description - This field can be used to describe the application objectives.
Application Images - Specific images used by this application.
Folder - Folder where the application is stored in the workspace.
Edit Project - Allow all project users to edit this application.
Timeout - Timeout time in seconds. Zero is the standard value of PHP.
Timeout Message - Timeout for Ajax update message.
Maximum File Size - Max upload file size for this application.
Message Title - Text used in title line as label.

Use Enter to Tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Error Settings
Image2: Error Settings Interface.

Attributes:
Error Position - Error position in the application. Values: right, left, top and bottom.
Show error title in the application - Allows to show the title line of the error message.
Show error title in the field - Allow to show the title line of the error message in the field.
Error title - Error message title in the application.
Error Script - Displays the script and line where the error occurs.
Error SQL - Displays SQL command that originated the error.
Debug Mode - Runs the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Commands.
Ajax error output - Opens a widow to display Ajax error messages output during debug mode.
Timeout Error - Time to display the validation error message.
Navigation
Attributes:
Message after insert - Message to show after the record insertion. The message is displayed when
navigating to other page.
Message after update - Message to show after the record update. The message is displayed when
navigating to other page.
Message after insertion - Message to be shown after the insertion of a register. Will occur the
navigation to other page and the message will be shown, soon below of the message will appear
the button OK that when is clicked return to the form.
Exit Application - Exit application after the form processing.
Return After inserting - Defines if the form will return to edit the inserted record or a new record
can be entered and added.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:

displayed.
Synchronize Table
This process will compare the application fields definitions of the and the table fields definition in the
database.
Changes in database table as an update, inclusion, or exclusion, or a change in the data type, is
displayed as in the image below:
Image1: Synchronize table Interface
Note: When a table field in the database is renamed, the effect of the table synchronization, comparatively, will be the same of the exclusion of a field that exist in
the application plus the inclusion of a new field.
Link
Used to link the application with other applications of the following types: Search, Form, Control, Menu
and Tab.
There are three types of links available:
Application - Used to link form to other application. This link type is associated to events.
Field - Used to link our form through a link
Capture - Creates an icon
to any other type of application.
beside the field inside the form. Displays a search application.
In the windows below, the user will be able to edit an existent link or create a new link.
Image1: Links.
Creating Links
Select the link type : Application, Field or Capture.
Image2:Link between applications Interface.
This link type is associated to events.

Application List shows the applications. Select the application to link and clink in Continue >>.
Image3: Link between application Interface.
Below, Parameters Definition , at the left side, the application fields being linked and that need to
receive parameters to execution is displayed and, at the right side, selected the option for passing value,
there are three options, they are:
Field - Enter a the field used for passing values.
Value - Enter a fixed value to be passed.
In the window below, Link Properties enter the link attributes.
Image5:Link Properties Interface.
Attributes:
Redirecting after insert - Navigates for the application linked when adding information.
Redirecting after Update - Navigates for the application linked when updting information..
Form property - Allows to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar.
Creates an icon beside the field in the search form. Opens another window showing a search
application.
Linking Type (below) shows that when it is selected the link Capture,
application fields is displayed. Selected the field that is used for the link.
a combobox with the
Image6: Parameter Definition Interface .
Below, Application List shows the search applications. Select the application to link and click on
Continue >>.
Image7:Application Link Interface.
Below, in Parameters Definition, at the left side, the application fields being linked and that need to
receive parameters to execution is displayed and, at the right side, selected the option for passing value,
there are three options, they are:
Empty- No value is passed as a parameter.
Recovering the field value - Selected the search application field to link object.
Image8: Parameter Definition Interface.
Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
Methods
'Var' button:

button:

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :
Libraries
==> Libraries.
Scriptcase Macros
Scriptcase Macros
Scriptcase has macros and special variables that allow the user to manipulate events, buttons,
applications, security control, manipulate with dates, etc.
Follows a table of all macros and special variables from ScriptCase, including the list of applications
that works for each one.
MACROS AND SPECIAL VARIABLES
Shows
sc_ajax_message ("Message",
"Title", "Parameters",
"Parameters_Redir")
This macro allows the application to display

customized messages.
sc_ajax_refresh ()
Macro to refresh a Grid
sc_block_display (Block_Name,
on/off)
This macro dynamically show/hide the fields

of a specific block.
sc_field_color ("Field", "Color")
This macro changes the color of a

determined field text.
sc_field_disabled ("Field_Name
= True/False", "Parameter")
This macro its used to block a field to get

any data that would be typed on it.
sc_field_display ({My_Field},
on/off)
This macro dynamically display or not a

specific field.
sc_field_init_off (Field1,
Field2,...)
This macro is intended to inhibit the query

fields on the initial load.
sc_field_readonly ({Field},
on/off)
This macro dynamically set a form field

attribute to '"Read-Only"
sc_field_style ({My_Field},
"Background-Color", "Size",
"Color", "Family", "Weight")
This macro allolws to modify dinamically the

grid field style.
sc_format_num ({My_Field},
"Group_Symb", "Dec_Symb",
"Amount_Dec", "Fill_Zeros",
"Side_Neg", "Currency_Symb",
"Side_Currency_Symb")
This macro its used to format numerical

values.
sc_form_show 'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically show or not the

form.
sc_hide_groupby_rule ('group1',
'grop2', 'group3')
Macro used to disable

Group By rules.
sc_set_focus ('Field')
This macro its used to set the focus to a

form field.
Security
sc_apl_status ("Application",
"Status")
This macro Activate/Deactivate the

applications at user level.
sc_ldap_login
sc_reset_apl_conf
("Application", "Property")
This macro deletes all the modifications

effected by "sc_apl_conf" macro.
sc_reset_apl_status
This macro deletes all the application

security status variables.
sc_reset_menu_delete
This macro restores a menu item structure.

(removed by the macro "sc_menu_delete").
sc_reset_menu_disable
This macro its used to enable a menu item

structure. (disabled by the macro
"sc_menu_disable").
sc_user_logout
('variable_name',
'variable_content',
'apl_redir.php', 'target')
Macro used to log the user

out to the system.
Filter
sc_where_filter
This macro its used to save the where

clause content generated through the filter
form.
Barcode
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lin_digitavel_banco
SQL
sc_begin_trans ("Connection")
This macro starts a set of transations in the

database.
sc_change_connection
("Old_Connection",
"New_Connection")
This macro dynamically change the

application connections.
sc_commit_trans ("Connection")
This macro effective a set of transations in

the database.
sc_error_continue ("Event")
This macro deactivates the Scriptcase

standard database error treatment message
for an event.
sc_error_delete
This macro configure the variable that

contains the database error message that
can occurs during the exclusion of a record.
sc_error_insert

can occurs during the addition of a record.
sc_error_update

can occurs during the update of a record.
sc_exec_sql ("SQL Command",

"Connection")
This macro execute SQL commands passed

as parameter or a SQL command in the SQL
field action type.
sc_lookup (Dataset, "SQL

Command", "Connection")
This macro executes a SELECT command

stored in the second parameter and returns
the data in a variable.
sc_reset_change_connection
This macro erases the changes made using

"sc_change_connection".
sc_rollback_trans ("Connection") This macro discards a set of transations in

the data base.
sc_select (dataset, "SQL
Command", "Connection")
This macro executes the commands passed

in the second parameter and returns the
dataset in a variable.
sc_select_field ({Field})
This macro modify dynamically a field that

will be recovered in the grid.
sc_select_order ("Field")
This macro modify dynamically the grids

"ORDER BY" clause field.
sc_select_where (add)
This macro adds dynamically a condition to

the grid WHERE clause.
sc_sql_injection ({My_Field}) or
($My_Variable)
This macro it used protect the field/variable

against "SQL injection".
sc_sql_protect (Value, "Type",

"Connection")
This macro protects the value passed as

parameter according with the used
database.
sc_where_current
This macro its used to make a reference of

the where clause currently used.
sc_where_orig
This macro saves the where clause content

of the original application select.
vari?veis database Database

Variables
Global variables containing database access

values used by main connection.
Date
sc_date (Date, "Format",

"Operator", D, M, Y)
This macro calculates and returns

increments and decrements using dates.
sc_date_conv ({Field_Date},
"Input_Format",
"Output_Format")
This macro converts the date field passed as

parameter with an input format to another
field with an output format.
sc_date_dif ({Date1}, "Format

Date1", {Date2}, "Format
Date2")
This macro calculates the difference

between two dates (passed as parameters)
returning the result in days.
sc_date_dif_2 ({Date1}, "Format

Date1", {Date2}, "Format
Date2", Option)
This macro calculates the difference

between two dates returning the amount of
days, months and years.
sc_date_empty ({Field_Date})
This macro checks if a date field its empty

retuning a boolean.
sc_time_diff ({time1}, "Time1

Format", {time2}, "Time2
Format")
Control
sc_ajax_javascript (
'JavascriptMethodName',
array("parameter"))
This macro allows the execution of

JavaScript methods in form/control events
sc_alert ("Message")
This macro shows a Javascript alert

message screen.
sc_apl_conf ("Application",
"Property", "Value")
This macro modify the application execution

property.
sc_calc_dv (Digit, Rest, Value,

Module, Weights, Type)
This macro calculate verify digits.
sc_changed ({Field_Name})
This macro returns "true" if the field name

have been changed.
sc_confirm ("Message")
This macro shows a Javascript confirm

screen.
sc_decode ({My_Field})
This macro returns the encrypted field or

variable to its original value.
sc_encode ({My_Field})
This macro returns the field or variable with

the content encrypted.
sc_error_exit (URL, "Target") or

(My_Application, "Target")
This macro Interrupts the application

execution if there are error messages
generated by the macro
"sc_error_message".
sc_error_message ("Text")
This macro generate an error message.
sc_exit (Option)
This macro forces the application exit.
sc_getfield ('myField')
This macro assign the properties of a field to

a javascript variable.
sc_get_language
This macro returns the abbreviation of the

language used.
sc_get_regional
This macro returns the abbreviation of the

regional settings used.
sc_get_theme
This macro returns the application theme

name.
sc_groupby_label ("My_Field")
This macro dynamically modify the field label

displayed in groupby lines.
sc_image (Image01.jpg)
This macro loads images passed as

parameter to use in the application.
sc_include ("File", "Source")
This macro its used to "include" PHP

routines.
sc_include_lib ("Lib1", "Lib2", ...)
This macro its used to select dynamically the

application libraries.
sc_label ({My_Field})
This macro its used to modify dynamically

the grid form field label.
sc_language
This macro returns the language and

regional settings.
sc_link (Column, Application,

Parameters, "Hint", "Target",
Height, Width)
This macro dynamically creates or modifies

links between grid applications and other
applications.
sc_log_add ("action",
"description")
This macro will add a register into the log

table.
sc_log_split ({description})
This macro returns what was inserted in the

"description" field of the log table in an array
format.
sc_mail_send (SMTP, Usr, Pw,

From, To, Subject, Message,
Mens_Type, Copies,
Copies_Type, Port,
This macro its used to send e-mails.
Connection_Type, Attachment)
sc_make_link (Application,
Parameters)
This macro is used to create a string with the

link data to another application.
sc_master_value ('Object',
Value)
This macro update a Master Application

object from a Detail Application.
sc_redir (Application,
Parameter01; Parameter02;
Target, Error)
This macro its used to redirects to other

application or URL.
sc_reset_global
([Global_Variable1],
[Global_Variable2] ...)
This macro delete session variables

received as parameter.
sc_seq_register
This macro provide the register sequential

number.
sc_set_global ($variable_01) or
({My_Field})
This macro its used to register session

variables.
sc_set_groupby_rule
Macro is used to select an

specific GROUP BY rule.
sc_set_language ('String
Language')
This macro allows to dynamically change the

application language.
sc_set_regional ('String
Regional')
This macros allows to dynamically change

the application regional settings.
sc_set_theme ('String Theme')
This macro its used to dinamically define the

application themes.
sc_site_ssl
This macro verifies if its been used a

safe/secure site. (https protocol)
sc_trunc_num ({My_Field},
Decimal_Number)
This macro its used to set the number of

decimals.
sc_url_exit (URL)
This macro modifies the application exit

URL.
sc_warning 'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically activates or

deactivates warning messages control.
sc_zip_file ("File", "Zip")
This macro its used to generate ZIP files

from a file list and/or directories.
vari?veis report pdf Report PDF

Variables
Page numbers variables used in Report PDF
vari?veis totaliza??o Totalling

Variables
Variables that contains all the totals (general

and for grouping).
vari?veis totalizacao(quebras)
Totalling Variables (group by)
Breaking totals variables.
Buttons
sc_btn_copy
This macro returns "true" when the "copy"

button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_delete
This macro returns "true" when the "Delete"

sc_btn_display
("Button_Name","on/off")
This macro activate toolbars buttons on the

application in execution time.
sc_btn_insert
This macro returns "true" when the "Add"

sc_btn_new
This macro returns "true" when the "Add

New" button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_update
This macro returns "true" when the "Save"

PDF
sc_set_pdf_name
"sc_my_file_name.pdf"
This macro will change the grid's exported

files name.
Menu
sc_appmenu_add_item
("Menu_Name", "Id_Item",
"Id_Parent", "Label",
"Aplication", "Parameters",
"Icon", "Hint", "Target")
This Macro adds dinamically an item to the

menu.
sc_appmenu_create
("Menu_Name")
This macro dynamically creates a menu

item.
sc_appmenu_exist_item
("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
This macro checks if there is a menu item.
sc_appmenu_remove_item
("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
This macro removes dynamically a menu

item.
sc_appmenu_reset
("Menu_Name")
This macro reset the array used in the

dinamically creation of a menu application.
sc_appmenu_update_item
("Menu_Name", "Id_Item",
"Id_Parent", "Label",
"Aplication", "Parameters",
"Icon", "Hint", "Target")
This macro updates a menu item.
sc_btn_disabled ('button_id',
'on/off')
Macro used to disable

Menu buttons.
sc_menu_delete (Id_Item1)
This macro remove items of the menu

structure.
sc_menu_disable (Id_Item1)
This macro deactivate menu structure items.
sc_menu_force_mobile
(boolean)
Macro used to force the

creation of menus to
mobile devices.
sc_menu_item
This macro Identifies the

menu item selected.
sc_script_name
This macro identifies the

application name that was
selected in the menu.
sc_ajax_javascript( 'JavascriptMethodName', array("parameter"))
This macro allows the execution of JavaScript methods called from events in
form/control applications.
This macro receive two parameters: a required one which recive a the JS method name
and an optional that recive an array with the method parameters on it.
This macro is only valid in applications with AJAX support.
Examples:
Ex. 1: Method javascript without parameters:
sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName');
Ex. 2: Method javascript with a paramenter:

sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName', array("paramameter"));
Ex. 3: Method javascript with two paramenters:

sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName', array("param1","param2"));
Macro Scope
Control Form
Form application
onBlur
ajaxFieldonBlur
onChange
onAfterDelete
onClick
onAfterDeleteAll
onFocus
onAfterInsert
onValidateFailure onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_ajax_message("Message", "Title", "Parameters", "Parameters_Redir")
This macro allows the application to show customizable messages. It's use is restricted to AJAX
events of Form/Control applications.
This macro is only available in applications with AJAX support.
Parameters
Description
Message
The message to be shown. This parameter is required.
Title
Messagebox title, if this parameter is empty, the title will not be shown.
Message
Message format parameters.
Parameters Ex.:
String
modal=Y&button=Y&button_label=Ok&redir=form_employees.php&redir_target=_blank
For more details about this parameter, see Table2.
Redirecting In this section is possible to define values for the redirecting target application. This
Parameters parameter works only if a "redir" property was informed. The properties for this
String
parameter must be informed in this format: parameter=value;parameter=value.
Ex.: customer_id=ALFKI;customer_name=ALBERT FRANCINET
Table2: Message Parameters String
Property
Description
Values
modal
Flag to define if the message Y or N
will be shown in modal
timeout
Time in seconds to hide the Seconds
message. If this property is
not informed, the message
will be shown indefinitely.
This property works only if
"button" property is not
enabled.
button
Shows a button inside the
Y or N
message. This button default
function is to close the
message. If there is
redirecting enabled, the
application will be redirected
after closing the message.
button_label Button label. This option
String
Example
modal=Y
timeout=5
button=Y
button=Y&button_label=OK
works only if the "button"

property is enabled.
top
Message positioning value in
pixels from top margin.
left
Message positioning value in
pixels from left margin.
width
Messagebox width value in
pixels
height
Messagebox height value in
pixels
redir
URL or application name for
redirecting. This macro
works only if the "button"
property is enabled.
redir_target Target for redirecting. This
property works only when
the "redir" property is
enabled.
show_close Flag for exhibition of the
"close" button on the
messagebox title bar. When
activated, this parameter
forces a title bar to be
shown, even if there is no
title defined.
body_icon Flag for exhibiting a icon on
the message body. The icon
exhibition depends on the
applications theme
configuration (exhibition
schemes).
Pixels
Number
Pixels
Number
Pixels
Number
Pixels
Number
String
top=300
String
redir=form_employees.php&redir_target=_blank
Y or N
show_close=Y
Y or N
body_icon=N
Ex. 01
sc_ajax_message ("Message", "Title", "timeout=0");
Macro Scope
Grid application Control
Form
onClick
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onFocus
Form application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onNavigate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
left=200
width=320
height=30
button=Y&redir=form_employees.php
sc_ajax_refresh()
This macro is used especially in Ajax events of a Grid with the purpose of reload the Grid
data (refresh).
Ex:
sc_ajax_refresh();
Macro Scope
Grid application
onClick
sc_alert("Message")
This macro shows a Javascript alert message box.

Ex. 1:
sc_alert("This is an alert message!!");
Macro Scope
Control
Form
onLoadAll
onValidate
sc_apl_conf("Application", "Property", "Value")
This macro allows to modify the property of the application. The user can determine if a
Form will start in insert mode, or a Grid starts by filter, etc.
This macro must be used by one application to modify the properties of another
application.
Properties for Form applications

Property
start
Value
new
insert
on/off
update
delete
on/off
on/off
Description
Forces the form to start in the insert mode in order to add new
records.
Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "add new" button to allow
the addtion of new records.
Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "save" button on the form.
Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "delete" button on the form.
field_display_off field
field_display_on field
field_readonly field
rows
rows_ins
Dinamically hides a field.

Dinamically shows a field.
Dinamically set the "readonly" attribute in order to select the
field.
Forces the number of lines for each page (only for form of
multiple records).
Forces the number of lines for insert (only for form of multiple
records).
Property for Grid applications

Property
start
cols
rows
lig_edit
Value
filter
on/off
Description
Forces the Grid to start by the filter.
Forces the number of columns. (vertical and slide kind)
Forces the number of lines per page.
Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the record edition. (the pencil
icon)
Property for all applications

Property
exit
Value Description
apl/url Forces application to exit to a specified location.
Ex. 1: Forces the "my_form" application to start in the addition mode.

sc_apl_conf("my_form", "start", "new");
Ex. 2: Doesn't allow the "my_form" application make addition of new registers.
sc_apl_conf("my_form", "add", "off");
Ex. 3: Sets "my_field" on the application "my_form" (readonly attribute) to "true"
dinamically.
sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_off", "my_field");
Ex. 4: Shows "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically.
sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_on", "my_field");
Ex. 5: Forces the "my_grid" application to start by filter.
sc_apl_conf("my_grid", "start", "filter");
Ex. 6: Forces the "my_grid" application to show 20 lines.
sc_apl_conf("my_grid", "rows", "20");
Ex. 7: Hides "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically.
sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_off", "my_field");
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onApplicationInit
onClick
onScriptInit
Control Form
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
Search
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Form
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
onValidateSuccess
sc_apl_status("Application", "Status")
Used to control the security access. These macros activate/deactivate the applications
that a user has acess to.
Application: Is the name or the variable that contains the name of the application to be
activated/deactivated.
Status: Is the value or variable that contains the value to be attributed to the application.
The values are: "on" to activate and "off" to deactivate.
Ex. 1:
sc_apl_status ('atu_cad', 'off');
Ex. 2:
sc_apl_status ({var_name_appl}, {var_status});
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onApplicationInit
onClick
onScriptInit
Control Form
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Form
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_appmenu_add_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
Adds dinamically an item to a menu application.

It is only possible to use this macro when there is an array created before by the
macro sc_appmenu_create.
Parameter Description
Menu_name Application menu name.
Id_item
Menu item id.
Id_Parent Parent menu item id. For roots the null/empty value is passed.
Label
Menu item description.
Aplication Menu item URL or application name
Parameters String with parameters to pass to the menu item application.
Ex.: param1=valor;param2=valor
Icon
Path to icon used in menu item.
Hint
Descriptive hint to menu item.
Target
Target for menu item link. ("_self" to use the same window, "_blank" to a
new one and "_parent" to exit the window.
Ex. 1: Creates a menu named menu_main.

sc_appmenu_create('menu_main');
Ex. 2: Adds a on the menu_main the the item_1 named Category.

sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_1','','Category','');
Ex. 3: Adds a on the menu_main (item_2) the the item_1 named Category linked to
the form_category.
sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category Form','form_category');
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_appmenu_create("Menu_Name")
This macro initializes the array used in the dimanically creation of the menu application. It
must be informed the menu application name as parameter.
This macro must be used in control events or onload menu event.
Ex. 1:
sc_appmenu_create('menu_main');
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_appmenu_exist_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
Verify if a menu item exists and returns true or false.

menu_name Menu application name
id_item
Menu item id
Ex. 1:
if(sc_appmenu_exist_item('menu_main', 'item_2')){
sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category
Form','form_category');
}
else{
sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category
}
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_appmenu_remove_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
Remove dinamically a menu item.

To use this macro it is necessary to execute the macro sc_appmenu_create before.
Par?metro Descri??o
menu_name Menu
application
name
id_item
Menu item id
Ex. 1:
sc_appmenu_remove_item('menu_main','item_2');
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
("Menu_Name")
This macro reset the array used in dinamically creation of a menu application.
It must be informed the menu application name as parameter.
Ex. 1:
sc_appmenu_reset('menu_main');
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_appmenu_update_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
Updates an application menu item dinamically

It is only possible to use this macro when there is an array created before by the
macro sc_appmenu_create.
It is only possible to use this macro on items created before by the macro
sc_appmenu_add_item.
Parameter
menu_name
id_item
id_parent
Label
Aplication
Parameters
Icon
Hint
Target
Description
Application menu item name
Application menu item id
Application menu item parent id. For roots the null/empty value is passed.
Application menu item description.
Menu item URL or application name
String with parameter to pass to the application menu item
Ex.: param1=valor;param2=valor
Icone path used in menu item.
Descriptive Hint for menu item.
Target for menu item link
Ex. 1:
sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_begin_trans("Connection")
This macro starts a set of transactions in the database.

In form applications, the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database
update (onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onBeforeUpdate or
onBeforeDelete), they are automatically protected through transaction control, since the
connection is the same of the application.
In the other cases, if the user wish to make transaction control, must begin with this macro
and finish with the "sc_commit_trans()" macro to confirm the updates or
"sc_rollback_trans" to cancel the transactions.
The "connection" parameter is optional, necessary only if the command is executed in a
different database from the specified application.
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate
sc_block_display(Block_Name, on/off)
Dynamically determines the display fields of a specific block.

By default all the blocks are displayed ("on" condition).
Ex. 1:
if ({type_customeri} == "personal")
{
sc_block_display(company, off);
}
else
{
sc_block_display(personal, off);
}
Obs: In grids, this macro only works with "slide" orientation.
Macro Scope
Form
Form application
Form application Menu

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
onClick
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
onScriptInit
onClick
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_copy
Available when the "Copy" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the
ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_copy)
{
sc_message("Record copied successfully!");
}
Macro Scope
sc_btn_delete
Available when the "Delete" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_delete)
{
sc_error_message("Unable to delete this record");
}
Macro Scope
Form application
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_disabled('button_id', 'on/off')
This macros is used to disable or enable buttons from a Menu application.
Ex:
sc_btn_disable('btn_2', 'off');
Macro Scope
Menu application
onLoad
sc_btn_display("Button_Name","on/off")
Activate toolbars buttons on the application in execution time.

Button_Name: Is the variable name that contains the name of the button to be
activated/deactivate.
Buttons Name (Grid):
Buttons
Name
first
back
forward
last
filter
pdf
det_pdf
pdfbw
xls
xml
cvs
rtf
word
print
det_print
summary
new
insert
update
Description
Goes to the first page of the grid.
Goes to the previous page of the grid.
Goes to the next page of the grid.
Goes to the last page of the grid.
Displays the "Filter" button.
Generates colored PDF.
Generates detail PDF.
Generates black and white PDF.
Generates the XLS.
Generates the XML.
Generates the CVS.
Generates the RTF.
Generates the Word.
Displays the "Print" button in the grid.
Displays the "Print" Button in the detail.
Displays the "Summary" button in the grid.
Displays the "New" button. (if the application has link for it, or if the form
is running in the grid iframe)
Displays the "Include" button of the form. (only for forms running in
grid?s iframe)
Displays the "Update" button of the form. (only for forms running in
grid?s iframe)
delete
qsearch
Displays the "Delete" button of the form (only for forms running in grid?s
iframe)
Displays the "Quick Search" button in the grid.
Buttons Name (Form):

Buttons
Name
first
back
forward
last
new
insert
update
delete
copy
qsearch
pdf
print
Description
Goes to the first page of the form.
Goes to the previous page of the form.
Goes to the next page of the form.
Goes to the last page of the form.
Displays the "New" button on the form, if its off the form will starts in
insertion mode.
Displays the "Include" button of the form.
Displays the "Update" button of the form.
Displays the "Delete" button of the form.
Displays the "Copy" button of the form.
Displays the "Quick Search" button of the form.
Generates PDF file from form.
Open the form in print mode.
Buttons Name (Control):

Buttons
Name
ok
exit
facebook
twitter
google
paypal
Description
Displays the "Ok" button on a control.
Displays the "Exit" button on a control.
Displays the "Facebook" button on a control.
Displays the "Twitter" button on a control.
Displays the "Google+" button on a control.
Displays the "PayPal" button on a control.
OBS. Remember that the buttons name must be lowercase.

Ex. 1:
sc_btn_display ('new', 'off');
Ex. 2: If we use variables or fields ({Fields} or [Global_Variables]) as parameters its
not allowed the use of the quotes or single quotes.
sc_btn_display ({variavle_button}, 'off');
Macro Scope
Grid application Control Form
Form application
onScriptInit
onLoadAll
onAfterDelete
onRefresh
onAfterDeleteAll
onScriptInit
onAfterInsert
onValidate
onAfterInsertAll
onValidateFailure onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_insert
Available when the "Add" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase
events, allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_insert)
{
sc_message("Record inserted successfully");
}
Macro Scope
Form application
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_new
Available when the "Add New" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_new)
{
{My_Date} = date('Y/m/d');
}
Macro Scope
Form application
onLoad
sc_btn_update
Available when the "Save" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_update)
{
sc_error_message("Record updated successfully");
}
Macro Scope
Form application
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_calc_dv(Digit, Rest, Value, Module, Weights, Type)
Calculate verifier (checksum) digits.

Parameter
Digit
Rest
Value
Module
Weights
Type
Description
Variable that will recieve the calculated digit.
Variable that will recieve the "rest" of the division.
Value or Variable to calculate the digit.
Value or Variable containing the module to be used. Default value is
module "11".
Value or Variable containing the weights to be used. Default value is the
"98765432" values.
Value or Variable containing the parcels calculation to be used: 1 to normal
sum of the parcels values and 2 to the sum of each algorithm of the parcels.
Default value is "1".
Ex. 1:
sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 11, 98765432, 1);
Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x3=18 ; 5x4=20 ; 4x5=20 ; 3x6=18 ; 2x7=14 ; 1x8=8
Parcels sum : 14 + 18 + 20 + 20 + 18 + 14 + 8 = 112
Rest of the division of 112 / 11 = 2
Digit: 11 - 2 = 9
Ex. 2:
sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 10, 12, 2);
Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x1=6 ; 5x2=10 ; 4x1=4 ; 3x2=6 ; 2x1=2 ; 1x2=2
Parcels sum: 1 + 4 + 6 + 1 + 0 + 4 + 6 + 2 + 2 = 26
Rest of the division of 26 / 10 = 6
Digit: 10 - 6 = 4
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
application application
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onClick
onBlur
Search
Form application
application
onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur
onRefresh
onAfterDelete
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onExecute
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
onChange
onSave
onClick
onScriptInit
onClick
OnValidate
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_changed({Field_Name})
Macro to check if the field name have been changed.

Ex. 1:
if (sc_changed({my_field}))
{
Echo "Filed have been changed";
}
Macro Scope
Form
onGroupBy
onRefresh
Form application
onBeforeUpdate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_change_connection("Old_Connection", "New_Connection")
This macro dynamically change the application connections.
Ex. 1: To change the connections:

sc_change_connection ( "Old_Connection", "New_Connection"; "Old_Connection02",
"New_Connection02");
Allows to change more then one application/connection in one command. Multiple

connections can be passed as parameters that must be separated by ";" (semicolon).
Ex. 2: To use variables or change the main connection as follows:
sc_change_connection ([Global_Connetion], [Test_Connection]);
Ex. 3: To delete the exchange:

sc_reset_change_connection ();
The exchanges take effect in the following applications
Macro Scope
sc_commit_trans("Connection")
This macro has the objective to confirm a transaction set in the database.
In form applications, the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database
update (onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onBeforeUpdate or
onBeforeDelete), they are automatically protected through transaction control, since the
connection is the same of the application.
If the user, in any of these events, use an application redirectioning (macro "sc_redir")
must before the redirect, use this macro to guarantee the transactions previously effected.
The "connection" parameter is optional, being necessary, only, if the command is
executed in a different database specified to the application.
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
onClick
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_confirm("Message")
Valid only in the PHP programming code that runs when called through a toolbar button.
This macro is used to confirm that the action must be really executed, preventing
mistakes.
Ex. 1:
sc_confirm ("Do you really wish to execute this action??");
Macro Scope
Form
onClick
onClick
Form application
onClick
sc_date(Date, "Format", "Operator", D, M, Y)
This macro has the aim to calculate the increment or decrement of dates. For its use are
necessary some parameters as follows:
Date
Date field that contains the date to be modified.
Format
Formatting thats the date field is.
Operator "+" for increment and "-" for decrement.
D
Number of days to increment or decrement.
M
Number of months to increment or decrement.
Y
Number of Years to increment or decrement.
Ex. 1:
{birthdate} = sc_date({birthdate}), "dd/mm/yyyy", "+", 30, 0, 0);
Ex. 2:
$new_date = sc_date({birthdate}, "yyyy-mm-dd", "-", 15, 3, 2);
Ex. 3:
{inclusion_dt} = sc_date(date('Ymd'), "yyyymmdd", "-", 0, 1, 1);
OBS: To be certified of the date format, before use the function, try it in any event:
echo "form_date =". {name of the field date};
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onNavigate
onFocus
onRecord
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_conv({Field_Date}, "Input_Format", "Output_Format")
This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another
field with an output format.
A or Y
Used to reference years.
M
Used to reference Months.
D
Used to reference Days.
Db_Format Used to get the Dadabase date format.
Ex. 1: Converts the date from "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the "yyyymmdd" format.
{field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "dd/mm/aaaa", "aaaammdd");
Ex. 2: Converts the date from the database native format to "dd/mm/yyyy" format.
{field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "db_format", "dd/mm/aaaa");
Ex. 3: Converts the date from the "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the Database native
format.
{field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "dd/mm/aaaa", "db_format");
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2")
Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) in days.

Parameter
Date1
Format Date1
Date2
Format Date2
Description
Date1 value or variable.
Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date1.
Ex. 1:
{amount_days} = sc_date_dif({date1}, "aaaa-mm-dd", {date2}, "mm/dd/aaaa");
Ex. 2:
{amount_days} = sc_date_dif("2000-05-01", "aaaa-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/aaaa");
{amount_days} would be equal to 1451 (days)
Note: Formats can be different but must be in days, months and years.
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onNavigate
onFocus
onRecord
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif_2({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2", Option)
Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the
amount of days, months and years.
The result is returned in an array structure, where the index 0 have the amount of days,
the index 1 have the amount of months and the index 2 have the amount of years.
Parameter
Date1
Format Date1
Date2
Format Date2
Option
Description
1 = Doesn't consider the initial day; 2 = Considers the initial day.
Ex. 1:
{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ({date1}, "yyyy-mm-dd", {date2}, "mm/dd/yyyy", 1);
{dif_days} = {differences[0]};
{dif_months} = {differences[1]};
{dif_years} = {differences[2]};
Ex. 2:
{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01", "yyyy-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/yyyy",
1);
{differences[0]} = 20 (days)
{differences[1]} = 11 (months)
{differences[2]} = 3 (years)
Ex. 3: Using the option 2

{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01", "yyyy-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/yyyy",
2);
{differences[0]} = 21 (days)
{differences[1]} = 11 (months)
{differences[2]} = 3 (years).
Note: Formats between the two dates can be different but it must have days, months and
years
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onNavigate
onFocus
onRecord
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_empty({Field_Date})
This macro checks if a date field is empty.

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
onClick
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Ex. 1:
if (sc_date_empty({my_date}) )
{
sc_error_message ("Invalid Date");
}
Macro Scope
Form
onClick
onBlur
onHeader
onChange
onRecord
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
Search
application
onRefresh
OnValidate
Form application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_decode({My_Field})
Returns, the encrypted field or variable, to its original value.

Ex. 1: Using a local variable:
{my_field} = sc_decode($field_cript);
Ex. 2: Using an user variable:

$my_var = sc_decode($field_cript);
Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the cryptography algorithm integrity (it is an open
source algorithm)
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onNavigate
onFocus
onRecord
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_encode({My_Field})
Returns the field or variable with the content encrypted.
Ex. 1: Encrypting a local variable:

$field_cript = sc_encode({my_field});
Ex. 2: Encrypting an user variable:

$field_cript = sc_encode($my_var);
Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the encrypting algorithm integrity, (The algorithm
provided is open source).
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
onClick
onBlur
Search
Form application
application
onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur
onRefresh
onAfterDelete
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onExecute
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
onChange
onSave
onClick
onScriptInit
onClick
OnValidate
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_continue("Event")
This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for
the event passed as parameter allowing it to be substituted by the programmer
customized error treatment.
It can be used in along with variable: {sc_erro_delete}, {sc_erro_insert} and/or
{sc_erro_update}
The events to be passed as parameter are: insert, delete or update.
Ex. 1: Using on the event onDelete for the message returned by mssql, trigger
treatment, which cancels the record exclusion, displays a error message in the format
[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase the record.
sc_error_continue("delete");
if (!empty({sc_error_delete}))
{
$tmp = strrpos({sc_error_delete}, "]");
if ($tmp !== false)
{
{sc_error_delete} = substr({sc_error_delete}, $tmp 1);
}
sc_error_message({sc_error_delete});
sc_error_exit;
}
Macro Scope
Control
Form
onScriptInit
Form application
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeUpdate
sc_error_delete
This variable returns a string with a database error message, which occurs by trying to
exclude a record.
It is used when there is a need to treat these messages.
Like for example, in case of database validations via triggers or procedures that they
return messages.
Ex. 1: Content of the variable {sc_erro_delete}, returning an error message generated
by database trigger using
MsSQL.?[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase this
register.?
Note: To access the database return error, sees the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope
Form application
onAfterDelete
sc_error_exit(URL, "Target") or (My_Application, "Target")
Interrupts the application execution, if there is error message generated through "
sc_error_message" macro, displaying the error messages. If informed an URL or the
name of an Application, an "OK" button is displayed, bellow the error messages to redirect
the processing to the informed URL/Application.
The target parameter its opicional.
Ex. 1: Displays only the error messages.

sc_error_exit();
Ex. 2: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to URL.
sc_error_exit(http://www.mysite.com);
Ex. 3: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to Application,
opening in another window.
sc_error_exit(my_application, "_blank");
Macro Scope
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
OnValidate
Form application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onNavigate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_insert
This variable returns a string with the database error, that occurs when adding a record. It
is used when is neede to treat these messages. For example, in case of database
validations via triggers or procedures that return message.
Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_insert}, returning an error message generated by database
trigger the using mssql
?[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't add this register.?
Note: To access the return of the database error, see the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope
Form application
onAfterInsert
sc_error_message("Text")
This macro generates an error messages.

In "Form and Control" applications, the messages are presented together with other
error messages found in the application, except when using the "sc_error_exit" macro.
In "Grid and Menu" applications the messages only will be presented through the "
sc_error_exit" macro.
Ex. 1:
if ({discount} > 0.10 && [glo_usr] == 'operator')
{
sc_error_message("Discounting of " . {discount} . " above of the allowed one");
}
In this example, if the value in the discount field is over 0.10 and the user try to add or
save this record, the operation is finished and the error message is presented.The
command must finish with ");" (close parentheses and semicolon) used as delimiter for the
macro interpreter.
Macro Scope
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
OnValidate
Form application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onNavigate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_update
This variable returns a string with a database error message that occurs when updating a
record. It is used when there is a need to treat these messages. For example, in case of
database validations via triggers or procedures that return message.
Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_update}, returning an error message generate by a database

trigger using mssql.
?[Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server] You can't updatethis record.?
Note: To have access the return of database error see the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope
Form application
onAfterUpdate
sc_exec_sql("SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro allows to condition the circumstances thats the SQL commands are executed.
The "Connection" parameter is optional. Required only, if the command is executed in a
data base different from the application.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_after_delete) {
sc_exec_sql("delete from mytable where key = {key_ant}");
}
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_exit(Option)
This macro can be used in the ScriptCase events and created button and may return
values/process after the execution.

Option
sc_exit()
sc_exit(ok)
Description
Returns to the previous application without display anything.
Displays a window with an OK button adn returns to the previous
application.
sc_exit(sel)
Doesn?t display the window with an OK button and returns to the current
application, repeat the application select.
sc_exit(ref)
Doesn't display the window with an OK button refresh data and returns to
the current application.
sc_exit(ok,ref) Same of the sc_exit(ref) function; however, display the OK button.
sc_exit(ok,sel) Same of the sc_exit(sel) function; however, display the OK button.
This option is only valid for Form and Control Applications.

Opton
Description
sc_exit() Doesn't complete transactions in database.
sc_exit(c) Commit pending transactions.
sc_exit(r) Rollback pending transactions.
Macro Scope
Control
Form
onClick
onScriptInit
Form application
onClick
onScriptInit
sc_field_color("Field", "Color")
This macros its used to change/restore a grid field text color dynamically.
Ex. 1: Change the grid text field ?customer_id? color.
sc_field_color ("customerid", "#33FF66");
Ex. 2: Change the "value_order? field text color, if the value is greater that 1000.
Otherwise, use the default color.
if ({value_order} > 1000)
{
sc_field_color ("value_order", "#33FF66");
}
else
{
sc_field_color ("value_order", "");
}
Ex. 3: Using a local variable.

sc_field_color ("customerid", {fld_color});
Ex. 4: Using a global variable.

sc_field_color ("customerid", [glo_color]);
Macro Scope
Grid application
onRecord
onScriptInit
sc_field_disabled("Field_Name = True/False", "Parameter")
This macro its used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it.
Fields that its going to be blocked should be followed by the option "true" (default) or
"false".
The parameter its optional, "I" its used only to block de addition of new records, "U" to
block only the update, in case of the parameter has not been informed the scriptcase will
use both options.
Ex. 1: Blocks only one field for addition and update.
sc_field_disabled("Field_01");
Ex. 2: Unblocking a field for addtion and update.
sc_field_disabled("Field_02=false");
Ex. 3: Blocks several fields, only for update.
sc_field_disabled("Field_01; Field_02; Field_03", "U");
Ex. 4: Combination of block and unblock of several fields, for adition and update.
sc_field_disabled("Field_01=true; Field_02=false; Field_03=true");
Macro Scope
Control
Form
onLoadAll
Form application
onLoad
onNavigate
sc_field_display({My_Field}, on/off)
This macro dynamically display a specific field.

By default all the fields are display ("on" condition").
Ex. 1:
if ({tp_customeri} == "personal")
{
sc_field_display({company_name}, off);
}
else
{
sc_field_display({personal_name}, off);
}
Macro Scope
Form application
onApplicationInit onBlur
ajaxFieldonBlur
onClick
onChange
onAfterDelete
onHeader
onClick
onAfterDeleteAll
onNavigate
onFocus
onAfterInsert
onScriptInit
onLoadAll
onAfterInsertAll
onRefresh
onAfterUpdate
onScriptInit
onAfterUpdateAll
onValidate
onBeforeInsertAll
onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_field_init_off(Field1, Field2,...)
This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load.
Fields inhibited by this macro can be enabled by using the "Columns" button.
Ex 01:
sc_field_init_off ({orderID}, {TotalValue});
Macro Scope
Grid application
onApplicationInit
sc_field_readonly({Field}, on/off)
This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to 'ReadOnly'. Use this macro only to do
it at 'runtime'. Otherwise set this parameter on / off on the form interface. section "ReadOnly".
The on/off parameter its opitional, used by an ajax event to define if a field its going to be
read-only (On) or read-only (Off).
Ex 1: To set a field as read only even when the form is in "Addition mode":
if (sc_btn_new)
{
sc_field_readonly({my_field});
}
Ex. 2: To set a field as read only dynamically use:
sc_field_readonly({my_field});
Macro Scope
Control Form
Form application
onBlur
ajaxFieldonBlur
onChange
onAfterDelete
onClick
onAfterDeleteAll
onFocus
onAfterInsert
onLoadAll
onAfterInsertAll
onRefresh
onAfterUpdate
onScriptInit
onAfterUpdateAll
onValidate
onBeforeInsertAll
onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_field_style({My_Field}, "Background-Color", "Size", "Color", "Family", "Weight")
This macro allows to modify the grid field style dinamically.

Parameter
Field
Background-Color (optional)
Size (optional)
Color (optional)
Family (optional)
Weight (optional)
Ex. 1:
Description
Name
Field cell background Color
Field font size
Font Color
Font family
Font weight
sc_field_style({my_field}, '#33FF99', '15px', '#000000', 'Arial, sans-serif', 'bold');
Macro Scope
Grid application
onRecord
onScriptInit
sc_format_num({My_Field}, "Group_Symb", "Dec_Symb", "Amount_Dec", "Fill_Zeros", "Side_Neg", "Currency_Symb",

"Side_Currency_Symb")
This macro its used to format numerical values.
Parameter
Description
My_Field
Variable or field to format (The return is in the next variable).
Group_Symb
Integer values grouping symbol.
Dec_Symb
Decimals separator symbol.
Amount_Dec
Number of decimals to be displayed.
Fill_Zeros
Complete decimals with zeros (fill in) (S = yes and N = no).
Side_Neg
Negative sign position. (1 = left and 2 = right)
Currency_Symb
Monetary symbol to be displayed.
Side_Currency_Symb Currency symbol position. (1 = left and 2 = right).
Ex. 1: Formatting an integer.

sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', '', 0, 'N', '1', '');
Input value = 001234567890
Output value = 1.234.567.890
Ex. 2: Formatting a negative value and truncating decimals.
sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', '', 0, 'N', '1', '');
Input value = 0012345678.90Output value = -12.345.678
Ex. 3: Formatting a value with 4 decimals and filling with zeros.
sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 4, 'S', '1', '');
Input value = 0012345678.9
Output value = 12.345.678,9000
Ex. 4: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with zeros and using monetary
symbol.
sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 2, 'S', '1', 'US$');
Input value = 0012345678.9
Output value = US$ 12.345.678,90
Ex. 5: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with zeros.
sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 2, 'S', '1', '');
Input value = .9
Output value = 0,90
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onNavigate
onFocus
onRecord
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
onClick
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_form_show'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically display or not a form.

By default, the form is displayed ("on" condition).
Ex. 1: Doesn't display the form.
sc_form_show = 'off';
Macro Scope
Control
Form
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
Form application
onLoad
onScriptInit
onValidate
sc_getfield('myField')
This macro is used to assign objects (that represent the field's form) to a javascript
variable, allowing the user to access the object properties. This macro will run on control
and forms at the javascript events and methods.
EX:
Showing the value of the "client" field of a form cli_js = sc_getfield('cliente'); alert
(cli_js.value);
Macro Scope
sc_get_language
This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used.

Ex. 1:
$my_language = sc_get_language();
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onNavigate
onFocus
onRecord
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_get_regional
This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used.

Ex. 1:
$my_regional = sc_get_regional();
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onNavigate
onFocus
onRecord
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
onClick
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_get_theme
This macro returns the application theme used.

Ex. 1:
$my_theme = sc_get_theme();
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application

application
onExecute
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit

onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onNavigate
onFocus
onRecord
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_groupby_label("My_Field")
This Macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in group by lines.
Ex. 1:
sc_groupby_label('state') = "state grouping";
Ex. 2:
sc_groupby_label('balance') = "balance total";
Macro Scope
Grid application
onGroupBy
sc_hide_groupby_rule('group1', 'grop2', 'group3')
This macro is used to disable Group By rules in execution time.

The Group By rules ID should be informed as parameters in the macro.
Ex:
if( [usr_login_group] == 'seller' ){

sc_hide_groupby_rule('rule_1', 'rule_2');
}
Macro Scope
Grid application
onApplicationInit
sc_image(Image01.jpg)
This macro its used to copy images in some events or Javascript commands to load
images to an application.
All images used in the applications are automatically copied to each application.
Ex. 1:
sc_image (img1.gif, img2.jpg);
Note: The images must exist in the development environment images directory
(../devel/conf/sys/img/img/).
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
application
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Form
application
onApplicationInit
onClick
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onScriptInit
onValidate
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_include("File", "Source")
The Scriptcase allows the user to catalogue his PHP scripts to use in various applications.
To catalogue the scripts go to the ScripCase main menu at "Tools > Library" and use
the "upload" option existing in the interface.
When a script is catalogued, the user has the option of the context choice where it will be
stored, global level (Scriptcase), group level or user level.
- Public: All the projects will have acess.
- Project: Only the project users (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess.
- User: Only the user (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess.
The sc_include macro, the user must inform the script name that will be included and
the source.
- Script Name: Script name to be included.
The Source context that the script was saved, that could be:
- Sys or Blank: Scriptcase global level.
- Prj: Group level.
- Usr: User level.
Ex. 1: Including a catalogued script to global level.

sc_include(my_script.php);
Ex. 2: Including a catalogued script to the group level.

sc_include(my_script.php, grp);
Ex. 3: Including a catalogued script to the user level.

sc_include(my_script.php, usr);
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onGroupBy
onChange
onSave
onHeader
onClick
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onClick
OnValidate
onRecord
onFocus
onScriptInit
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_include_lib("Lib1", "Lib2", ...)
This macro its used to select dynamically the application libraries.

PHP
Libraries
fpdf
fpdf_html
excel
rtf
JavaScript
Libraries
Jquery
jquery_thickbox
jquery_blockui
tiny_mce
Ex. 1:
sc_include_lib ("fpdf");
$pdf=new FPDF();
$pdf->AddPage();
$pdf->SetFont('Arial','B',16);
$pdf->Cell(40,10,'Hello World!');
$pdf->Output();
Macro Scope
Grid application
onFooter
sc_label({My_Field})
This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label.
Ex. 1: Using the field name.

sc_label("Customer") = "Cust Name";
Ex. 2: Using a variable as paramenter.

sc_label({Customer}) = "Cust Name";
Ex. 3: Using a global variable.

sc_label([global_variable]) = "Cust Name";
Macro Scope
Form
onNavigate
onLoadAll
Form application
onLoad
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
sc_language
This macro returns the language and regional settings.

Ex. 1:
echo "Language: ".{sc_language};
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
application
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
Form
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_ldap_login
$ldapConn = sc_ldap_login($server [, $domain, $user, $password, $dn, $group]);

This macro initiates the connection and bind it to the user credentials. This macro needs
the following parameters:
Server =
Domain =
User =
Password =
DN =
Group =
There are three possible returns:
Macro return
Situation
(string)'ldap_connect_error' Connection error with LDAP host/service.
(string)'ldap_bind_error'
Authentication error after successfull connection.
(resource)
Successful connection and bind.
Macro Scope
sc_link(Column, Application, Parameters, "Hint", "Target", Height, Width)
This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other
applications.
Column: Grid column field name to generate the link.
Application: Application name to establish the link.
Parameters: Parameters required by the called application.
Must be informed "=" (attribution sign) . More than one parameter must be separated by
";" (semicolon).
Hint: Observation or tip displayed when the mouse cursor passes over the link.
Target : Where the application will function call and may be:
Target
"_self"
"_blank"
"iframeT"
"iframeL"
"iframeR"
"iframeB"
"modal"
Descri??o
For carrying on the same page (overrides the query);
To run on another page (pop-up);
To run in an iframe above the Grid (top);
To run in an iframe, the left of the Grid (Left);
To run in an iframe, the left of the Grid (Left);
To run in an iframe below the Grid (Bot);
Opens a new window and blocks any interaction in the main window;
In the case of modal target, there are two optional parameters *:

*Height: Set the height of the modal window (default 440);
*Width: Set the width of the modal window (default 630);
Note: If omitted, will be assigned the value "_self".
Ex. 1: Creates a link to the costumer.php application, on the Id field, passing the
global variable [global_costumer] as and the product field (local variable) {Id} to the
costumer.php application:
sc_link(Id, costumer.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}, "Client Data", "_blank");
Ex. 2: Creating a dynamic link to another application depeding on the field valor
{costumer_type} and opening it in a modal.
if ({costumer_type} == "F") {
sc_link (costumer_type, type_f.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}," Personal Data ",
"modal", 500, 700);
}
else{
sc_link (costumer_type, type_a.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}," Company Data
", "iframeR");
}
Ex. 3: Creating a link to an URL: in this case, "paramater and target" have no effect.
It will be executed redirecting to a informed URL.
sc_link (my_field, http://www.scriptcase.com, ,"hint of the link");
Macro Scope
Grid application
onRecord
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute

onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Form application
onValidate
onBeforeInsert
onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate
onClick
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute

onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Form application
onValidate
onBeforeInsert
onClick
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute

onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
Form application
onValidate
onBeforeInsert
onClick
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onRecord
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
Form application
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
onValidate
onBeforeInsert
onClick
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onValidateSuccess
sc_log_add("action", "description")
This macro is intended to add a record to the log table, thereby making the message and /
or the name of the action customizable to the developer. The macro parameters can use
PHP variables.
Ex:
sc_log_add ("access", "Application has been accessed by the user trial");
Macro Scope
sc_log_split({description})
This macro is intended to provide access to the information written in the last insertion in
the log table, allowing the manipulation of the data before and after the record update
returning it in an array mode. The information is stored in the "description" field of the log
table in the string format with delimiters.
Ex:
$arr_description = sc_log_split({description});
Input: -> keys fields Array ( [clientid] => ANTON ) [fields] => Array ( [old] => Array ( [CEP]
=> 50710500 [Address] => Rua Desembargador Joao Paes 657 [City] => Farol [State] =>
RS ) [new] => Array ( [CEP] => 53230630 [Address] => Avenida Presidente Kennedy,
1001 [City] => Peixinhos [State] => PE ) ) )
Macro Scope
sc_lookup(Dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro allows the user to execute SQL commands and returns the result to the
"dataset" variable. The "dataset" structure is an array (line/column).
The "connection" parameter is optional. Use when the command is executed in a
database different from that specified for the application.
Ex. 1:
sc_lookup(dataset, "select customer_id, customer_name, credit_limit from customers" );
To have access to the first line (Dataset), use :
{customer_id} = {dataset[0][0]};
{customer_name} = {dataset[0][1]};
{credit_limit } = {dataset[0][2]};
To have access to the second line (Dataset), use:
{customer_id} = {dataset[1][0]};
{customer_name} = {dataset[1][1]};
{credit_limit} = {dataset[1][2]};
If occurs error in the execution of the SQL command, the variable attributed to the
dataset will return as "false" and the error message will be available in the "dataset_erro
" variable. It is also important to verify the select returned data, to prevent access to
inexistent variables, once the output array only will be created if the select command
returns data.
Ex. 2:
sc_lookup(my_data, "select customer_id, customer_name, credit_limit from customers");
if ({my_data} === false)
{
echo "Access error. Message=". {my_data_erro} ;
}
elseif (empty({my_data}))
{
echo "Select command didn't return data";
}
else
{
{customer_id} = {my_data[0][0]};
{customer_name} = {my_data[0][1]};
{credit_limit} = {my_data[0][2]};
}
Ex. 3: The SQL command also can be composed of application fields (local
variables) or of global variables:
sc_lookup(dataset, "select order_value from orders where clienteid = '{customer_id} ' and
salesman_id = [var_glo_salesman]");
Note: The command must always finished with semicolon ";".

Note2: For a big result returned in the dataset we recomend the use of the macro
sc_selec instead of this one.
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onClick
onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_mail_send(SMTP, Usr, Pw, From, To, Subject, Message, Mens_Type, Copies, Copies_Type, Port, Connection_Type, Attachment)
This macro its used to send emails.

Parameter
SMTP
Usr
Pw
From
To
Subject
Message
Mens_Type
Copies
Description
SMTP server name or IP address. (String or Variable that contains the
server name)
SMTP user name. (String or Variable that contains the user name)
SMTP password. (String or Variable that contains the password)
From email. (String or Variable that contains the email)
List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or
variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ";" or one
variable that contains one array of emails.
Message subject. (String or Variable that contains the subject)
Message body. (String or Variable that contains the message)
Message format: (T)ext or (H)tml.
List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or
variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ";" or one

variable that contains one array of emails.
Copies_Type
Type copies: BCC (Hiden copies) or CCC (Regular copies).
Port
Server port. If omited, the ScripCase will assume the default value: 25
for not secure port and 465 for secure port.
Connection_Type Connection security (S) or (N).
Note: To use safe connection its required to have the PHP "php_openssl" extension
enable.
Ex. 1:
sc_mail_send('smtp.meuserver.com.br',
'usr',
'pw',
'from@netmake.com.br',
'
to@netmake.com.br',
'Test
Email
Subject',
'Message',
'H',
'abc@cop.com.br;zxy@cop.com.br', 'H', '', '', 'c:/test/arq.txt');
Ex. 2: Usising variables and defining the port.

sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], [usuar], [glo_pw], {from}, {to}, {subject}, {message}, 'T',
[glo_copias], 'CCC', '419', 'S', {attached});
Ex. 3: No user and password.

sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], '', '', 'from.netmake.com.br', {to}, {sunject}, {message}, 'H', '', '', '',
'', [glo_att]);
The amount of emails sent will be stored at the special variable "sc_mail_count".
If any error happend when the scriptcase try to send the email, the variable "sc_mail_ok"
will recieve "false" and the error message will be stored on the variavle "sc_mail_erro".
Ex.4 :
sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], '', '', 'from@netmake.com.br', {to}, {subject}, {message}, 'H');
if ({sc_mail_ok})
{
echo "sent {sc_mail_count} e-mail(s) with sucess!!";
}
else
{
sc_erro_mensagem({sc_mail_erro});
}
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onClick
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
onAfterDelete
onApplicationInit
onAfterDeleteAll
onExecute
onAfterInsert
onLoad
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_make_link(Application, Parameters)
This macro creates a string containing a link to other Scriptcase application (when writing
html code).
Application Name of the application to establish the link.
Parameters Parameters necessary so called application. In the format: "=" (the
attribution sign) . More than one parameter must be separated by ";"
(semicolon).
Ex. 1: Creating a string with a link for the datacli.php application, without
parameters passage.
$string_link = sc_make_link(datacli.php);
Ex. 2: Creating a string with a link for the application datacli.php, with parameters
passage.
$string_link = sc_make_link(datacli, parm1={company};parm2=[glo_office]);
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute

onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_master_value('Object', Value)
This macro update a Master Application object from a Detail Application.
Parameter
Object
Value
Description
Object name to be updated in Master Application. Its Not necessary the {} in
a field name.
Object value. The value can be a field or a variable.
Ex. 1:
sc_lookup(result,"SELECT SUM(Total) FROM adm_pedido_itens WHERE PedidoID =
'{PedidoID}'");
[valor] = {result}[0][0];
sc_master_value('ValorPedido', [valor]);
Macro Scope
Control
Form
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
Form application
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeUpdate
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
sc_menu_delete(Id_Item1)
This macro removes menu items passed as parameters. Can be use in menu applications
or tree menu.
Observe that the parameters used in this macro are the "ID" of the items.
If a menu item its removed and it have "nodes", they will be hidden too.
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_menu_disable(Id_Item1)
This macro deactivates menu items pass as parameters. Can be used in menu
applications or tree menus.
The parameters passed are items "ID?. Menu items are deactivated recursively (when a
submenu item is deactivated its ?nodes? are also deactivated).
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_menu_force_mobile(boolean)
This Macro is used to force the creation of menus to mobile devices.

The parameter (true or false) is optional. If no value is passed, it will use the value "true" (
enable mobile mode)
Ex1:
sc_menu_force_mobile(true);
Ex2:
sc_menu_force_mobile(false);
Macro Scope
Menu application
onLoad
sc_menu_item
This variable is only avaliable for menu application and it has the objective of giving acess
to a menu item that was selected, this way the user can take desicions before to run the
application.
Ex. 1: To clean global variable.
if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_1")
{
sc_reset_global([global1], [global2]);
}
Ex. 2: If an application requires a global variable another application can initialize it

accordingly.
if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_5" && (!isset([glo_employ]) || empty([glo_employ])))
{
sc_redir(apl_inf_emp);
}
Macro Scope
Menu application
onExecute
sc_redir(Application, Parameter01; Parameter02; Target, Error)
This macro its used to redirect the processing to other application or URL.
If the redir uses parameters, these must be passed in the following format:
1) After the name of the application, use the comma delimiter (,) then
2) = (equal sign) .
3) More than one parameter, must be separated by semicolon (;)
4) The target determine which application is opened (default=_self): _self, _parent, _blank
or modal.
5) Optional parameter to set error messages redirection in the application: "F" redirects if
there is error in the application (default value) and "E" does not redirect.
OBS. If your connection uses transaction control the use of this macro on the events
onAfterInsert, onafterupdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onbeforeupdate or
onBeforeDelete should come after the use of macro sc_commit_trans so this way it will
save the form changes.
Ex. 1: Application without parameters nor target.

if ([global_user] == "test")
{
sc_redir(application_x.php);
}
Ex. 2: Application with parameters and without target.
{
sc_redir(application_x, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx");
}
Ex. 3: Application without parameters and with target.
{
sc_redir(application_x, "", "_parent");
}
Ex. 4: Application with parameter and target.
{
sc_redir(application_x, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx", "_blank");
}
Ex. 5: URL.
{
sc_redir(http://www.my_page.com);
}
OBS. Everthing that was passed as parameter to the called application will be avaliable
as global variable.
EX: sc_redir(employee.php, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx", "_blank");
In the employee.php application the parameters will be acessible at [parm1] and [parm2]
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onApplicationInit
onClick
onNavigate
onScriptInit
Control Form
onApplicationInit
onClick
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
onAfterDelete
onApplicationInit
onAfterDeleteAll
onExecute
onAfterInsert
onLoad
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onLoad
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_apl_conf("Application", "Property")
This macro have the objective to delete all modifications effected by the sc_apl_conf
macro.
The property parameter its opicional, if its passed it will only erase the modification from
that specific application.
Ex. 1: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application, property

"start".
sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application", "start");
Ex. 2: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application.

sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application");
Ex. 3: Deleting the modifications of all the applications.

sc_reset_apl_conf();
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onApplicationInit
onClick
onScriptInit
Control Form
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Form
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_reset_apl_status
This macro has the objective to clean all security variables, set through the sc_apl_status
macro.
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_apl_status();
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onApplicationInit
onClick
onScriptInit
Control Form
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Form
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
This macro has the objective to erase the changes made using the macro
"sc_change_connection".
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Form application Menu application
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onValidate
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onLoad
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_global([Global_Variable1], [Global_Variable2] ...)
This macro has the objective to delete global variables, stored in the PHP session.
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_global ([Login], [Pass]);
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onRecord
onFocus
onScriptInit
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
onClick
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_menu_delete
This macro its used to restore a menu item, deleted by the macro "sc_menu_delete".
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_menu_delete();
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_reset_menu_disable
This macro have the objective to enable a menu item, disabled by the macro
"sc_menu_disable".
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_menu_disable();
Macro Scope
Menu application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_rollback_trans("Connection")
This macro its used to cancel a transaction set in the database.

The "Connection" parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a different
data base from the specified to the application.
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onClick
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_script_name
This macro is available to the MENU applications to access the application name that was
selected in the menu. It allows the user to make dacisions before executing the
application if a pre-process is required to that application.
Ex. 1: To clean global variables.

if ({sc_script_name} == "apl1")
{
sc_reset_global([global1], [global2]);
}
Macro Scope
Menu application
onExecute
sc_select(dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro executes the SQL commands passed as parameter and access the "dataset"
in the command.
Different from sc_lookup macro, this macro doesn't manipulate the dataset (the user is
responsible for all the manipulation).
If an error occurs in the sql command execution, the variable attributed to the database
returns as "false" and the error message is available in the "dataset_error" variable.
The connection parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a data base
different from the specified in the application.
Ex. 1:
sc_select(my_data, "select clientId, clientName, limitecred from costumers");
if ({my_data} === false)
{
echo "Access error. Message =". {my_data_erro};
}
else
{
while (!$my_data->EOF)
{
{clientName} = $my_data->fields[1];
$my_data->MoveNext();
}
$my_data->Close();
}
Ex. 2: The SQL command can passed as application fields (local variables) or of
global variables.
sc_select(dataset,"select price order from order where clientId = '{clientId}' and cod_Seller
= [var_glo_seller]");
Note: The command must always be finished with semicolon";".
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onClick
onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
onClick
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_select_field({Field})
This macro modify dynamically the SELECT:

Is possible to modify dynamically the grid fields through the dynamic modification of the
original select.
Ex. 1:
A table with the columns year and the months from January to December is used to
create a grid using a parameter, displays the years and only a specific month. Passing the
parameter as a global variable named "show_month", in the application is found the

following structure:
Select Clause: select year, pair_month from table
sc_select_field(pair_month) = [show_month];
sc_label(pair_month) = [show_month];
Modify the select, and the grip column label.
It is possible, during the grid execution time, modify the grid ORDER BY clause.
At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the
substitution execution during the grid time.
Ex. 2: Select Clause: select code, name, value from table order by code. To change the
order, from code to name, use: sc_select_order("code") = "name";
Note: This command must be in the context of the evento "onInit";
Macro Scope
Grid application
onScriptInit
sc_select_order("Field")
It is possible, during the grid execution time, modify the grid ORDER BY clause.
At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the
substitution during the grid execution time.
Ex. 1: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price FROM table ORDER BY code
To change the order from code to name, we will have:
sc_select_order("code") = "name";
Ex. 2: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price, date FROM table ORDER BY code,
name, price
To change the order from name to date, we will have:
sc_select_order("name") = "date";
Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select".
Macro Scope
Grid application
onScriptInit
sc_select_where(add)
Is possible, during grid execution time to add a field/condition to the search WHERE
clause.
Ex. 1: It adds the contente between the quotes (") in the grids select.
if (empty({sc_where_current}))
{
sc_select_where(add) = "where campoX > [global]";
}
else
{
sc_select_where(add) = "AND campoX > [global_variable]";
}
Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select".
Macro Scope
Grid application
onScriptInit
sc_seq_register
This macro provide the record (being processed) grid sequential number. It can be used,
only in onRecord event.
Ex. 1:
if({sc_seq_register} == 10) {
// last line of the page
{total} = {sum_total};
}
Macro Scope
sc_set_focus('Field')
This macro its used to set the focus to a form field.

Ex. 1:
sc_set_focus('name');
Macro Scope
Control Form
Form application
onApplicationInit OnClick
onLoadAll
onLoad
onRefresh
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_global($variable_01) or ({My_Field})
This macro its used to register global variables. Create a session variable with the same
name and content of the local variable.
Ex. 1: Registering a users variable.

$my_var = "mary";
sc_set_global($my_var);
Creates a session variable with the name "my_var" with the "mary" content.
Ex. 2: For register a field value as a session variable.
sc_set_global({fieldname});
Note: This macro doesn't attribute values. Only register the session variables from PHP.
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onBlur
onRefresh
onFooter
onChange
onSave
onGroupBy
onClick
onScriptInit
onHeader
onClick
OnValidate
onRecord
onFocus
onScriptInit
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_groupby_rule
This macro is used to select a GROUPBY rule in execution time in the onApplicationInit
event.
Ex:
sc_set_groupby_rule = "rule id";
Macro Scope
Grid application
onApplicationInit
sc_set_language('String Language')
This macro allows to define the application language dinamically.

Ex. 1: Changes the laguage to English.
sc_set_language('en_us');
Ex. 2: Changes the laguage to Spanish.

sc_set_language('es');
It still allows to define the language and regional settings of the applications using a
delimiter ";" between the parameters.
Ex. 1: Changing the language to English and regional settings to Canada.
sc_set_language('en_us;en_ca');
Ex. 2: Changing the language to Spanish and regional settings to Mexico.

sc_set_language('es;es_mx');
Ex. 3: Changing the language to Germanian and regional settings to Luxembourg.

sc_set_language('de;de_lu');
Ex. 4: Changing the language to Eslovak and regional settings to Slovak Republic.
sc_set_language('sk;sk_sk');
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
Form
Menu
application
onExecute
application
application
application
application
onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onLoad
onValidate
OnValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_pdf_name"sc_my_file_name.pdf"
The resulting files of the exported data (PDF, XLS, XML, CSV and RTF) are stored in
"temporary" directory specified in the Scriptcase's configuration in development and in
production, with the prefix "sc_" followed by a unique identification so the file of a user
does not overwrite to one another.
The prefix "sc_" makes Scriptcase delete the old files. To assign different names
Scriptcase patterns, can use the following macros:
- sc_set_csv_name
- sc_set_pdf_name
- sc_set_rtf_name
- sc_set_xml_name
- sc_set_xls_name
Ex1:
sc_set_xls_name = "my_file.xls";
Ex2: sc_set_csv_name = "sc_my_new_file.csv";
NOTE:
1) These macros should be used in the event "onScriptInit."
2) Even using the macro, remained the prefix "sc_" (as Ex2), the Scriptcase will delete the
file when it reaches the configured timeout limit (see the setting "File Lifetime" in the
production environment).
Macro Scope
sc_set_regional('String Regional')
This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings.

Ex. 1:
sc_set_regional('en_us');
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
application
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onValidate
OnValidate
onValidateSuccess
Form
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
Form
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_set_theme('String Theme')
This macros allows to define the application theme dinamically.

Ex. 1:
sc_set_theme('Newyellow');
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
application
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onValidate
OnValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_site_ssl
This macro its used to verifie if a used site is a safe site. (https protocol)
Ex. 1: Using an affirmative.

if (sc_site_ssl)
{
echo "ok - Safe site";
}
Ex. 2: Using a negative.

if (!sc_site_ssl)
{
echo "Warning - Unsafe site";
}
Ex. 3: Redirecting if the site isn't safe.

if (!sc_site_ssl)
{
sc_redir("http://www.erro_page.com/") ;
}
Note: This macro works only to the web server llS.
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onClick
onScriptInit
onScriptInit
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess

application
onAfterDelete
onApplicationInit
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_injection({My_Field}) or ($My_Variable)
This macro its used to protect the field/variable against "sql injection".
Macro used for protection against "sql injection" in commands generated by the developer
when using the macros: sc_lookup, sc_select or sc_exec_sql.
Ex. 1: Protecting a local variable:

$field_protect = sc_sql_injection({my_field});
Ex. 2: Protecting an user variable:

$field_protect = sc_sql_injection($my_var);
Note: that all database accesses, generated for the Scriptcase, have protection against
"sql injection".
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onExecute
onAfterDelete
onLoad
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_protect(Value, "Type", "Connection")
This macro will protect the value passed as paramenter according with the used
database, the "Connection" parameter is opicional, if not informed scriptcase will use the
default connection.
The "Type" parameter so far can only use the "Date" value.
Ex 01: In this example we will protect the dates passed as parameter so this way it
can be correctly interpreted to the ACCESS database.
sc_select_where(add) = " AND news_noticias.noticia_data_pub
BETWEEN ".sc_sql_protect($data_inicial, "date")." AND ".sc_sql_protect($data_final,
"date")."";
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute

Form
onRecord
onLoadAll
onValidate
Search
application
OnValidate
Form application
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidate
sc_time_diff({time1}, "Time1 Format", {time2}, "Time2 Format")
sc_time_diff ({time1}, "Time1 Format", {time2}, "Time2 Format");

This macro clculates the difference between hour, minutes and seconds for two time values.
The result will be returned in an array, with the dimensions [0], [1] and [2] containing hours, minu
Par?meter
Description
time1
Valor ou vari?vel
Time1 Format Valor ou vari?vel
time2
Value or variable
Time2 Format Value or variable
contendo a primeira hora.

contendo o formato no qual est? armazenada a hora1.
for Time2
to specify the format of Time2
Macro Scope
sc_trunc_num({My_Field}, Decimal_Number)
This macro is used to truncate numerical values which exceed the decimals amount
specified.
Par?metro
Descri??o
My_Field
Variable with value to format (return in the same variable).
Decimal_Number Amount of decimals to display.
Ex. 1:
sc_trunc_num({my_value}, 2);
Input value = 1250.235
Output value = 1250.23
Input value = 1250.2
Input value = 1250
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
onClick
onBlur
onFooter
onChange
onGroupBy
onClick
Search
application
onApplicationInit
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
onClick
OnValidate
onFocus
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
OnClick
onClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_url_exit(URL)
This macro modifies the application exit URL.
Ex. 1:
sc_url_exit(http://www.scriptcase.net);
Ex. 2:
sc_url_exit(aplx.php);
Macro Scope
onApplicationInit
onClick
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
onApplicationInit
onClick
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onApplicationInit
onScriptInit
Form application
onAfterDelete
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_user_logout('variable_name', 'variable_content', 'apl_redir.php', 'target')
This macro is used to log the user out to the system.

If the target is not informed, the default value is "_top".
Ex:
sc_user_logout('usr_login', 'admin', 'ctrl_login.php', '_self');
Macro Scope
sc_warning'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control.

Warning messages are generated when a reference is made to an inexistent variable, an
item of an inexistent array, etc.
Ex. 1: To deactivate the message (do not display).
sc_warning = 'off';
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
onFooter
onBlur
onGroupBy
onChange
onHeader
onClick
onNavigate
onClick
onRecord
onFocus
onScriptInit
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
Search
application
onApplicationInit
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate

application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onApplicationInit
onAfterDelete
onExecute
onAfterDeleteAll
onLoad
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onValidateSuccess
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
Onchange
onClick
OnClick
OnFocus
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_where_current
Variable to reference the application where clause plus the filter selections(if any).
Reflects the where clause currently used.
Ex. 1:
$save_current_where = {sc_where_current};
Macro Scope
Grid application
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
sc_where_filter
This macro is used to retrieve the content generated by the "filter", according with its
selections. These are the data which will be added to the application original where clause
after filter submition.
Ex. 1:
$save_current_filter = {sc_where_filter};
Macro Scope
Grid application
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
sc_where_orig
This macro saves the application original where clause. Can be used inside ScriptCase
events, to manipulate the data, or to display it anywhere in the grid.
Ex. 1:
$save_where = {sc_where_orig};
Macro Scope
Grid application
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
sc_zip_file("File", "Zip")
This macro is used to generate ZIP files from a list of files and/or directories. The file
parameter must be one of the following:
- File name
- Directory name
- A variable containing array, which contains a files and/or directories list.
- A variable a file or a directory name.
- A variable containing array, which contains a files and/or directories list.
The zip parameter must contain the name of the zip file generated, or the path to the file.
Ex. 1: Single file compressing.

sc_zip_file("/test/sample.htm", "/tmp/test.zip");
Ex. 2: Single directory compressing.

sc_zip_file("/test", "/tmp/test.zip");
Ex. 3: Multiple files and directories in an array.

$prep = array();
$prep[] = "/test/sample.htm";
$prep[] = "/test";
sc_zip_file($prep, "/tmp/test.zip");
Macro Scope
Blank
Grid
Control Form
Search
application
onClick
onClick
onSave
onFooter
onLoadAll
onScriptInit
onGroupBy
onRefresh
OnValidate
onHeader
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onValidate
onRecord
onValidateFailure
onScriptInit
onValidateSuccess

application
onAfterDelete
onApplicationInit
onAfterDeleteAll
onExecute
onAfterInsert
onLoad
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
onBeforeDelete
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRefresh
onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Database Variables
Global variables containing database access values used by main connection.

Variables
Description
sc_glo_servidor
Server name.
sc_glo_banco
Database name.
sc_glo_tpbanco
Database type (mssql, oracle, mysql, etc).
sc_glo_usuario
Connected user name.
sc_glo_senha
Database password access.
sc_glo_senha_cript Encrypted password (S/N).
sc_glo_decimal_db Used decimal separator (point or comma).
Ex. 1:
$my_database = [sc_glo_banco];
These variables only reference the values without updating it (it is not possible to
attribute/modify the values). To define user and the password to connect to the database,
use the following variables:
Variables
Description
sc_db_master_usr User login to be used.

sc_db_master_pass Password to be used.
sc_db_master_cript Encrypted password (S/N) (see sc_encode macro).
Important: These variables only take effect during next application execution remaining
valid during all the session (unless modified).
Ex. 2: An application type "control" with a form created with information "login" and
encrypted "password". These data must be used to connect to the database, during the
system applications execution.
$temp_pass = sc_encode({password});
[sc_db_master_usr] = {login};
[sc_db_master_pass] = $temp_pass;
[sc_db_master_cript] = "S";
Macro Scope
Blank
application
onExecute
Grid
application
onClick
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onNavigate
onRecord
onScriptInit
Control Form
onBlur
onChange
onClick
onClick
onLoadAll
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Search
application
onRefresh
onSave
onScriptInit
OnValidate
Form
application
ajaxFieldonBlur
Onchange
OnClick
OnFocus
Menu
application
onApplicationInit
onExecute
onLoad
Report PDF Variables
Page numbers variables used in Report PDF.

Field
Description
{sc_page_num} Current page number.
{sc_page_tot} Total number of pages.
Macro Scope
Totalling Variables
During group by and summary processing, Scriptcase generates total variables to each
group level.
The routines are defined in event ?onGroupBy? determining the break levels and
avalilable to each record. Totals special variables are then referenced substituting the
group name for the key word ?groupby?, as in:
Variables
{count_ger}
{sum_parcel}
Description
Records total amount.
Will show the total sum
for the field "Parcel"
{sum_balance}
Will show the total sum
for the field "Balance"
{count_groupby}
Current Group records
total.
{sum_groupby_parcel} Current Group level sum
for the field ?Parcel?.
{sum_groupby_balance} Current Group level sum
for the field ?Balance?.
Ex. 1: In an application with a group by state and city that totalizes a balance field,
in the group totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance
as follows.
{sum_groupby_balance} = {sum_groupby_balance} / {count_groupby};
Macro Scope
Grid application
onFooter
onGroupBy
onHeader
onRecord
Totalling Variables (group by)
During the group by processing, Scriptcase generates total variables to each group level.
The routines are defined in event ?onGroupBy? determining the group levels. Totals
special variables are then referenced substituting the group name for the key word ?
quebra?, as in:
Variable
Description
{count_ger}
Records total amount.
{sum_parcel}
Field ?parcels? total .
{sum_balance}
Field ?Balance? total .
{count_quebra}
Current group level records total.
{sum_quebra_parcel} Current group level field ?parcels? total.
{sum_quebra_balance} Current group level field ?Balance? total.
Ex. 1: In an application with a group by state and city and that totalizes a balance
field, in the group totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the
balance as follows.
{sum_quebra_balance} = {sum_quebra_balance} / {count_quebra};
Macro Scope
Grid application
onGroupBy
Events X Applications
Reference table of available macros by Events and Applications.

Blank application
ajaxFieldonBlur
onAfterDelete
Grid application
Control Form
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit
sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_calc_dv
sc_date
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_field_display
sc_field_init_off
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_hide_groupby_rule
sc_image
sc_include
sc_language
sc_redir
sc_alert
sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_calc_dv
sc_date
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_include
sc_language
sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global
sc_set_global
sc_set_groupby_rule
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_warning
sc_zip_file
onBeforeDelete
sc_reset_change_connectio
sc_reset_global
sc_set_focus
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_warning
sc_zip_file
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onBlur
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_warning
vari?veis database
onChange
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_warning
vari?veis database
onClick
sc_ajax_message
sc_ajax_refresh
sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_confirm
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_lookup
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_commit_trans
sc_confirm
sc_date
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_exec_sql
sc_exit
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include
sc_lookup
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_warning
sc_warning
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
vari?veis database
onExecute
sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_include
sc_language
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_trunc_num
sc_warning
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
onFocus
onFooter
sc_ajax_javascript
sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_warning
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include_lib
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_reset_global
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_warning
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
vari?veis totaliza??o
onGroupBy
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_changed
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_groupby_label
sc_include
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_warning
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
vari?veis totalizacao(quebras)
onHeader
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_warning
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
onLoad
onLoadAll
sc_alert
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_disabled
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_form_show
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_label
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_focus
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_warning
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
onLoadRecord
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_color
sc_field_style
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_link
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_warning
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
onRefresh
onSave
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_changed
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_focus
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_warning
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
onScriptInit
sc_alert
sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_change_connection (
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_continue
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_exit
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_form_show
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_include
sc_label
sc_language
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global
sc_select
sc_set_focus
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_warning
sc_zip_file
onValidate
onValidateFailure
sc_alert
sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_language
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadac
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadaca
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_warning
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
onValidateSuccess
sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_change_connection (
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_include
sc_language
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadac
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadaca
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_warning
sc_zip_file
vari?veis database
Deployment
Deployment - Overview
It is common to test new applications in a local development environment. Once the applications are
satisfactorily tested in a secure environment then applications are released to production environment.
The deployment process involves publishing the ScriptCase developed applications (and libraries) in a
PHP supported WEB server.
The following topics cover the ScriptCase deployment process.
Typical Deployment (recommended)
Advanced Deployment.
Configuring a Production environment
Typical Deployment
The user friendly typical deployment process generates a package with selected applications and
libraries enabling instant project availability with minimum effort.
Step 1: Select ScriptCase menu item Project Deploy, as in the image below.
Step 2: Select the applications to deploy. It is possible to deploy all the Project or select an application
set.
Step 3: Select Typical deployment.
Step 4: Include the common libraries required by the applications in the production environment in the
deployment package. Define Project initial application.
Note: In case of re-deployment (deploying again same project applications) it is not necessary to select
Deploy with common library unless when the common libraries are updated in another ScriptCase
release.
Step 5: Choose Deployment Output. ScriptCase offers the following options:

1 - Create ZIP with applications (recommended): Upon complete the process is displayed a
download link to the deployment package.
2 - Deploy on a Server directory: ??Deploy the applications in selected directory. Enter the directory
specification as in image bellow. This option should only be used case the deployment is in the same
ScriptCase server.
3 ??? Deploy on FTP server: Deploy the applications automatically in FTP remote server. Enter
remote server required information as in image bellow.
Step 6: Upon complete the process is displayed an application deployed report.
Once the applications are deployed is necessary to configure the production environment before using
the system for the first time. Click here for more info.
Advanced Deployment
This deployment type is used to manually configure the production environment (common library) in the
production server informing the exact environment location.
Step 1: Access the ScriptCase menu item ProjectDeploy, according to image below.
Step 2: Select the applications to deploy. It is possible to deploy the entire Project (the entire application
set) or a partial set of Project applications.
Step 3: Select Advanced deployment.
Step 4: Create a deployment template to save (and re-use) the defined configuration.
Step 5: Define the production environment directory structure according to the common libraries
structure defined in the production server. Consider that environment directory root is prod_scriptcase.
See a configuration example below.
*Note ??? The character "/", means the Server Web root, utilized in relative paths.
Production Directory - Relative path to prod (dir).

/prod_scriptcase/prod
Images Directory (used for upload) - Relative path to img.
/prod_scriptcase/file/img
Temporary Directory- Relative path to tmp.
/prod_scriptcase/tmp
Documents Directory (used for upload) - Absolute path (full path) to doc.
C:/Apache/Apache2/htdocs/prod_scriptcase/file/doc
Step 6: Name the connections used for Production.
Step 7: Select used Deployment Output. ScriptCase offers the following options:
1 - Generate ZIP with applications (recommended): Upon complete the process is displayed a
download link to the deployment package.
2 ??? Deploy in Server directory:?? Deploy the applications in selected directory. This option should
only be used case the deployment is in the same ScriptCase server.
3 ??? Deploy in FTP server: Deploy the applications automatically in FTP remote server.
Step 8: Upon complete the process is displayed an application deployed report.
Step 9: The common libraries are methods required by the applications in the production environment
being required by the deployment package.
Note: In case of re-deployment (deploying again same project applications) it is not necessary to
download common library again. This info is not valid when the common libraries are update in another
ScriptCase release.
Once the applications are deployed is necessary to configure the production environment before using
the system for the first time.here . Click here for more info.
Production Environment
Production Environment Overview
Introduction - Production Environment

A production environment includes a common library set used by ScriptCase developed applications. It
includes resources like: PDF?? programming, XLS (Excel), Database Access Layer, image processing
and JavaScript libraries. ScriptCase production environment is compatible to the following platforms:
Windows
Linux
IBM I5/OS400
FreeBSD
Solaris
Mac OS
Production Server.
A Production Server, where the production environment is installed , is the server where the Scriptcase
applications are published (a Web Server supporting PHP).
Requirements:
1 - Web Server supporting PHP.
2 - Production Server configured with common libraries.
conf
Configuration directory.
file
Directory used to upload files/images, saved in sub-dir doc and img respectively.
prod
Library directory used by the applications.
tmp
Temporary file directory.
diagnosis
Configuration file with settings like: Operating System, Enabled Extensions, Directory and Files Enabled.
??Access it via browser (example: http://servidor/raiz-environment-produ????o/diagnosis.php).
info
File with info about PHP release. Access it via browser (example: http://servidor/raiz-ambiente-
produ????o/info.php).
Production Environment Management Access Interface
Production environment configuration resources interface. ??

Access it via http://host or ip/raiz-ambiente-produ????o/prod
Interface Resources.
Click here to know more about those configurations
*Note ??? See the item Connecting with Database from the WebHelp for more info on how connect the
ScriptCase.
Configuring The Production Environment
Production Environment
Extract the zip file.
Includes the common libraries in the Production environment directory _lib.

In the example below was created a directory called "system" to store the applications.
Permissions ??? Reading, Write and Execution.

For Windows Servers using Web IIS Server, is necessary to define the permissions in the directory _lib
(common libraries),
and in the CMD files (C:\WINDOWS\system32) for IIS users (IUSR_NOME-DO-SERVIDOR) .
For Unix environment, is necessary to set common libraries permissions recursively. (directoty _lib,
subdirectories and files)
Example: chmod 777 _lib -R
Creating the connection with the Database using the management interface.
Step 1: Locate the production environment management interface, in the directory _lib.
In the example: http://host or ip/system/_lib/prod
Step 2: Select Create new connection.
<img
src="http://192.168.254.248/tools/nm/sc_helpv7/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0186_new_deploy3.png"
" border="1" />
Step 3: Select the DBMS. In the example was used MySQL Database.
Step 4: Enter Database information (server id or name).

Step 5: Enter Database user id and password.
Step 6: Enter the same connection name defined in the development environment (ScriptCase).
It must be the same name since the applications are configured to use it.
Step 7: Test the connection and save the configurations.
Step 8: Run the application to verify it.
After clicking in Advanced.
Step 9: Select the decimal number separator to use in the database.
Ex: 1.21 or 1,21
Step 10: Choose if the connection will be persistent* or not.
Persistent Conexion: Persistent connections are connections that do not close when the execution of
your script ends.
Step 11: If you want to change the default charset (latin1, to MySQL) to record or edit to the database
select the desired encoding.
Editing the connection

Step 1: Select Edit connection.
Step 2: Choose the connection and edit it.
Renaming the connection

Step 1: Select Rename connection.
Step 2: Select the connection then rename it.
Optional Settings
Temporary files directory: Absolute path to the tmp folder.

Time to live (minutes) of files: Time, in minutes, the file will remain stored in the tmp folder.
Path for Java Binary: Enter the absolute path of the java binary. If you want to use a java version
different from the version installed in your computer inform the absolute path of that java.
Java Binary: Enter the java executable file name. In Windows and Linux the default is java and you do
not have to inform it, but for IBM, for example, you must to inform javac that is the name of the java
executable file.
PDF Server IP: Server's Internal IP on a network (NAT IP used to call the generated html exported by
Scriptcase).
Language: Select the language that you desire to the Production Environment.
Authorization key to view Ggoogle maps: To use the Google Maps you must have the Authorization
key, that is freely generated.
Link to get the authorization key: http://code.google.com/intl/en/apis/maps/signup.html
The key will be used only for one machine, because it's based on a digital signature.
Change Password
Step 1: Inform the current password.
Step 2: Inform the new password.

Step 3: Confirm the new password.
Tools
Tools
ScriptCase has a set of built-in tools to help the user to use its advanced options. The options available
in the Tools menu are:
SQL Builder - SQL commands fast formatting tool.
Data Dictionary - Data Repository with reusable information about your data.
Express Edit - Project Applications common attributes editor.
Create Web Help
Libraries
Locales
Layout
Sql Builder
Sql Builder
SQL QUERYS building Wizard tool. Allows the choice of databases, tables, fields, joins, order by and
where, visually.
To access it, the user must choose the database, the SQL command, tables and fields. The builder then
assemble the SQL command. Each of the sessions below covers a portion of the building process:
Database Selection
Tables Selection
Fields Selection
Joins definition
Criteria Settings
Order Settings
Running the query
Saving the query
Databases
DATABASE SELECTION
Choose the database that is used by the application.
The user must choose the data base and click in the "Confirm" button. Upon completing the operation
the wizard proceeds to next step.
Image1:Databases Folder.
Tables Selection
TABLE SELECTION
The next step, using the Tables Tab, is the tables selection used in the SQL command. To select a
table, use the arrows. The selected table is displayed on the right.
Click in Confirm to complete the selection proceed.
Figure1:Tables Folder.
Fields
Using the Fields tab, the user should select the fields used by the application. Select the fields as in
previous steps.
Click in Confirm to complete the selection and move to next step : JOINS definition.
Figure1: Fields Folder.
Attributes:
Table/Alias - Used to create an alias to the table name. It is used normally when a table is used
more than once in the SQL command or the original name is too extense or complex.
Joins
Use this tab to create join commands with SQL tables selected on Tables tab.
It can be acccessed after set the definitions in the Fields Tab.
An example of join use would be the following: In a table of customers register T1 there is the "Customer
Code" field. In a Purchase Order T2 table also there is the "Customer Code" field and the purchase
orders of the customers. If we are making a join of the tables CadClientes and CadPedVendas, we will
use a commom field ("Customer Code") and we will have as result a cartesian product of these two
tables in accordance with the kind of defined join (equal to, bigger than, smaller than...). In other words,
they will be joined and the data ordered in accordance with the kind of defined join.
Figure1: Join folder
Table 1 - Display a previously selected table list: Select the first join table.
Type - Join type:
Inner - Left Join Right Join Bigger Smaller Bigger Equal Smaller Equal Not Equal Table 2 - Display a previously selected table list: Select the second join table.
Add Button Update Button Remove Button Clean Button Chart - Presents the join command mounted;
Figure 2: Join Folder with fields.
The window initially presents two lines of fields for joins realization. Each field contains the list of the
table fields selected. If the two lines are fulfilled, clicking on the Confirm button, will be opened more
two fields, therefore the SQL Buider undrestand that the user wishes to make more joins. If not, the user
can leave the folder, therefore the commands were already incorporated in the main command that is
being mounted. To being make a join the check box on the left of the field line is automatically fulfilled.
Click in Confirm to move to next step, the Criteria settings used to define search conditions.
Criteria
Use the Criteria tab to set the search condition used by SQL Buider for each selected field.
Figure1:Conditions Folder.
Attributes :
Conditions - To set the search condition for a field, the user select the field (from a list of selected fields
in the Fields folder) and select the operation:
= Equal to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records that
contain the selected field;
> - Greater than- Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with
field values greater than the value entered in the next box;
< - Less than - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with field
values less than the value entered in the next box;
>= - Greater or equal to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all
records with field values greater or equal to the value entered in the next box;
<- - Less or equl to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all recordss
that are less or equal to the value entered in the next box;
<> Not Equal to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all recordss that
don't contain the selected field;
LIKE - Means equal and is applied to text fields, when the database doesn't allow the use of the
"=" symbol;
Example: To search for records of customers born from 01/01/1970, select the Date of birth field, select
the symbol >= and enter "01/01/1970".
Click in Confirm to move to next step : Execution folder or Saved folder.
Order By
This tab is used to set the order used to display each selected in the application.
Select the field in the combo box, and select the order criteria: ASC = Ascendant or DES = Descendant
and click on Confirm.
Figure1:Order by Folder
When confirming it, SQL Builder moves automatically to the next step : Execution folder or Saved
folder.
Run
Use this tab to execute the SQL command created from the selections, search and order criteria
defined by user.
Figure1: Execution Folder.
Attributes>
SQL command : The SQL command assembled from the user information (selections, search and
order criteria).
Records per Page - Determine number of records displayed on result. Example: 30 registers per
page;
Run Button - Executes the created command.
Copy Button - Copy the SQL command to save (copied) into the application in the SQL command
area.
Save
SAVING THE QUERY

SQL commands can be saved to be use in the future. The user can create a new command from an
already existing command.
Figure1: Save Folder.
Saved Statments - A list of existing (saved) SQL commands.

To edit the command - Edit the the SQL command.
Remove the command - Deletes the SQL command.
Save statement as: Enter a name to save the SQL command above.
Database Builder
Database Builder
Databse Builder - Overview

Database Builder allows the Scriptcase user to manage his database or create a new one.
Access it through the menu Tools >> Database Builder
Image 1: Database Builder Access.
Database Builder is available in several languages and it can manage any database enabled in
Scriptcase.
Image 2: Selecting a database.
After selected a database connection created in the project we have total control of the database.
Image 2: Database Builder Interface.
Interface:
1. SQL Command - Executes a SQL command.
2. Dump - Exports the database as a SQL dump.
3. Logout - Exit from the current database management.
4. Select Database - It allows to select any database existing in that connection.
5. Create Table - Creates new tables in the database.
6. Select - View the table records.
7. Tables - View the table structure.
8. Selected Option - Shows the path of the current option selected.
9. Database Options - Allows to edit the database, schemas and privileges
10. Seearch - It looks inside the database what was typed there.
11. Options to multi tables - Execute a function for several tables at the same time.
12. Move / Copy - Move or Copy all information from the current database to another one.
13. Creating - There we have options to create: Tables, Views, Procedures, Functions and Events.
Sql Command
It allows us to execute any SQL command or import a .sql file to execute it.
Image 1: Database Builder SQL Command.
Sql Dump
It allows us to export the database through a SQL dump to several export formats.
Image 1: Database Builder SQL Dump.
Create Table
It allows us to create new tables in the database.
Image 1: Database Builder Create Table.
Select
This option allows us to see all records from a table. It executes a SQL command: SELECT * FROM
table
Image 1: Database Builder Select.
Table Options
In this screen we can see the structure of the table.
Image 1: Database Builder Table.
Alter Table - Clicking on it, we can alter the table structure. By adding or changing field names, types,
etc.
Image 2: Database Builder Alter Table.
New Item - Clicking on it, we can insert a new record into the table.
Image 3: Database Builder New Item.
Indexes, Foreign Keys and Triggers - They allows to add or alter Indexes, Foreign Keys and Triggers.
Data Dictionary
Data Dictionary
Using ScriptCase data dictionary users can create a data repository to use in generated applications.
The data associated to database table fields are stored to be used in different applications. It very useful
to create a normalized data environment in an organization. It also improves development by speeding
up data update and by minimizing errors (updates data only once in a single place - the repository - and
have it used in all applications).
Allows to standardize:
Data Type
Label
Size
Decimals
Description
OPERATIONS
Operations performed in the repositories:

Open - Determines the tables containing definitions and the fields used.
Properties - Displays and updates selected repository general definitions.
Delete - Removes (deletes) selected repository.
Repository
Creates new repository for a specific data base.
Since a Scriptcase repository is associated to database table fields there is a logic relationship between
a repository to a database. ScriptCase data dictionaries are organized by database.
Attributes:
Data Dictionary Name - Repository ID.
Description - Repository description;
Connection - database connection used.
Associate dictionary with connection - link your repository with the connection.
When a repository is created the system identifies the database tables existent. Add new tables to the
repository or update the tables.
Use the Databases Tables tab to select an existent database table and include it to the repository. It is
possible to add a lable to it to be used externenally to the database.
Figure2:Database Tables.
Use the Repository Tables tab to update the information about a repository table.
Figure3: Data Dictionary Tables
A created repository can be included in the language files.
Figure4:Language file index generation.
Table Update
Attributes:
Data Type - ScriptCase field type.
Label - Enter a label to the field.

Length (DB) - Define the field length in the applications;
Decimals - Use for fields type DECIMAL, NUMERIC, etc.
SQL Type - Database field type.
Edit
Figure1: Data Dictionary Properties.
The Data Dictionary properties are displayed. Edit the property and click in Update to commit the
changes.
Figure2: Update Data Dictionary properties.
Attributes:
Data Dictionary - Data Dictionary ID.
Description - Repository description.
Connection -Table connection used.
Express Edition
Express Edition
A new Scriptcase resource now available is APLICATIONS EXPRESS EDITION (by project). Using this
resource is possible to define attributes common to more then one project application. See below a minitutorial on how to use the EXPRESS EDITION step-by-step.
1- Select the application to edit (edit mode): All or select a set.
Figure1:Selecting the applications.
2 - Selecting a application set to edit.
Figura2: Select application to edit using Express Edition.
3 - Select the properties to apply to the selected application as well as the Express Edition type
(individually per application or "in bulk").
Figure3: Select Express Edition type.
4- Define the selected applications common attributes. Click in Apply to perform the Express Edition.
Figure4: Editing Parameters.
Helpcase
Overview
This tool is used to create your application?s manual, basically you can create and edit. HTML files,
upload images, you can also create navigation menus or bookmarks, searches. Is very easy to integrate
your applications with the help files generated by the help case.
Creating A Manual
Creating a new manual

One Manual built on HelpCase is always associated to one ScriptCase project. As you can see on
picture1, on the creating interface you don?t need to specify the project because you are already
positionated on a project.
Picture1: Creating a new manual.
Editing A Project
Picture1: WebHelp main interface.
Top Buttons Bar:

This bar is responsible for maintaining the folders and files in the directory selected.Initially, the project
contains a single directory called root (
). The directory that you create will appear in the left
treeview menu .
-Creating a new .HTML file
Creates a new .HTML file on the selected directory.
Picture2: Creating a new .HTML to the Manual.
- Creating a new folder

Creates a new folder on the current directory.
Picture3: Creating a new folder into the /root
Picture4: Manual folders.
- Removing a folder and all it?s files

The root folder can?t be removed.
Project Maintence
Generate Webhelp - Compiles your manual into a frames page, with bookmarks and a search page.
Upload - Uploads files to your manual project.
Initial Page - Link to edit your manual?s start page.
Header - Link to edit your manual?s header.
CSS - Link to edit your manual?s CSS.
Links - Here you can crate links from your system?s applications and your manual?s pages.
Libraries
Libraries resource allows implementing standard routines in many applications and projects. You can
use three different levels (Public, by Project and by User). For libraries at Project level , use the option
Default Values in the Menu Project so that each new application already is created with the libraries.
Locales
Locales
Scriptcase allows to create applications with Internationalization.

Using a Language Editor select which languages will be used in a project and maintain texts displayed
on applications.
With the Regional Settings Editor define rules to format numbers, currency, date and time.
Languages
Regional settings
Languages
The ScriptCase language tool allows to translate developed application standard messages enabling a
comfortable and friendly system usage.
Using this tool is possible to create customized messages to be used in different applications. A multilanguage project can be developed since language selection can be changed at authentication time or
during application execution.
Figure1: Language Settings.
Messages Menu
Using the messages menu is possible to select and edit messages by blocks, divided into ScriptCase
Messages and My messages. New blocks can be created using the item New Folder. Selecting a block
an available message index is displayed and open to edit.
Figure2: Message Menu.
Language Menu
Regional Settings
The regional settings allows to define monetary currency parameters, date and number formatting
according to the region where the application is used. Click in customize to enter the values better
suitable to the applications.
Image1: Regional Settings.
Customizing the Regional Settings.
The item Number define parameters like decimal symbol, negative format, and digits grouping. These
are parameters applied in applications using decimal type field.
Image2: Regional settings - Number parameters.
In the Currency unit are available parameters like currency symbol, currency positive format among
others. These parameters applied in applications using currency type field.
Image3: Regional settings - Currency parameters.
The items Date and Time define parameters applied in date and time formatting used in Date and Time,
Time, and Date type fields.
Image4: Regional settings - Time parameters.
Image5: Regional settings - Date parameters.
Layout
Display
Layout
It is possible to edit or create layouts to be used in Projects developed with ScriptCase. ScriptCase
Layouts can be defined using: Themes, Templates, Buttons, Group Buttons and CSS Menus options.
Themes option uses a CSS Editor to create applications visualization standards. In Templates, edit
and/or add Header and Footer templates. Using Buttons and Group Buttons is possible create or edit
Text or Image for buttons to customize the generated applications. CSS Menus uses a menu CSS Editor
to create menu themes for menu applications.
Figure1: Layout Interface.
Themes
Buttons
Group Buttons
Templates
CSS Menus
Themes
In Themes using a CSS Editor is possible to create applications visualization standards. It is possible to
create new themes or edit an already existing one.
Figure1: ScriptCase CSS Publishing Interface.
When creating a new theme, it inherits all attributes of the selected theme.
Figure2: ScriptCase CSS Publishing Interface.
Buttons
Using the Buttons Management option is possible to edit or create new buttons set associated to
Schemas. Buttons set can include text button or image buttons.
Figure1: Buttons Management Interface.
Creating a New Button Schema
Click in New in the Button Schema Toolbar.

In the first tab (Buttons) is displayed the buttons used in the ScriptCase. Each button can have different
characteristics (image, text or link).
For images buttons is displayed an upload field to upload the button image. For text and link buttons use
the tabs: Button style and link style to edit the CSS style.
Figure2: Buttons tab.
Editing Buttons style.
Use this tab to define the CSS button style used in your schema. All schemas already have a default
style (it can`t be removed). If needed more then one layout for text buttons click in NEW and configure
the new style. Back in the Buttons tab is possible to select the new style (see Image4).
Figure3: Button style edit tab.
Configuring a button Link style.
As with text type buttons is possible to define more then one link type button and define each one style
as css, default or a new user created style.
Figure5: Link style edit tab.
Templates
Templates resource allows to include HTML files to be used in Headers, Footers and Custom Grids(User
defined orientation). For example: billets, invoices, business cards, etc.
Figure1: Edit Templates Interface: Heading, Free Format and Footer.
It should be a HTML file. We can stipulate where Scriptcase fields will be displayed on the HTML file
using "curly brackets" {variable}. As you can see below:
HTML Code
<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tr>
<td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center">

{Name} {Address} {City}- {State} 
{ZIP}

</td>
</tr>
</table>
Running the HTML code above.
{Name}
{Address}
{City}-{State}
{ZIP}
Remember that everthing that comes insde curly brackets are making reference to the application fields,
so when there is a {Name} it will be talking about the field "Name" of your application.
In the Template we can define a Loop feature using a flag (see in red):
Cdigo HTML
<tr>

{ZIP}

</td>

</tr>
</table>
The red parts define where the loop will start and finish. The iterations amount is defined by "Columns
per Page" of the Grid.
eg: If "Columns per Page" is 3 so it will display the following result.
HTML code
<tr>
{ZIP}

</td>
{ZIP}

</td>
{ZIP}

</td>
</tr>
</table>
Running the HTML Code above.
{Name}
{Name}
{Name}
{Address}
{Address}
{Address}
{City}-{State} {City}-{State} {City}-{State}
{ZIP}
{ZIP}
{ZIP}
Once ".html" file iscreated include it in Scriptcase accessing "Tools>>Layout>>Templates".

Select "Free Format" and Upload the file.
Then Create a new Grid application and select "User Defined" Option in "Orienation" setting.
Access "Grid>>Layout>>Settings" and select the "Body Template".
Now associate the template variables with the Grid fields. (Grid>>Select Fields)
Format the fields and Run.
Group Buttons
Using the Group Buttons Management option is possible to edit or create new group of buttons set.
Buttons set can include text button or image buttons.
Figure1: Buttons Management Interface.
Creating a New Button Schema
Click in New in the Button Schema Toolbar.

In the first tab (Buttons) is displayed the buttons used in the ScriptCase. Each button can have different
characteristics (image, text or link).
For images buttons is displayed an upload field to upload the button image. For text and link buttons use
the tabs: Button style and link style to edit the CSS style.
Figure2: Buttons tab.
Editing Buttons style.
Use this tab to define the CSS button style used in your schema. All schemas already have a default
style (it can`t be removed). If needed more then one layout for text buttons click in NEW and configure
the new style. Back in the Buttons tab is possible to select the new style (see Image4).
Figure3: Button style edit tab.
Configuring a button Link style.
As with text type buttons is possible to define more then one link type button and define each one style
as css, default or a new user created style.
Figure5: Link style edit tab.
Css Menus
The CCS menu is used to create/edit styles for the menu layouts.
Figure1: ScriptCase CSS Menu editor.
To create a new menu theme it will needed to chose the target of this new theme, it can be saved as
Public (the theme will be avaliable to everyone who uses scriptcase to use it), it can be saved as Project
(the theme will be avaliable only for this particular project) and it can be saved as User (the theme will
only be avalibale to the use who create it).
On the CSS editor we can edit the CSS settings from the menu and his submenu, selecting the menu
color, menu hover color, font settings, alignment and edge configuration.
Figure2: ScriptCase CSS Menu editor.
Options
Options
ScriptCases production and development environments are easy to manage. The developer can
customize the environment while managers can set security polices and fault recovery process.
The management options are grouped in categories as follow:
Settings - ScriptCase administrative tasks. The options in this menu allows the user to install
licenses, update to new ScriptCase versions, define projects security polices, manage fault recovery
and Configure systemparameters and attributes.
My ScriptCase - Customize the development environment.
Change password - Password administration.
Settings
Settings
The ScriptCase administration is restricted to users with ADMINISTRATOR profile. During the
ScriptCase installation a system administrator account is created.
Figure1: Administration Menu
Here is possible to customize the ScriptCase general environment.
System
System
Customize system folders, system default variables and other system settings.
Figure1: System Settings Options.
The ScriptCase environment according to the business group needs by selecting from the options below:
System Settings - Define ScriptCase default settlings: language, backup options, version control
and others.
Default Values - Define attributes used as new projects default options.
System Folders - Define default path and folders.
System Settings
Figure1: System Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Language - Select ScriptCase Interface language. This is the language used in ScriptCase
development environment.
Application Automatic Number of Copies - Determine the number of application copies that
ScriptCase automatically saves. ScriptCase keeps multiple copies of each application. Each
"version" can be identified by a timestamp.
Alert if the last backup is older than (days) - Number of days used to calculate and display the
"expired backup" alert message. ScriptCase warns when a backup is due.
Show backup alert for - The users group informed with the backup expired message . The
options are Only Administrators or All the users.
Check for ScriptCase update versions after login - Days to check for ScriptCase new versions
(at login). The options are the following ones: Do not check, Check every day and Check define
day.
Check version every - Used when option Check define day is selected for the item Check for
ScriptCase update versions (at login) above.
ScriptCase Session Timeout (min) - ScriptCase Session time limited in minutes. Useful when
more then one developer use a single license.
Use cache for table fields - Speed up long table processing. Useful when using very large tables.
SMTP Server - Enter the sending email server. Used to automatic e-mail, for example when the
user forgets the login password.
SMTP Port - Enter the server port , default is Port 25.
SMTP User - Enter the server user.

SMTP Password - Enter the user email server password.
SMTP E-Mail - Enter the email used to sent the password.
PROXYServer - Enter the proxy server id. Scriptcase uses it to access the web for update / version
control checks.
PROXY Gateway - Enter the proxy gateway.
PROXY User - Enter the proxy user.
PROXY Password - Enter the proxy password.
To use session in database - Store session data in database. ScriptCase Applications can use
session variables stored in the database. This options is very useful when working with session
variables and also load balance it also increase environment security.
Show an option in the deployment to store the PHP session in the Database - Select session
data storage format during deployment.
Default Values
All the attributes defined here are copied to new projects default options.
Figure1 Default ValuesInterface.
Attributes:
Use Ajax - Use Ajax processing in new projects. Useful when creating projects where Ajax
resources are undesirable.
Logo Image -Logotype image name used in application heading . Customize the project using the
same logo in all application header.
Report page row limit - Number of rows to display in each application page.
Themes - Color Schema.
Display Summary - Display summary line.
Templates
------------------------------------------------------
Grid Toolbar's Buttons

Each ScriptCase grid application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition
here as default to all grid applications in the project.
Form Toolbar's Buttons

Each ScriptCase form application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition
Search Toolbar's Buttons

Each ScriptCase Search application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition
System Folders
Define default path and folders.

Inform ScriptCase the path to the actual storage area where to locate information used by the
applications.
Figure1:System Folders Interface.
Attributes:
Web Server Document Root Directory - WEB server root , for IIS the default is
inetpub/wwwroot, for the apache servers apache/htdocs.
Application Path - Path used to store created applications.
Common Libs Path - Path used to store Scriptcase Common Libs.
Documents Folder- Directory to stored documents in used the applications.
Images Folder - Directory used to store the images used in the applications.
Temporary Files Folder - This temporary storage is an HTML condition.
Projects And User

Projects And User
Figure1: Project and User.
The ScriptCase is based on the concept of Projects. It is used as applications logical repository. Users
must be associates to Projects with a development profile that is individual for each project.
Projects - Define projects security polices.
Users - Create users and associated profiles.
Projects
Display all projects developed and allows to manage the projects available.
Figure1: Project Management Summary Interface.
Click in the
to display project attributes as in the following screen:
Figure2: Project Details Interface.
Users
Figure1: Interface.
Enter the a user name an click in
to find a user.
Note: A user list is displayed with information about the available users and action options to apply to selected users.
Click in
to display user details.
Click in
to edit user information.
Click in
o change user password.
Figure3: Password Interface.
To create a new user click in the New User button.
Figure4: Create User Interface.
Attributes:
User - User ID.
E-mail - User e-mail address.
New Password -Enter a new password to the user;
Confirms Password- Enter the password again to confirm;
Privilege- Define user ScriptCase access profile .
Project - Projects accessible to the developer. (select from the available projects)
The screen below allows you to select the projects to be managed by the user. All projects will
be displayed in the box left and right in the box will display the projects that were selected
through the selection bar, to be administered by the user. After making this process you must
click the save button and then the user will be included.
Figura5: Projects Administrator Interface.
Services
Services
Figure1: Services Options Interface.
Tools used in fault recovery management such as:

OnLine
Backup
Restore
ConImageLog
View Log
Online
ScriptCase users online log information.
Figure1: Online interface.
The following information is available about each user:

User ? User login id.
IP ? User work station IP.
Logon ? User login time (hour and date).
Access ?User last access time (hour and date).
OnLine ? User login elapsed time.
Page ? ScriptCase page that the user is accessing at the moment.
Application ? ScriptCase applications that the user is executing at the moment.
Backup
Figure1: Backup Interface.
Enter a backup file name and select the backup option desired:
Partial Backup (only some objects will be selected) or General backup to backup all the objects.
Figure2: Partial Backup Interface.
Click in
to select all the application elements (users, connections, projects,
schemas, templates, buttons, lookups, icons and images).
Click in the Action desired
element to include in the backup.
to perform the operation on selected element and select the
A final report will be displayed when backup is completed.
Figure3:Backup Interface.
It is recommended to download the archive, in the end of in process to another machine.
Restore
A list of files available to restore is displayed.
Figure1: Restore Interface.
Upload a file to restore.

It is possible to upload a backup that is store in a zip file. Click in
files.
to upload and restore (.zip)
Enter the information about the file to upload or click in browse to find it.
Figure2: Restore Interface.
Once the files are available to ScriptCase select it from a display above.
Select the files to restore and click in the action buttons

file.
to perform the operation on selected
After selecting a file to restore choose the restore process by configuring the restore process directives.
Restore process selection.
Figure3: Interface options of Restore.
The file selected previously is displayed with information about creation time and usage Status.
If Duplicated - Select between the options : NOT TO RESTORE or OVERWRITE the applications.
Restore Type - Choose between restoring all files or a partial Restore.
Partial Restore
Figure4: Partial Restore Interface.
Select elements to restore individually.

Restore Report
A status report is displayed after the restore is completed.
Configure Log
The ScriptCase keeps a Log with information about user performed main operations. There is a default
selection of operations. The Log can be customized to record only specific operations according to
business needs and preferences.
Important: For security reasons do not unselect all options.
Figure1: Log Interface.
View Log
This feature allows the administrator to monitor the main operations carried by ScriptCase users. The
operations are displayed by Date and information such as: user login ID, user workstation IP , time, the
operation type of and Action is displayed.
In the displayed calendar the days are shown in three tonalities, clear means that he didnt have log,
darkest he registers the days where he had access, and of pink color the day that this chosen team.
Figure1: View Log Interface.
Scriptcase Update
This option can be used to bring ScriptCase up to date. Including corrections, programs , documnetation
lnew versions, etc. All the update process is made through the Internet directly from ScriptCase site. We
recommend a connection with minimum speed of 128 Kbps.
Figure1: Interface Scriptcase Update.
FIRST STAGE (To verify ScriptCase Update)

In this first stage the verification in the site of the ScriptCase will be made if a new version of software
ScriptCase Update exists, in case that a version exists but new the update is made.
Figure2: Interface Verifying Update.
SECOND STAGE (To look updates)

Its system will be examined and identified the available updates directly of the site of the ScriptCase.
Figure3: Interface To lower and to install joined updates.
THIRD STAGE
The ScriptCase will directly lower of the site ScriptCase the found updates, and will make the update of
its system.
Figure4: Screen successfully effected Update
Licenses
Licenses
ScriptCase license management.

Once using the ScriptCase there request a new license using this option. Then it is possible to register a
license and install it also using the options on the menu below.
Figure1: Licenses Options.
Register On-line
ScriptCase access the site, verifies and updates all the license permissions.
Figure1: Register OnlineInterface.
Enter a valid ScriptCase serial number and press the register button.
After successful registration your ScriptCase copy ready to use with all available functionality.
License Request
Request a ScriptCase license:
Figure1: License Request Interface.

Click in the request button to download a .rec file by following the link displayed. A .lic file will be send
via e-mail attachment. Go to installation option to install the license receive by e-mail.
Installation
Click in the browser button to find the full path to the license file received. Click in register button to
complete the installation.
Figure1: License Installation Interface.
My Scriptcase
It allows to define default values to Scriptcase.
Image1: My Scriptcase Interface.
Language - Define the language used in the Scriptcase GUI ( Error Messages, Control Messages,
etc.).
Security Resources - Enables you to disable the use of security in the development.
Initial Information - Select information displayed in the ScriptCase Main Menu.
Pop-up Window - Enable pop-up window display for the selected resource.
Main MenuInterface - Updates Applications Menu (the space between the Treeview menu and the
applications display menu).
Application Edition Interface - Update the Application width.
Applications Creation - The options are the Wizard (Standard) and Express (Express Edition).
Auto Save - Allows automatically saving changes in ScriptCase.
Select the first menu item - Select the first menu item.
Change Password
Accessing Options > Change Password menu, is possible to update the password to access Scriptcase.
Image1: Main Menu - Options.
Type the old password, the new password, then confirm the new password. Click on Save to modify
and save it.
Image2: Change Password Interface.
The password is case sensitive. That is, words can differ in meaning based on differing use
of uppercase and lowercase letters. admin is different from Admin and ADMIN
Appendix
Appendix
See also some useful information at :

Programming Tips
Variables in Scriptcase
Variables In Scriptcase
Dependent Applications Concepts.
ScriptCase considers dependent applications those applications (Form or Grid) that need to receive
external parameters (variables) passed by Get or Post HTML methods.
To build a Dependent Grid specify which parameters receive external values by using square brackets [ ]
to indicate a "global variable" on the WHERE or HAVING clause. For example:
SELECT field1,field2 FROM table_duplicates WHERE cod_client = [glo_clientid]
Scriptcase uses variables in any application event or method. There are Local Variable and Gobal
variables:
Local Variables
It should be used as a common PHP variable (beginning with $).
$var1 = 'local';
It is used in only in an event or method. Its scope ends at the end of the event.
If it is being used in onLoad event it will be used just in that event.
Global Variables
Before the browser sends the information, it encodes it using a scheme called URL encoding. In this
scheme, name/value pairs are joined with equal signs and different pairs are separated by the
ampersand.
GET Method - sends the encoded user information appended to the page request. The page and
the encoded information are separated by the ? character.
POST Method - transfers information via HTTP headers. The information is encoded as described
in case of GET method and put into a header called QUERY_STRING.
Scriptcase uses global variables with square brackets.
[var2] = 'global';
It can be called in any event or method of an application.
Note 1: A local variable can be a global variable if you use sc_set_global

$var3 = 'testing';
// var3 is a local variable
sc_set_global($var3);
// transforming var3 in a global variable
echo [var3] ." global variables";
// Now we can call [var3] in any other event
Session Variables It is used like a global variable (with square brackets)

[var4] = 'session';
But you must access "Application>>Global Variables" to set var4 to be "SESSION".
Session variables can be called in any event of any application.
If created it in the login application it can be called it in any project application.
Note 2: Accessing "Application>>Global Variables" you can define if a global/session variable is IN or

OUT variable.
If the application is CREATING the variable, it should be an OUT variable.
If the application is RECEIVING the variable from another one, it should be an IN variable. (IN is default)
Note 3: Global and Session variables can be reseted using sc_reset_global macro.
sc_reset_global ([var3],[var4]);
Fields Variables Field values can be called in an event using "curly brackets".
{field_x} = 'field_x receive this value';
{field_y} = [var3];
{field_z} = {field_y};
Programming
Programming
This section offers PHP programming tips and available Macros in the ScriptCase.
PHP programming tips

Scriptcase Macros
SQL programming tips
Php Commands
if
else
elseif
while
do while
for
foreach
break
continue
functions
date
strpos
str-replace
ltrim
rtrim
trim
substr
substrreplace
array
activex
Arrays
An Array in the PHP is currently a commanded map. A map is a type that relates values with keys. You
can use it as an array, or a list (vector), hashtable, dictionary, collection, stack, line and probably more.
As you can have another Array PHP as a value, you can easily simulate trees.The explanation of these
structures is beyond the target of this manual.
Syntax
An Array can be created with the constructor of Array() language.
array( [chave =>] value
, ...
)
// key pode ser tanto string ou um integer
// value pode ser qualquer coisa
<?php
$arr = array("foo" => "bar", 12 => true);
echo $arr["foo"]; // bar
echo $arr[12]; // 1
?>
The key can be integer or a string.

The value can be any type PHP:
<?php
$arr = array("somearray" => array(6 => 5, 13 => 9, "a" =>
42));
echo $arr["somearray"][6]; // 5
echo $arr["somearray"][13]; // 9
echo $arr["somearray"]["a"]; // 42
?>
If you to specify a key that already in use, then the value associated to it is updated.
<?php
array(5 => 43, 32, 56, "b" => 12);
// ... this array
array(5 => 43, 6 => 32, 7 => 56, "b" => 12);
?>
Creating/modifying with the square brakets syntax

That is another way to create and/or update an array as in the example below.
$arr[key] = valuer;
$arr[] = value;
//key can be integer or string
// value can be anything
To remove a pair key/value, you need to apply the unset().

<?php
$arr = array(5 => 1, 12 => 2);
$arr[] = 56; // The same as $arr[13] = 56;
$arr["x"] = 42; // new element to array with "x" key

unset($arr[5]); //remove an array element
unset($arr); // remove the complete array
?>
It notices that the greater entire key, used for, this necessarily don?t need existing in the Array. It can
have existed in the Array since the last time that the Array was indexed. He sees the following example.
<?php
// Creating an array
$array = array(1, 2, 3, 4, 5);
print_r($array);
// Removing the array values leaving an empty structure.
foreach ($array as $i => $value) {
unset($array[$i]);
}
print_r($array);
// Adding an item
$array[] = 6;
print_r($array);
// Reindexing
$array = array_values($array);
$array[] = 7;
print_r($array);
?>
The example above must produce the following exit:
Array
(
[0] => 1
[1] => 2
[2] => 3
[3] => 4
[4] => 5
)
Array
(
)
Array
(
[5] => 6
)
Array
(
[0] => 6
[1] => 7
)
.
<?php
$a = array( 'color' => 'red',
'flavor' => 'sweet',
'form' => 'round',
'name' => 'apple',
4// key 0
);
// or
$a['color'] = 'red';
$a['flavor'] = 'sweet';
$a['form'] = 'round';
$a['name'] ='apple';
$a[] = 4; // key 0
$b[] = 'a';
$b[] = 'b';
$b[] = 'c';
// array( 0 => 'a' , 1 => 'b' , 2 => 'c' ),
// or array('a', 'b', 'c')
?>
break
Break cancels the execution of commands like foreach while, do. .while or switch current.
Break accepts an optional numerical argument.
<?php
$arr = array ('um', 'dois', 'trs', 'quatro', 'STOP', 'cinco');
while (list (, $val) = each ($arr)) {
if ($val == 'STOP') {
break;
}
echo "$val \n";
}
$i = 0;
while (++$i) {
switch ($i) {
case 5:
echo "No 5 \n";
break 1;
case 10:
echo "N# 10; \n";
break 2;
default:
break;
}
}
?>
Continue
Continue is used inside of loops structures to jump out the current Loop remaining portion of the iteration
and to continue the execution at the beginning of the next iteration.
<?php
while (list ($key, $value) = each ($arr)) {
if (!($key % 2)) {
continue;
}
do_something_odd ($value);
}
$i = 0;
while ($i++ < 5) {
echo "Out \n";
while (1) {
echo " Middle \n";
while (1) {
echo " Inside \n";
continue 3;
}
echo "It will never be displayed. \n";
}
echo "Neither this \n";
}
?>
date
(PHP 3, PHP 4 )
date - Format the date and local hour.
Description
string date ( string format [, int timestamp])
String in accordance with returns one the format from string using the given whole number timestamp
or to the local current hour if no teamses tamp is given. In other words,timestamp is optional and the
standard for the value of time.
Table1. The following characters are recognized in format to parameter string.
format
Description
character
Exemples
(return values)
Lowercase Ante meridiem and Post am or pm

meridiem
Uppercase Ante meridiem and Post AM ou PM

meridiem
Swatch Internet time
Dia do ms, 2 digitos com leading 01 to 31

zeros
Text representing day, with 3 letters Mon through Sun
Text representing month
January through
December
12-hour format no leading zeros
1 a 12
24-hour format no leading zeros
0 a 23
12-hour format with leading zeros
01 a 12
24-hour format with leading zeros
00 a 23
Minutes with leading zeros
00 para 59
000 at 999
summer time
1 summer time,
0 no summer
time
Day no leading zeros
1 to 31
Text representing week days
Sunday through
Saturday
leep year
1 leep year, 0
not leep year
Month (numeric) with leading zeros 01 a 12
Text representing month in short (3 Jan a Dec

letters)
Month (numeric) no leading zeros
Diferena ao horrio de Greenwich Example: +0200

(GMT) em horas
RFC 822 formatted date
Example: Thu,
21 Dec 2000
16:01:07 +0200
Seconds with leading zeros
00 a 59
Sufixo ordinal ingls para o dia do st, nd, rd ou th.

ms, 2 caracteres
Funciona
bem
com j
Days in a month
28 a 31
Timezone setting
Examples: EST,
MDT ...
Seconds since the Unix Epoch See also time()

(January 1 1970 00:00:00 GMT)
week day numeric
ISO-8601 week number of year, Example: 42 (the

weeks starting on Monday (added in 42nd week in the
PHP 4.1.0)
year)
Year with 4 digits
Examples: 1999
ou 2003
Year with 2 digits
Examples: 99 ou
03
1 a 12
0 (for
Sunday)
through 6 (for
Saturday)
Day in a year
0 a 366
Timezone offset in seconds. The -43200

offset for timezones west of UTC is 43200
always negative, and for those east
of UTC is always positive.
at
Example 1. date() examples

<?php
// Prints something like: Wednesday
echo date("l");
// Prints something like: Wednesday 15th of January 2003 05:51:38 AM
echo date ("l dS of F Y h:i:s A");
// Prints: July 1, 2000 is on a Saturday
echo "July 1, 2000 is on a " . date ("l", mktime(0,0,0,7,1,2000));
?>
<?php
// Assuming today is: March 10th, 2001, 5:16:18 pm
$today = date("F j, Y, g:i a"); // March 10, 2001, 5:16 pm
$today = date("m.d.y"); // 03.10.01
$today = date("j, n, Y"); // 10, 3, 2001
$today = date("Ymd"); // 20010310
$today = date('h-i-s, j-m-y, it is w Day z '); // 05-16-17, 10-03-01, 1631
1618 6 Fripm01
$today = date('\i\t \i\s \t\h\e jS \d\a\y.'); // It is the 10th day.
$today = date("D M j G:i:s T Y"); // Sat Mar 10 15:16:08 MST 2001
$today = date('H:m:s \m \i\s\ \m\o\n\t\h'); // 17:03:17 m is month
$today = date("H:i:s"); // 17:16:17
?>
do..while
Loops do. .while is similar to loop, except for the fact of that the condition is verified in the end of each
iteration instead of in the start. The main difference of loops while regular is that the first iteration of a
Loop of .while guaranteeing is executed (the condition alone is verified in the end of the iteration)
whereas it can necessarily not twirl in a normal Loop while (the condition is verified in the start of each
iteration, if it is evaluated as FALSE soon in the start, the execution of the Loop would finish
immediately).
It has only syntax for loops of while:
<?php
$i = 0;
do {
print $i;
} while ($i > 0);
?>
Loop above would twirl accurately one time, since that after the first iteration, when the condition is
verified, it is evaluated as it FALSE isn?t greater who zero 0) and the execution of the Loop finishes.
Advanced users of C can be made familiar to the differentiated use of the Loop of .while, allowing to the
end of the execution in the way them code blocks, generalizing them with it .while (0), and using the
instruction break. I break up it of code following demonstrates this:
<?php do {if ($i < 5) {print "i is not big enough ";break;}$i *=
$factor;if ($i < $minimum_limit) {break;}print "i is Ok";/*
process i */} while(0);?>
If it doesn?t worry if you it did not understand this of the certain form no way or. You can codify simple or
exactly powerful scripts without using this ?resource?.
else
Frequently you go to want executing an instruction if a certain condition will be found and a different
instruction if the condition will not be found. That is what else makes. Else extends to a command if to
execute an instruction case the expression in the command if either evaluated as it FALSE. For
example, the code to follow would show it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b and it isn?t
greater that b contrary case:
<?php
if ($a > $b) {
echo "a is greater than b";
} else {
echo "a is NOT greater than b";
}
?>
The command else is only executed if the expression if will be evaluated as FALSE, and if having any
expression elseif, if all they will only be evaluated as it also FALSE (it sees elseif).
elseif
elseif, as its name suggests, is a combination of if and else. In the same way that else, it extends to a
command if executing a different instruction in the case of the original expression if to be evaluated as
FALSE. However, in contrast to else, it will only execute that alternative expression if the conditional
expression of elseif will be evaluated as TRUE. For example, the code following would show it is greater
that b, a it is equal the b or it she is minor who b:
<?php
if ($a > $b) {
echo "a is bigger than b";
} elseif ($a == $b) {
echo "a is equal to b";
} else {
echo "a is smaller than b";
}
?>
If can have several inside of the same instruction. The first expression elseif(it will be had) that it will be
evaluated as TRUE will be executed. In the PHP, you also it can write ?else if? (in two words) and the
behavior will be identical to one 'elseif' (in one alone word). The meaning syntactic is slightly different (if
you are made familiar to C, them you have behavior the same), but in the end of accounts both would
have the same behavior accurately.
The command is only executed if the preceding expression if and any previous expressions elseif will be
evaluated as FALSE, and the current expression elseif will be evaluated as TRUE.
for
Loops will be is the bows most complex in PHP. They behave as its compatible in C. syntax of a Loop
will be is:
for (expr1; expr2; expr3) instructions
The first expression (expr1) is evaluated (executed) a time unconditionally in the start of the Loop.
In the start of each iteration, expr2 is evaluated. If it is evaluated as TRUE, the Loop continue and (s)
the command (s) nestled (s) (they are) is executed (s). If she is evaluated as SHE FALSE, the
execution of the 'Loop' finishes.
In the end of each iteration,expr3 is evaluated (executed).
Each one of the expressions can be empty.expr2> empty means that the Loop can twirl indefinitely
(PHP considers it implicitly as TRUE, as in C). This can?t be so useless how much you can think,
therefore frequently you can want to finish the 'Loop' using a break conditional instruction instead of
using the expression-truth of it you will be.
It considers the following examples. All they show to numbers of 1 the 10:
<?php
/* example 1 */
for ($i = 1; $i <= 10; $i++) {
print $i;
}
/* example 2 */
for ($i = 1; ; $i++) {
if ($i > 10) {
break;
}
print $i;
}
/* example 3 */
$i = 1;
for (;;) {
if ($i > 10) {
break;
}
print $i;
$i++;
}
/* example 4 */
for ($i = 1; $i <= 10; print $i, $i++);
?>
The first example seems to be prettiest (or perhaps the room), but you can perceive that the possible
use of empty expressions in bows will be if it becomes practical in some occasions.
The PHP also supports the alternative syntax of two-points bows will be:
for (expr1; expr2; expr3): instructions; ...; endfor;
foreach
The PHP4 (but not it PHP3) includes a constructor foreach, much similar to the Perl and other
languages. This offers an easy way to iterar on matrices. foreach only functions with arrays, and will
launch an error if to try to use it in an variable of any different type or in variable not initialized. It has two
syntaxes; second it is an abbreviation, but useful, of the first one:
foreach (expressao_array as $valor) instructions
foreach (expressao_array as $chave => $valor) instructions
The first form sweeps one given first one given for expression_array. In each Loop, the value of the
current element is attributed the $value and the internal hand of the matrix is advanced in a position
(thus, in the next iteration you it will be looking at for the next element).
The second form makes the same thing, except for the fact of that the key of the current element will be
attributed to the 0 variable $key in each iteration.
Note: When foreach initiates its first execution, the internal hand of the matrix is zeroed
automatically for the first element of the Array. This means that you do not need to call reset()
before a Loop foreach.
Note: It also notices that foreach operates on a copy of the specified Array, not it proper Array,
and therefore, the hand of the original Array is not modified as in the instruction each(), that it
modifies the element of the selected Array, but this doesn?t reflect the original Array. However,
the internal hand of the original Array is put into motion by the processing of the Array.
Assuming that the bow foreach twirls until the end, the internal hand of the Array will be located
in the end of the Array.
Note: foreach has the ability to prevent messages of error with ?@?.
You can have noticed that following items is functionally identical:
<?php
$arr = array("one", "two", "three");
reset ($arr);
while (list(, $value) = each ($arr)) {
echo "Valor: $value \n";
}
foreach ($arr as $value) {
echo "Valor: $value \n";
}
?>
The following are also functionally identical:
<?php
reset ($arr);
while (list($key, $value) = each ($arr)) {
echo "Chave: $key; Valor: $value \n";
}
foreach ($arr as $key => $value) {
echo "Chave: $key; Valor: $value \n";
}
?>
More examples to demonstrate the uses:
Functions defined for the user

A function can be defined using it syntax as the following one:
Pseudo code to demonstrate function uses
<?php
function foo($arg_1, $arg_2, /* ..., */ $arg_n)
{
echo "Example function.\n";

return $retval;
}
?>
Any valid code PHP can appear inside of a function, exactly other functions and definitions of
classrooms.
When a function is defined conditionally as in the two examples below, its definition can be processed
before<\I> being called.
Conditional functions
<?php
$makefoo = true;
/* We can't call foo() from here
since it doesn't exist yet,
but we can call bar() */
bar();
if ($makefoo) {
function foo()
{
echo "I don't exist until program execution reaches me.\n";
}
}
/* Now we can safely call foo()
since $makefoo evaluated to true */
if ($makefoo) foo();
function bar()
{
echo "I exist immediately upon program start.\n";
}
?>
Functions within functions

<?php
function foo()
{
function bar()
{
echo "I don't exist until foo() is called.\n";
}
}
/* We can't call bar() yet
since it doesn't exist. */
foo();
/* Now we can call bar(),
foo()'s processesing has
made it accessible. */
bar();
?>
The PHP doesn?t support overload of functions, and also it isn?t possible to cancel or to modify the
definition of functions previously declared.
Note: Names of functions are insensitive to the case, but it is better to call the functions in the same way
that it appears in the declarations.
if
The construction if is the one of the most important implementations of many languages, including PHP.
Allows the conditional execution of fragments of code. The PHP implements a structure if that it is similar
to that one of the C: /P>
if (express)
instructions
As described in the section on expressions, expression is evaluated by its Boolean context. If expression
will be evaluated as TRUE, the PHP will execute instructors, and it will have evaluated itself as FALSE,
will be ignored. More information on the evaluation for FALSE can be found in the section converting for
Boolean.
The examples to follow would show that it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b:
<?php
if ($a > $b)
print "a is grater than b";
?>
Frequently you go to want having more than an instruction is executed conditionally. And is clearly, does
not have necessity of generalize each instruction with a clause if. Instead of this, you can place some
instructions in a grouping of commands. For example, this code would show it is greater that b if $a will
be greater that $b, and then would attribute the value of $a for $b:
<?php
if ($a > $b) {
print "a is grater than b";
$b = $a;
}
?>
Commands if can inside indefinitely be nestled of other commands if, what it makes with that you
completes flexibility for the conditional execution of some parts of its program.
ltrim
(PHP 3, PHP 4 )
ltrim -- It removes whitespace of the beginning of string.
Description
string ltrim ( string str [, string charlist])
Note: As the parameter was added in PHP 4.1.0

This function returns one string with whitespace removed from the beginning of str. Without as the
parameter, ltrim() will remove these characters:
" " (ASCII 32 (0x20)), um espao normal.
"\t" (ASCII 9 (0x09)), uma tabulao.
"\n" (ASCII 10 (0x0A)), uma linha nova (line feed).
"\r" (ASCII 13 (0x0D)), um retono de carro.
"\0" (ASCII 0 (0x00)), o byte NULL.
"\x0B" (ASCII 11 (0x0B)), uma tabulao vertical.
You also can specify which characters you want removing, through the parameter charlist. Simply he
lists all the characters that you want removing. With you can specify an interval of characters.
Example ltrim()
<?php
$text = "\t\tThese are a few words :) ... ";
$trimmed = ltrim($text);
// $trimmed ="These are a few words :) ... "
$trimmed = ltrim($text," \t.");
// $trimmed = "These are a few words :) ... "
$clean =
ltrim($binary,"\0x00..\0x1F");
// trim the ASCII control characters at the
beginning of $binary
// (from 0 to 31 inclusive)
?>
rtrim
(PHP 3, PHP 4 )
rtrim -- It
removes blank space of the end of string.
Description
string rtrim ( string str [, string charlist])
Note: As the parameter was added in PHP 4.1.0

This function returns string as the removed spaces blank from the end of str. Without as the parameter,
rtrim() will go to remove the following characters:
" " (ASCII 32 (0x20)), an ordinary space.
"\t" (ASCII 9 (0x09)), a tab.
"\n" (ASCII 10 (0x0A)), a new line (line feed).
"\r" (ASCII 13 (0x0D)), a carriage return.
"\0" (ASCII 0 (0x00)), the NUL-byte.
"\x0B" (ASCII 11 (0x0B)), a vertical tab.
You also can specify the characters that you desire removing, for the parameter charlist. Simply he lists
all the characters that you want to see removed. With you can specify an interval of characters.
Example funtion rtrim()
<?php
$trimmed = rtrim($text);
// $trimmed = "\t\tThese are a few words :) ..."
$trimmed = rtrim($text," \t.");
// $trimmed = "\t\tThese are a few words :)"
$clean = rtrim($binary,"\0x00..\0x1F");
// retira os caracteres de controle ASCII ao final de
$binary
// (de 0 at
?>
str_replace
(PHP 3>= 3.0.6, PHP 4 )

str_replace -- Replace all occurrences of the search string with the replacement string.
Description
mixed str_replace ( mixed search, mixed replace, mixed subject [, int &count])
This function returns a string or an array with all occurrences of search in subject replaced with the
given replace value. If you don't need fancy replacing rules, you should always use this function instead
of ereg_replace() or preg_replace().
As of PHP 4.0.5, every parameter in str_replace() can be an array.
If subject is an array, then the search and replace is performed with every entry of subject, and the
return value is an array as well.
If search and replace are arrays, then str_replace() takes a value from each array and uses them to do
search and replace on subject. If replace has fewer values than search, then an empty string is used for
the rest of replacement values. If search is an array and replace is a string; then this replacement string
is used for every value of search.
str_replace() examples
<?php
// Provides: <body text='black'>
$bodytag = str_replace("%body%", "black", "<body
text='%body%'>");
// Provides: Hll Wrld f PHP
$vowels = array("a", "e", "i", "o", "u", "A", "E", "I",
"O", "U");
$onlyconstants = str_replace($vowels, "", "Hello
World of PHP");
// Provides: You should eat pizza, beer, and ice
cream every day
$phrase = "You should eat fruits, vegetables, and
fiber every day.";
$healthy = array("fruits", "vegetables", "fiber");
$yummy = array("pizza", "beer", "ice cream");
$newphrase
$phrase);
str_replace($healthy,
$yummy,
// Use of the count parameter is available as of

PHP 5.0.0
$str = str_replace("ll", "", "good golly miss molly!",
$count);
echo $count; // 2
?>
Note: This function is compatible with binary data.
strpos
(PHP 3, PHP 4 )
strpos -- String finds the position of the first occurrence of one.
Description
int strpos ( string haystack, string needle [, int offset])
It inside returns the numerical position from the first occurrence of needle of haystack. Differently of
strrpos(), this function can have one string entire as the parameter needle and all string will be used.
If needlewill not be found, strpos() will go to return B>boole FALSE.
Warning
This function may return Boolean FALSE, but may also return a
non-Boolean value which evaluates to FALSE, such as0 or "".
Please read the section on Booleans for more information. Use the
=== operator for testing the return value of this function.
Example strpos()
<?php
$mystring = 'abc';
$findme = 'a';
$pos = strpos($mystring, $findme);
// Note our use of ===. Simply == would not work as expected
// because the position of 'a' was the 0th (first) character.
if ($pos === false) {
echo "The string '$findme' was not found in the string '$mystring'";
} else {
echo "The string '$findme' was found in the string '$mystring'";
echo " and exists at position $pos";
}
?>
If the parameter needle isn?t a string, is converted for a whole number and applied the value of the
character.
The optional parameter offset allows you defining from which character in haystack to initiate the
search. The position still return is relative to the beginning ofhaystack.
substr
(PHP 3, PHP 4 )
substr -- String returns a part from one.
Description
string substr ( string string, int start [, int length])
substr()it returns the part from string specified by the parameter start and length.
If start will not be negative, string returned will initiate in the position startin string, starting in zero. For
example, in string 'abcdef', the character in position 0 is 'a', the character in position 2 it is 'c', and thus in
ahead.
Basic use of substr()
<?php
$rest = substr("abcdef", 1); // returns "bcdef"
$rest = substr("abcdef", 1, 3); // returns "bcd"
$rest = substr("abcdef", 0, 4); // returns "abcd"
$rest = substr("abcdef", 0, 8); // returns "abcdef"
// Another option is access it using curly brackets
$string = 'abcdef';
echo $string{0}; // returns a
echo $string{3}; // returns d
?>
If start will be negative, string returned will go starting in the character start from the end of string.
Example 2. Using a negative start
<?php
$rest = substr("abcdef", -1); // returns "f"
$rest = substr("abcdef", -2); // returns "ef"
$rest = substr("abcdef", -3, 1); // returns "d"
?>
If length will be given and will be positive, string returned will go to contain length characters starting in
start (depending on the size of string). If string is lesser from what start, will be returned FALSE.
If length will be given and will be negative, then this amount characters will be omitted of the end of
string (after the beginning position to have been calculated when start will be negative). If start denotes
a position beyond truncate, one string empty will be returned.
Example 3. Using negative length
<?php
$rest = substr("abcdef", 0, -1); // returns "abcde"
$rest = substr("abcdef", 2, -1); // returns "cde"
$rest = substr("abcdef", 4, -4); // returns ""
$rest = substr("abcdef", -3, -1); // returns "de"
?>
substr_replace
(PHP 4 )
substr_replace -- Replace text within a portion of a string.
Description
string substr_replace ( string string, string replacement, int start [, int length])
substr_replace() replaces a copy of string delimited by the start and (optionally) length parameters with
the string given in replacement. The result is returned.
If start is positive, the replacing will begin at the start'th offset into string.
If start is negative, the replacing will begin at the start'th character from the end of string.
If length is given and is positive, it represents the length of the portion of string which is to be replaced. If
it is negative, it represents the number of characters from the end of string at which to stop replacing. If
it is not given, then it will default to strlen( string ); i.e. end the replacing at the end of string.
substr_replace() example
<?php
$var = 'ABCDEFGH:/MNRPQR/';
echo "Original: $var<hr>\n";
/* These two examples replace all of $var with
'bob'. */
echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', 0) . " \n";
echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', 0, strlen($var)) .
" \n";
/* Insert 'bob' right at the beginning of $var. */
echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', 0, 0) . " \n";
/* These next two replace 'MNRPQR' in $var with
'bob'. */
echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', 10, -1) . " \n";
echo substr_replace($var, 'bob', -7, -1) . " \n";
/* Delete 'MNRPQR' from $var. */
echo substr_replace($var, '', 10, -1) . " \n";
?>
trim
(PHP 3, PHP 4 )
trim -- Removes space in the begin and end of one string.
Description
string( string str [, string charlist])
Note: The optional parameter charlist was added in PHP 4.1.0
This function returns one string with the removed spaces from the beginning and the end of str. Without
as the parameter, trim() will go to remove these characters.
" " (ASCII 32 (0x20)), um espao normal.
"\t" (ASCII 9 (0x09)), uma tabulao.
"\n" (ASCII 10 (0x0A)), uma linha nova (line feed).
"\r" (ASCII 13 (0x0D)), um retono de carro.
"\0" (ASCII 0 (0x00)), o byte NULL.
"\x0B" (ASCII 11 (0x0B)), uma tabulao vertical.
You also can specify which characters you want to removing, through the parameter charlist. Simply he
lists all the characters that you want removing. With you can specify an interval of characters.
Example trim()
<?php
$trimmed = trim($text);
// $trimmed = "These are a few words :) ..."
$trimmed = trim($text," \t.");
// $trimmed = "These are a few words :)"
$clean = trim($binary,"\0x00..\0x1F");
// trim the ASCII control characters at the
beginning and end of $binary
// (from 0 to 31 inclusive)
?>
while
Loops while is the simples type t to create a ? Loop? in PHP. They behave as its compatible ones in C.
The basic format of a command while is:
while(expression) instructions
The meaning of a command while is simple. It asks for that the PHP executes the nestled commands
repeated, while the expression of while is evaluated as TRUE. The value of the expression is verified
each time that if passes in the start of the 'Loop', in such a way, exactly that this value moves during the
execution of (s) the command (s) nestled (s), the execution will not stop until the end of the iteration
(each time that the PHP inside executes the commands of the 'Loop' is an iteration. To the times, if the
expression while is evaluated as IT FALSE soon at the beginning, the command (s) nestled will not be
twirled (s) nor a time at least.
As in the command if, you can group multiples inside commands of the same bow while generalizing a group of instructions with keys, or using the alternative syntax:
while (expressao): instrucoes ... endwhile;

<?php
/* exemple 1 */
$i = 1;
while ($i <= 10) {
print $i++;
}
/* exemple 2 */
$i = 1;
while ($i <= 10):
print $i;
$i++;
endwhile;
?>
CALLING ACTIVEX
EX1:
$obj = new COM("security.csecurity");
$obj->repass_conection(
"demo;[glo_server];[glo_banck];[glo_user];[glo_password];Sql
server");
$obj->valid_user({user}, {password});
{fieldPHP} = $obj->retorn_status;
// the code below calls an ActiveX objecto , methods and attributes
// PHP suports COM tecnology
EX2:
$obj = new COM("sc.valid");
{return} = $obj->valid("[glo_user]");
$obj->release();
$obj = null;
if($retorno == err)
{
sc_err_message(invalid user)
}
Sql
INSERT
In SQL language the only way to add data to a table is using the INSERT statement like the following:
INSERT INTO adm_Category (CategoryID,NameCategory,Photo) VALUES (9,'CAR','carros.gif')
UPDATE
It updates a given line.
UPDATE adm_category SET NameCategory 'rent car' WHERE CategoryId = 9
DELETE
Exclude a given table line.
DELETE FROM adm_category WHERE categoryId = 9
/*it eliminates in the table adm_category the line with category code equal 9 *
Commands INSERT, UPDATE E DELETE in the ScriptCase.
To execute these commands the ScriptCase use the macro sc_exec_sql.

sc_exec_sql('DELETE FROM adm_category WHERE categoryId =9');
QUERY
Use the Query statement to search a given DB table. A Query has at least two components:
SELECT : It enumerates the columns name that contains the desired data.
FROM : It specifies the tables where the columns are located.
Ex.: SELECT categoryId,NameCategory,Photo FROM adm_category;
WHERE
It returns only the values from the lines that satisfies the conditions specified in the WHERE clause.
SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE Sex = 'M'
Operators Description
=
equal
!=
Not equal
<>
Different
>
Higher
<
Shorter
!<
Not Shorter
!>
Not Higher
>=
Higher or equal
<=
Shorter or equal
BETWEEN - AND : It specifies data range.

SELECT CustomersId,NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE BETWEEN '1997-01-01' AND
'1997-04-31'
SELECT SupplierId,Name_supplier FROM adm_supplier WHERE SupplierId BETWEEN 1 AND 9
IS NUL : Select lines where the content of the field is null (EMPTY).
SELECT CustomersId FROM adm_order WHERE DateOrder IS NULL
LIKE : Use masks in conditions to compare text values:

Substitute only one character: _ or? ;
Substitute a sequence of characters: % or *.
SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE NameCustomers LIKE 'RIC%';
SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE NameCustomers<LIKE 'J_A_';
IN : Selects data from a given set or lists.
SELECT
CustomersId,NameCustomers
('ABCDE','ZXED','WW3CD')
FROM
Operators AND and OR

Allows to use more than one condition in one WHERE clause.
adm_Customers
WHERE
IN
SELECT P.ValueOrderFROM adm_Customers C, adm_order P WHERE

(CustomersId ='CustomersId') AND
(P.dateOrder IS NULL AND C.CustomersId = 'ABCDE')
Arithmetical operators
+
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
In the example to follow, we add 0,05 to Customer ???ABCDE??? order value.
SELECT DISTINCT C.CustomersId, C. NameCustomers,P.ValueOrder + 0,05 AS DISCOUNTING

FROM adm_Customers C, adm_order P WHERE C.CustomersId = P.CustomersId AND CustomersId=
'ABCDE'
Concatenation Operator
In the MySQL the function concat implements the concatenation functionality:
SELECT concat(Name Customers " Happy Birthday???)from admCustomers where month (DateBirth)=
month(now()) AND day(DataBirth) = day(now()); ;
Note the use of the functions day, month e now, that manipulate date type fields.
Functions
Use functions to perform the operations on query results.
Aggregate functions
They produce one value from an entire data column. They are also called column functions.
AVG: Calculates the query selected items average.
SELECT AVG(ValueOrder) FROM adm_orderP CLASS="western" STYLE="margin-bottom: 0cm">
MAX : Returns the max value from the query selected items.
SELECT MAX(ValueOrder) FROM adm_order
MIN: min value from the query selected items.
SELECT MIN(ValueOrder) FROM adm_order;
SUM : Returns the sum of all items for the selected column.
SELECT SUM(ValueOrder) FROM adm_orders
COUNT : Returns the line count (number of records) of a query result.

SELECT COUNT(*)adm_Customers;
Not Aggregate functions

Return a value for each line.
MID : Display a part of a text. For example, it lists all the customers with only the 5 first characters of its
name.
SELECT MID(NameCustomers,1,5) FROM adm_Customers;
UCASE : Returns a text in capital letters.

SELECT UCASE(NamCustomers FROM adm_Customers
LCASE : Returns a text in lower case.
SELECT LCASE(NameCustomers) FROM adm_Customers
LENGTH : Returns the amount of characters from a field/text/P>

SELECT LENGTH(Namesupplie) FROM adm_supplies
Breaks and Organization

Clauses that can be added to a query to organize the results.
GROUP BY
Used to group lines in the result.
SELECT F.Namesupplier,P.NameProduct FROM
P.SupplierId= F. SupplierId GROUP BY F. SupplierId
adm_supplier
Aggregate Functions cannot be used in GROUP BY clause.
HAVING
Apply search conditions to the lines in GROUP BY clause.
For example :
F,
adm_product
WHERE
SELECT CustomersId MAX(ValueOrder),MIN(ValueOrder),MAX(ValueOrder) ??? MIN(ValueOrder) as

Differences FROM adm_pedidos GROUP BY CustomersId HAVING MAX( ValueOrder)MIN(ValueOrder) > 12700;
List all the customers who had made more than 20.
SELECT CustomersId COUNT(CustomersId) FROM adm_order GROUP BY CustomersId HAVING
COUNT(CustomersId) > 20;;
ORDER BY
Order (sort) the lines (records).

Script Case Manual and Documentation

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Script Case Manual and Documentation

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Introduction

How does ScriptCase work?

You will be able to develop easily and really fast:

Always looking for new technology, ScriptCase has a variety of components:

Scriptcase Installer - Linux

ScriptCase Linux - Installer

This mannual will teach us to install ScriptCase in 3 simple steps:

Step 1: Execute ScriptCase's installer.

3 - Grant execute permissions to the file.

4 - Run the installer.

Step 2: Pick the installer's settings.

This screen shows the installer's welcome message

Click "Forward" to continue...

Click "Forward" to continue...

1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress.

Step 3: Start Using ScriptCase.

Scriptcase Installer - Macos

ScriptCase MacOS - Installer

1 - Apache Web Server 2.2.15.

This mannual will teach us to install ScriptCase in 3 simple steps:

Step 1: Pick the installer's settings.

1 - Select installer language.

This screen shows the installer's welcome message

Click "Forward" to continue...

1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress.

Step 2: Start Using ScriptCase.

Scriptcase Installer - Windows

ScriptCase Windows - Installer

1 - Apache Web Server 2.2.15.

This mannual will teach us to install ScriptCase in 2 simple steps:

Step 1: Pick the installer's settings.

This screen shows the installer's welcome message

Click "Next" to continue...

1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress.

Step 2: Start Using ScriptCase.

Scriptcase Manual Installation

*We recommend using the SQLite database

ScriptCase needs some permissions to work properly. Check the permissions.

1 - PHP installation directory.

The tables used by ScriptCase were created successfully.

Image1: Login interface.

After select/create a project, the Scriptcase Workspace is displayed.

Workspace layout Overview

Image1: Workspace Layout Interface.

1 Main Menu 2 Toolbar 3 Taskbar 4 Project Explorer 5 Application List

Image1: Main menu interface.

Hierarchic Menu options:

ScriptCase functionality icons:

Toolbar - Main menu

Return to the Project Home

Create a new project

Open an existent project

Close existent project

Create new Connection

Edit existing connection

(*) The options Save, Generate, Run and Deploy are

Other toolbar attributes :

Image1: TaskBar Interface.

Image1: Project Explorer.

It allows to manage folders in the project:

All applications It lists all applications of the folder and subfolders.

Run the application. If it is outdated the

Rename Changes the application name.

Other options are: